Using this Manual

Though the SSMΙΙΙ is designed for fault diagnosis

operations using an interactive user interface, there
may be times that you will need to refer to this man-
ual to find out more about using more complex pro-
cedures. When performing actual fault diagnostic
work, you should also refer to the Service Manual.
Click the title in contents to go to the relevant page.

1
 Contents

Using this Manual ....................................... 1 Creating a Mode File ................................46

Introduction ..................................................... 5 Reading a Mode File for Sampling ...........48
List of Abbreviation ......................................... 6 Trigger ...........................................................50
Before Starting Diagnosis ............................... 9 Getting Ready ...........................................50
Handling Precautions ................................. 9 Configuring Trigger of input data
SSMΙΙΙ Features ......................................... 9 Settings .....................................................52
Switching the SDI Mode ................................ 11 Configuring a Manual Trigger ...................54
SDI Mode Types ....................................... 11 Two Cursor Analysis .....................................56
Switching a Mode ..................................... 11 Cursor Numerical Value Information
Display Software Version Information ........... 12 between Two Points .................................56
PC Application Version Information .......... 12 Data Cut-and-Save ...................................58
CF Application Version Information .......... 12 Converting Sampled Data to CSV .................61
Starting Up the System ................................. 13 How to Convert to CSV from Menu ..........61
Main Menu Items ...................................... 13 How to Convert to CSV with Save Icon or
Save Button ..............................................62
Quitting the System .................................. 14
In the Case of Too Many Sampled Data ...63
Wireless LAN Communication ...................... 16
Saving Displayed Data ..................................66
Caution items ........................................... 16
How to Save .............................................66
Parts required for wireless LAN
communication ......................................... 17 Saved Data Display .......................................67
Outline of the wireless LAN connection Display Screen Operations .......................68
procedure ................................................. 17 Multiple display of saved data ...................68
Wireless LAN setting on the PC side ....... 17 Diagnostic Codes Display .............................71
Wireless LAN setting on the SDI side ...... 24 Manual Link (Excluding North America) ........74
Switching to wireless LAN connection ...... 25 Clearing Memory ...........................................76
Switching to USB connection ................... 26 System Operation Check Mode ....................78
When using equipment already set for Actuator ON/OFF Operation .....................79
wireless LAN ............................................ 27 Fuel Pump Control ....................................79
List of terms related to Wireless LAN Fixed Idle Ignition Timing ..........................80
communication ......................................... 28 Idle Speed Control ....................................80
Communication Messages ............................ 29 Injector Control .........................................80
All Systems Diagnosis .................................. 30 EGR Valve Control ...................................80
Each System Check ...................................... 31 Dealer Check Mode Procedure .....................81
Current Data Display and Save .................... 33 OBD System ..................................................85
Digital Data Screen Operations ................ 34 Function Check Sequence ............................89
Graph 1 Screen ........................................ 38 ABS Function Check Mode .......................90
Graph 2 Screen (Single-screen 8-channel VDC Function Check Mode ......................90
Graph) ...................................................... 44 Steering Angle Sensor Neutral and Lateral
Setting All Clear Function ......................... 45 G Sensor Zero Setting Mode ....................90
Functions for Initializing Toolbars ............. 45 Fault Data Display .........................................91
Sampling Item Memory ................................. 46 Selection of Parameter ..................................93

2
 Registration Procedure ............................. 93 Keyless access with push button start
Confirm on Parameter ................................... 95 system: Correspondence table at the
Confirm Procedure ................................... 95 time of parts failure .................................145
Body Integrated Module Destination Registering the Audio Security (U.K Only) ..148
Market Registry (Excluding North America Learning and inspection mode related
and Japan) .................................................... 97 to AT ............................................................151
Confirmation of Vehicle Destination Getting Ready .........................................151
(Part 1) ..................................................... 97 AT learning mode ...................................152
Confirmation of Vehicle Destination AT air bleeding mode ..............................155
(Part 2) ..................................................... 98 Learning, inspection, and registration mode
Registration Steps for Registering Vehicle related to diesel engines (Excluding North
Destination ............................................... 99 America) ......................................................156
Body Integrated Module Function Check .... 100 Diesel compulsory learning mode ...........156
Body Integrated Module Function Setting Registering the Injector Code .................158
(Integ.Unit Customizing) ............................. 102 Driving Recorder (SDR) ..............................165
Display the List of Function Setting (Integ. Creating an SDR Setting File ..................165
Unit Customizing) ........................................ 104 Saving SDR Data to CF Card .................167
How to Display the List ........................... 104 Saving SDR Data to PC ..........................168
Displaying Saved Files ........................... 105 Opening and analyzing saved data ........171
Printing the Data ..................................... 106 Trigger Function ......................................171
Impact Sensor ............................................. 107 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement
Registering the Transmitter ......................... 109 (SDR) ..........................................................175
Keyless Entry Control Module Function Creating an SDR Setting File ..................175
Setting (Keyless unit Customizing) ............. 111 Saving SDR Data to CF Card .................178
Registering the Tire Pressure Monitoring Saving SDR Data to PC ..........................179
System Transmitter (ID) .............................. 113
Opening and analyzing saved data ........179
Calibrating the Occupant Detection
Remote Box .................................................180
System ........................................................ 116
Handling Precautions ..............................180
Airbag System ............................................. 120
Names of Parts .......................................180
CAN System Fault Location ........................ 122
Connecting to the SDI .............................180
Registering the Immobilizer (Not Equipped
with Keyless Access with Push Button Start Remote Box Functions ...........................180
System) ....................................................... 123 Sampling of G Sensor Analog Output .....181
Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with Guideline for reprogramming procedure for
the Keyless Access with Push Button Start SSMΙΙΙ .........................................................183
System) ....................................................... 128 Notes on doing ECM reprogramming .....183
Registering the Smart Immobilizer ......... 129 ECM reprogramming ..............................183
Registering the Smart ECM .................... 133 Setting Screen Font, Display Unit and Display
Registering the Engine ECM .................. 135 Language ....................................................186
Readout the Number of Mobile Key Changing the Screen Font ......................186
(Access Key) Registration ...................... 138 Changing the Display Units ....................186
Delete the Mobile Key (Access Key) Changing the Display Language .............187
ID ............................................................ 139 Analog Sampling .........................................188
Registering the Remote Control Engine Handling Precautions ..............................188
Starter ..................................................... 141 Pulse/Analog Kit Contents ......................188

3
 Getting Ready for Sampling ................... 188 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with
Starting a Sampling Operation ............... 189 the Keyless Access with Push Button Start
Configuring Analog Sampling Settings ... 190 System) ...................................................228
Trigger Function ..................................... 193 Registering the Smart Immobilizer ..........229
Changing the Range while Using Auto Registering the Smart ECM ....................232
Range ..................................................... 195 Registering the Engine ECM ..................234
Initialize Item Settings ............................ 196 Readout the Number of Mobile Key
Other Operations .................................... 196 (Access Key) Registration ......................236
ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement .. 197 Delete the Mobile Key (Access Key)
ID ............................................................237
Starting ECM Analog Simultaneous
Measurement ......................................... 197 Registering the Remote Control Engine
Starter .....................................................239
Stopping ECM Analog Simultaneous
Measurement ......................................... 200 Configuring SDI Functions ......................240
Trigger Function ..................................... 200 Performing SDI Self-diagnosis ................243
Data Select Screen ................................ 201 SDI System Menu .......................................248
Setting All Clear Function ....................... 201 Getting Ready (Starting Up the SDI in the
System Mode) .........................................248
Other Operations .................................... 202
SELF CHECK (SDI Self-check) ..............248
Roughness Monitor ..................................... 203
VERSION CHECK ..................................253
Sampling with Simple Roughness
FUNCTION SETUP (SDI Function
Monitor ................................................... 203
Setup) .....................................................253
Sampling with High-Grade Roughness
List of Contents on Displayed Data .............255
Monitor ................................................... 205
Engine .....................................................255
Changing Graph Range ......................... 209
Transmission ..........................................271
Saving Sampled Data ............................. 209
Body Integrated Unit ...............................281
Saved Data Display ................................ 210
Communication Error Code List ..................300
SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis ......................... 212
ECM Reprogramming Error Code List ........302
Getting Ready (Starting Up the SDI in
Stand-alone Mode) ................................. 212 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List
(PC Display) ............................................302
All Systems Diagnosis ............................ 212
ECM Reprogramming Error Code List
Diagnostic Codes Check on Each
(NSM LCD Display) ................................316
System ................................................... 213
SSMΙΙΙ revision history ................................318
Data Display ........................................... 214
List of Part Numbers ....................................324
Saving Sampled Data ............................. 216
Save data stored in a
CF card to a PC. ..................................... 216
Clearing Memory .................................... 220
Body Integrated Module Function Setting
(ECM Customizing) ................................ 221
Impact Sensor ........................................ 222
Registering the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Transmitter (ID) ......................... 223
Registering the Immobilizer (Not Equipped
with Keyless Access with Push Button Start
System.) ................................................. 225

4
 Introduction

Introduction
The SSMΙΙΙ is a powerful fault diagnosis device that
has been developed using the latest advanced
technology. Used in combination with a PC, it pro-
vides a tool for quick and efficient analysis of vehicle
faults.
Application software running on a PC provides an
interactive user interface for very simple operation.
High-speed communication with the engine control
system and transmission control system help to
make checking of various phenomena faster than
ever before.
Be sure to carefully read this manual in combination
with the Service Manual to develop fault diagnostic
skills by using SSMΙΙΙ functions to their fullest.
Note that the illustrations and display screens
shown in this manual may differ from those of the
actual SSMΙΙΙ due to specification modifications.

Microsoft, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Internet Explorer are either registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Intel, Pentium M is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
Adobe Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
EFI (Electronic Fuel Injection) is a trademark of TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION.

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES Ltd.

© copyright 2004- FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES Ltd.

5
 List of Abbreviation

List of Abbreviation
Abbreviation Spell-out
A/C Air Conditioner
A/F Air/Fuel ratio
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
AC Alternating Current
ACC Accessory
AET AT Engine Torque request
ASSY Assembly
AT Automatic Transmission
ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid
AWD All Wheel Drive
BIU Body Integrated Unit
BMP Bit MaP
CAM Camshaft
CAN Controller Area Network
CD Compact Disk
CD-ROM Compact Disk Read Only Memory
CF Compact Flash
CID Calibration Identification
CNG Compressed Natural Gas
COM Common
CPC Canister Purge Control solenoid valve
CR Crankshaft
CSV Comma Separated Values
DC Direct Current
DCCD Drivers Control Center Differential
DRL Daytime Running Lights
D-sub D subminiature
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
EAM Engine AT Masking flag
ECM Electronic Control Module
EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation
ETC Electronic Throttle Control system
FWD Front Wheel Drive

6
 List of Abbreviation

Abbreviation Spell-out
IC Integrated Circuit
ID Identification
IG Ignition
ISC Idle Speed Control
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LH Left Hand
LSD Limited Slip Differential
MIL Malfunction Indication Lamp
MT Manual Transmission
NSM New Select Monitor
OBD On Board Diagnosis
OCV Oil flow Control solenoid Valve
OS Operating System
OSV Oil Switching solenoid Valve
P/W Power Window
PAK Pack
Pass Passing
PC Personal Computer
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient
PV Power system supply Voltage *1
RAM Random Access Memory
RH Right Hand
ROM Read Only Memory
RTC Real Time Clock
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SDI SUBARU Diagnostic Interface
SDR SUBARU Driving Recorder
SI International System of Units
SSMΙΙΙ SUBARU Select Monitor ΙΙΙ
SW Switch
TCM Transmission Control Module
TCS Traction Contorol System
TGV Tumble Generator Valve

7
 List of Abbreviation

Abbreviation Spell-out
TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tr Transistor
USB Universal Serial Bus
VDC Vehicle Dynamics Control
VVL Variable Valve Lift
VVT Variable Valve Timing

*1: There are two power supplies, “Power system supply voltage” actuates an actuator and “Sensor system
supply voltage” activates a sensor.

8
 Before Starting Diagnosis

Before Starting Diagnosis 2) Powerful Application Software

Application software running on a PC provides an
interactive user interface for very simple opera-
Handling Precautions tion. A hierarchical menu system simplifies rou-
• The SDI is a precision measuring instrument. tine operations, even for novice users.
Prevent water, oil, grease or other substance
from getting on the SDI. 3) Communication Functions
• Never try to take the SDI or its bundled items The SDI communicates directly with the vehicle’s
apart. ECMs, while transfer between the SDI and PC is
• Never disconnect the diagnosis cable from the performed over a high-speed USB 1.1 connec-
vehicle data link connector or the SDI while the tion. The SDI is also equipped with card slots,
system is ON. Doing so can damage the SDI. creating hardware architecture that can support
• Never insert or remove a CF card while SDI pow- both wired and wireless LAN communication be-
er is turned on. tween the SDI and PC.
• Always insert the bundled dummy card in the
card slot when not using a CF card. 4) Multilingual Support
• Take care to avoid damage to the LCD of the SDI. The SSMΙΙΙ supports five languages: English,
Should the LCD panel ever become cracked and French, German, Spanish, and Japanese.
start leaking liquid, do not touch the liquid. If you The language switches automatically in accord-
get the liquid on your skin, immediately flush the ance with the language of the operating system
exposed area with large volumes of water. running on the connected PC, eliminating opera-
Should you experience any skin abnormalities, tor confusion.
consult with a skin specialist immediately.
• Whenever using the SSMΙΙΙ for fault diagnosis 5) Data Sampling
while the vehicle is in motion, never allow the Data sampling is performed for all items, which
driver to operate the SSMΙΙΙ or SDI. eliminates the chance of the operator forgetting to
obtain required data. After all data is sampled and
stored, specific data items can be recalled for
SSMΙΙΙ Features analysis as required. Communication speed is
The SSMΙΙΙ is a fault diagnosis device that provides fast enough to support normal diagnosis without
a standard means of automotive fault diagnosis. It any problem. This system can be configured to
communicates with the various system control mod- select measurement items during sampling,
ules equipped in a vehicle to monitor control module which switches the communication protocol for
input/output data, and to allow checking and dele- high-speed data communication.
tion of diagnostic codes generated by the control Switching is performed at intervals of some tens
module. It also provides means to reset control of ms, so phenomena can be reliably recorded,
module learning values and other control parame- even if they have a very short life. (This capability
ters, and to force operation of engine control system is available with engines and transmission control
actuators. systems that employ the latest communication
protocol.)
1) Bi-directional Communication with Vehicle Elec-
tronic Control Modules (ECM) 6) Digital Data Display
The SSMΙΙΙ makes it possible to perform bi-direc- Data is displayed on a PC monitor making it eas-
tional communication between a PC and each of ier to view.
a vehicle’s on-board ECMs via a SUBARU Diag- Though the number of items that can be dis-
nostic Interface (SDI). This makes it possible to played depends on the size of the PC monitor
monitor ECM data, check ECM diagnostic codes, screen and the font size, typically more than 25
and force operation of actuators. items can be displayed simultaneously.

9
 Before Starting Diagnosis

7) Graph Data Display

Data displayed on PC monitor in color greatly fa-
cilitates interpretation and analysis of diagnostic
phenomena. Graph line colors can be specified
as desired, which makes it possible to display
graphs that suit individual preferences and
needs.

8) Diagnosis Cable
A standard SAE J1962 connector is used on the
end of the cable that connects to the vehicle.
The end that connects to the SDI is a highly dura-
ble D-Sub 44-pin connector.
The length of the cable is a convenient 2.3 m (7.5
ft). Reprogramming work can also be performed
using this cable.

9) USB cable
Since communication between the PC and SDI is
performed using USB 1.1 protocol, a USB cable
is used to connect the PC and SDI.
The cable is 3 m (10 ft) long, which allows com-
puter analysis even when the PC is located at a
considerable distance from the vehicle.

10)SDI Cushioning Rubber

Cushioning rubber attached to SDI absorbs
shock and protects the interface from damage if it
is dropped.

10
 Switching the SDI Mode

Switching the SDI Mode Stand-alone Mode

To enter the Stand-alone Mode, hold down both the
SDI Mode Types [MENU] key and the [C] key of the SDI for at least
There are four SDI modes. two seconds, during the Driving Recorder Mode, or
at the initial screen of the PC Application Mode.
• Driving Recorder Mode
Exiting the Stand-alone Mode automatically enters
• Stand-alone Mode (CF Application Diagnosis
the Driving Recorder Mode.
Mode)
• System Mode (SDI System Mode)
Stand-alone Mode Initial Screen
• PC Application Mode
The following sections provide details about using
each mode.

Switching a Mode
Driving Recorder Mode SMU-00513
The Driving Recorder Mode is the initial default
mode when SDI power is turned on. Exiting any of System Mode
the other modes always enters the Driving Record- To enter the System Mode, hold down the SDI’s
er Mode. That is, unless any other mode is operat- [MENU] key as you turn on the SDI.
ed, the SDI maintains the Driving Recorder Mode. Exiting the System Mode automatically enters the
Driving Recorder Mode.
NOTE:
A special setting file is required only when using the
System Mode Initial Screen
Driving Recorder Mode. If there is no setting file on
the CF card when the Driving Recorder Mode is en-
tered, the message “No Setting File in CF Card” ap-
pears on the SDI display. Lack of a setting file
presents no problem if the Driving Recorder Mode
is not used.
Driving Recorder Mode Screen SMU-00322

PC Application Mode
The SDI will enter the PC Application Mode auto-
matically whenever you start up the PC application
on the computer and execute various diagnostics,
sampling or registration while in any other mode.
SMU-00548 Exiting the PC Application Mode automatically en-
ters the Driving Recorder Mode.

PC Application Mode Screen

SMU-00519

11
 Display Software Version Information

Display Software Version CF Application Version

Information Information
To display software version of PC application and 1. Turn on the SDI.
CF application, perform the following procedure. 2. Press the both [MENU] key and [C] key on the
SDI at the same time more than two seconds.
PC Application Version 3. The version information shown below is dis-
Information played few seconds before Initial Menu screen of
1. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to Stand-alone Diagnosis is displayed.
start up the application.
2. Select “About application” from “Help” in menu.

SMU-00812

SMU-00810

3. This displays version information as shown be-

low.

SMU-00811

NOTE:
• To confirm version information, it is not necessary
to connect a PC to vehicle. The version informa-
tion can be displayed on a PC alone.
• In High-Grade Roughness Monitor sampling
screen, the version information of Roughness
Monitor will be displayed.
• To confirm the functions supported in displayed
version (for software currently installed), see “SS-
MΙΙΙ revision history”.

12
 Starting Up the System

Starting Up the System

With the SSMΙΙΙ, the PC application communicates
via the SDI with the control modules for which SS-
MΙΙΙ diagnosis is supported. In order to enable nor-
mal communication, start up the SSMΙΙΙ using the
procedure described below.
NOTE:
• Power from the vehicle’s battery is supplied to the
SDI via the fault diagnostic cable.
• If you use the SSMΙΙΙ when the vehicle’s battery SMU-00113
is low, then a communication error may occur
when the engine is started. This is caused by a 3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
drop in the voltage as a large current flows to the 4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
starter motor, because the SDI stops operating. If
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
this happens do the following.
start up the application. This causes the Main
1. To continue testing for faults after starting the
Menu to appear.
engine, after starting the engine press the
[PWR] key on the SDI to turn on the power,
then restart the SSMΙΙΙ operation.
2. To do fault diagnosis while the engine is run-
ning, charge the battery completely before do-
ing the fault diagnosis.
• If the PC has more than one USB port, the PC
USB port where the SDI is connected when you
install the USB driver will become the special SS-
MΙΙΙ port. Whenever using the SSMΙΙΙ, always
connect the USB cable to the special SSMΙΙΙ port
only. SMU-00600

1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,

and a PC with the PC application installed.
Main Menu Items
Explanations of each of the Main Menu items are
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the provided below. Select the item you want on the
data link connector of the vehicle. Main Menu to perform fault diagnostic word, to con-
NOTE: figure settings, and to perform other tasks.
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR All System Diagnosis
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s Selecting this item displays on a single screen the
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press fault detect status of all control system control mod-
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the ules for which SSMΙΙΙ diagnosis is supported, and
PWR LED of the SDI lights. memorized diagnostic codes.

13
 Starting Up the System

Each System Check • SDI power will turn off automatically if you leave
Selecting this item makes it possible to select a par- the diagnosis cable connected to the SDI and do
ticular system from among the control systems for not perform any operation on the PC for a certain
which SSMΙΙΙ diagnosis is supported, and perform period. This is indicated when the PWR LED of
fault diagnosis. the SDI goes out.
This item can be used to view input/output data of If this happens, press the SDI [PWR] key to turn
the system control modules that perform fault diag- it back on again.
nosis, memorized diagnostic codes, and other data
on the PC display. Quitting the System
This menu item is also used after repair work is 1. On the Main Menu, select [Quit] and then press
complete to delete diagnostic codes, to configure the Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
control module settings, etc.
You can also quit the system by selecting [Quit]
on the [File] menu, by clicking the button
Saved Data Display on the function Key Bar, or by pressing the F12
This item can be used to save various data sampled function key on the PC keyboard.
during fault diagnosis operations, and to load data
for viewing after work is complete.

Immobilizer
This item performs immobilizer registration.

Reprogram
This item performs reprogramming of the control
module.

Read CF application measurement data

SMU-00568
This item performs reading stand alone measure-
ment data saved in a CF card to hard disk of your 2. Confirm that the PC application is no longer run-
PC. ning, and turn off the vehicle ignition key.
3. Disconnect the diagnosis cable from the vehicle
Convert/Save measurement data on data link connector. The SDI is turned off when
driving recorder the diagnosis cable is disconnected.
Loads data sampled on the driving recorder to the
PC from the CF card, and converts and saves that NOTE:
data. The SDI can also be turned off by holding down
both the [MENU] key and the [DOWN] key of the
Oscilloscope SDI for at least two seconds.
After attaching the optional pulse/analog cartridge 4. Disconnect the diagnosis cable and the USB ca-
to SDI, connect the pulse/analog box to the SDI and ble from the PC and SDI.
using pulse/analog probe to perform analog sam-
pling. NOTE:
The PC application settings listed below are re-
NOTE: membered whenever the system is exited. These
• A message may appear during system startup in- settings are automatically restored the next time the
structing you to update the PC application. If it PC application is started up.
does, install the newest version of the PC appli-
cation as soon as possible. • Display order of Digital Data Screen and Graph
Screen items
• Display cell width settings

14
 Starting Up the System

• Data select function setting items

• Graph Screen range settings
• Graph Screen graph line colors and thicknesses
• Display language
• Display unit settings
• Display font settings
• Print settings

15
 Wireless LAN Communication

Wireless LAN Communication • As wireless LAN communication is communication

by radio waves, the communication status deterio-
The normal communication method (connection
rates when the communication distance between
method) between PC and SDI is by USB cable, but
PC and SDI increases. The confirmation status
when a wireless LAN card is used, wireless LAN
can be confirmed with the “NET” lamp of the PC
communication without a USB cable is possible.
wireless LAN card or the “Number of samples” of
This chapter explains the setting method for wire-
the sampling status bar. If the communication sta-
less LAN communication when the following envi-
tus has become bad, reduce the distance between
ronment is used.
PC and SDI to improve the communication status.
The system configuration is so that data measur-
<Use environment>
ing is possible even when the communication sta-
OS:Windows XP or Windows 2000 tus has deteriorated and the sampling number is
Wireless LAN: PC built-in or external type (PC card not displayed continuously, but when the commu-
slot) nication status deteriorates extremely, communi-
cation errors may occur. (However, data display is
Caution items not possible when the communication has been
• When a wireless LAN is used, immobilizer regis- cut completely.)
tration, reprogramming, CF application installa-
tion, and SDI firmware updating cannot be done.
Use a USB connection for execution of these
functions. (The illustration is an example for up-
dating the SDI firmware.)

SMU-00982

• Do not use a wireless LAN in countries not shown

in the following list, as approval according to the
radio law has not been obtained.
SMU-00993
Australia Japan
• Switch off the SDI power supply before inserting Bulgaria Malta
or removing a wireless LAN card. When a wire- Canada Netherlands
less LAN card is inserted or removed while the
Chile New Zealand
SDI power is switched on, the inside of the wire-
less LAN card may become damaged. China Norway
Cyprus Poland
Czech Portugal
France Saudi Arabia
Germany Singapore
Greece Spain
Guam Sweden
Hawaii Switzerland
Iceland Taiwan
Ireland Turkey
Israel U. K.
Italy USA

16
 Wireless LAN Communication

Parts required for wireless LAN 1. Click “Start” on the taskbar and select “Control
communication Panel”.

SMU-01023 SMU-00983

A: PC with built-in wireless LAN or external wireless NOTE:

LAN Depending on the PC display settings, click “Start”
B: Wireless LAN card for SDI and select “Control Panel” from “Settings”.

NOTE:
A CD-ROM is enclosed with the wireless LAN card
for SDI, but it is not used. SDI requires no driver in-
stallation.

Outline of the wireless LAN

connection procedure
Explanations are provided only for Windows XP.
1. Install a wireless LAN for the PC.
2. Set the SDI side to wireless LAN.
3. Switch the SDI connection method from USB to SMU-00984
wireless LAN.
NOTE:
In case of Windows 2000, use your wireless LAN
utility and perform setting for wireless LAN commu-
nication.

Wireless LAN setting on the PC

side
Explanations are provided only for Windows XP.
In case of an external type, connect the wireless
LAN card and install the driver on the PC.

17
 Wireless LAN Communication

2. The control panel is displayed. Double-click “Net-

work Connections”.

SMU-00987

4. Select “Properties” from “File” in the menu.

SMU-00985

NOTE:
Depending on the display settings of the PC, there
may be no “Network Connections”. In this case,
click “Switch to Classic View” to switch the screen
display.

SMU-00988

5. The screen “Wireless Network Connection Prop-

erties” is displayed. Select “General”.

SMU-00986

3. The screen “Network Connections” is displayed.

Select “Wireless Network Connections”.

SMU-00989

18
 Wireless LAN Communication

6. Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and click the 8. Enter the address to “IP address”. Refer to “SS-
“Properties” button. MΙΙΙ wireless LAN communication” enclosed with
the SDI wireless LAN card for the characters to
be entered.

SMU-00990

7. Check “Use the following IP address:”. SMU-00992

9. Enter numbers for “Subnet mask”. Refer to “SS-

MΙΙΙ wireless LAN communication” enclosed with
the SDI wireless LAN card for the characters to
be entered.

SMU-00991

SMU-00994

10.Do not enter anything for “Default gateway” and

leave the field blank.
11.Do not enter anything for “Preferred DNS server”
and “Alternate DNS server” and leave the fields
blank.

19
 Wireless LAN Communication

12. After confirmation of the entered setting con- 14.Click the button “Add…”.
tents, click the button [OK] and close the window.

SMU-00997
SMU-00995
15.The screen “Wireless Network Properties” is dis-
13.Select the tab “Wireless Networks”. played. Select the tab “Association”.

SMU-00996 SMU-00998

20
 Wireless LAN Communication

16.Enter the production number of the communica- 17.Select “Open” for “Network Authentication”.
tion SDI in “Network Name (SSID)”. (Here,
“100001” is entered as an example.)

SMU-01001

SMU-00999
18.Select “WEP” for ”Data encryption”.

NOTE:
The SDI Production Number is shown on the seal
on the side of the SDI.

SMU-01000

SMU-01002

21
 Wireless LAN Communication

19.Uncheck “The key is provided for me automati- NOTE:

cally”. Enter the network keys using lower case letters. In
case of input in “CapsLock” status (upper case let-
ters), an warning message is displayed.

SMU-01005

21.Enter the same characters as for “Network key”

also for “Comfirm network key”.

SMU-01003

20.Enter an encryption key (alphanumeric) for “Net-

work key”. Refer to “SSMΙΙΙ wireless LAN com-
munication” enclosed with the SDI wireless LAN
card for the characters to be entered.

SMU-01006

SMU-01004

22
 Wireless LAN Communication

22.Set “1” for “Key index (advanced)”. 24.When setting has been completed, click the but-
ton [OK] and close the window.

SMU-01007
SMU-01009
23.Enter a check for “This is a computer-to-compu-
ter [ad hoc] network: wirelss access points are 25.Confirm creation of a profile with the same
not used”. number as entered for “Network name (SSID)” in
the preceding step in the column “Preferred net-
works” and click the button “OK” to close the win-
dow.

SMU-01008

SMU-01010

26.This completes the wireless LAN setting on the

PC side.

23
 Wireless LAN Communication

Wireless LAN setting on the SDI 7. Click the button “Set SDI”.
side
1. Insert an SDI wireless LAN card into the CF card
slot of the SDI.
NOTE:
The wireless LAN card must be inserted to the CF
card slot CF2, the lower one, of the SDI.
2. Connect SDI and PC with a USB cable.
3. Switch on the SDI power.
4. Start SSMΙΙΙ (PC application).
5. Click the botton on the Function Key
Bar of the main menu screen or press function
key F11 of the PC.

SMU-01013

8. The SDI setting window is displayed. Enter the

Production Number. (Here, “100001” is entered
as an example.)
SMU-01011

6. The screen “SDI Connection Setup” is displayed.

Select “LAN” for “Select Connection”.

SMU-01014

NOTE:
The number entered here is the same as the
SMU-01012 number entered for “Network Name (SSID)” with
“Wireless LAN Setting on the PC Side”. If a different
number has been entered, change it to the same
number. In case of a different number, communica-
tion between SDI and PC cannot be established.

24
 Wireless LAN Communication

9. Confirm the entered number and click the button 3. Click the button on the Function Key
[OK]. Bar of the main menu screen or press function
key F11 of the PC.

SMU-01011

4. The screen “SDI Connection Setup” is displayed.

Select “LAN” for “Select Connection”.

SMU-01015

10.The setting completion message is displayed.

Click the button [OK].

SMU-01012
SMU-01016
5. Click the button “SDI Search”.
11.Restart the SDI.

Switching to wireless LAN

connection
1. Wait until communication between PC and SDI
has been established.
2. When communication has been established, start
the SSMΙΙΙ (PC application).

SMU-01017

25
 Wireless LAN Communication

NOTE: 7. The SDI connection setting change message is

In some cases, depending on Windows Security displayed. Click the button [OK].
setup, the screen shown below appears. If so, click
“Unblock”.

SMU-01019

8. The PC application is shut down automatically.

Restart the PC application.
NOTE:
• From this time on, the connection method for PC
and SDI is wireless LAN.
• The present connection method for PC and SDI
is shown on the title bar at the left top of the
SMU-01038 screen.

6. The SDIs which can be connected are shown in

“List of SDI”. Enter a check for the SDI to be con-
nected to and click the button “Connect”.

SMU-01020

Switching to USB connection

1. Start SSMΙΙΙ (PC application).
2. Click the button on the Function Key
Bar of the main menu screen or press function
key F11 of the PC.

SMU-01018
SMU-01011
NOTE:
At this time, restart the PC if no SDIs possible for
connection are displayed.

26
 Wireless LAN Communication

3. The screen “SDI Connection Setup” is displayed. 6. The PC application is shut down automatically.
Select “USB” for “Select Connection”. Restart the PC application.
NOTE:
From this time on, the SDI connection method be-
comes “USB”.

When using equipment already set

for wireless LAN
1. Insert a wireless LAN card into the SDI and
switch on the SDI power.
2. Wait until communication between PC and SDI
has been established.
3. When communication has been established, start
the SSMΙΙΙ (PC application).
4. Afterwards, select and execute the desired func-
tion.
SMU-01021
NOTE:
4. Click the button “Connect”. Once wireless LAN setting has been completed,
connection setting or change by clicking the func-
tion key bar is not required.

SMU-01022

5. The SDI connection setting change message is

displayed. Click the button [OK].

SMU-01019

27
 Wireless LAN Communication

List of terms related to Wireless LAN communication

Term Meaning
ASCII Abbreviation of American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A general system of
specific characters allotted to recognition of characters and symbols by a computer.
DNS server “DNS” is the abbreviation of “Domain Name System”. A system for converting a domain
name corresponding to the name of a computer on the Internet to an IP address.
IEEE Abbreviation of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. The Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers has established standards for electronic parts, communication meth-
ods, etc.
IP address “IP” is the abbreviation of Internet Protocol. An identification number allotted to a network, a
connected computer, or communication equipment. This corresponds to the address of a
computer on the network.
LAN The abbreviation of Local Area Network. A network for connection of computers, printers,
etc. for data exchange.
OS The abbreviation of Operating System. This is the overall management software acting as
go-between between PC hardware and various applications for keyboard input, screen out-
put, and other I/O functions etc.
PC card A standardized expansion card for notebook computers.
SSID The abbreviation of Service Set Identifier. This is something like a group name in the net-
work, and communication is possible only when the same SSID has been registered be-
tween terminals.
TCP/IP This is the abbreviation of Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. This is a protocol
used as standard on the Internet etc.
WEP This is the abbreviation of Wired Equivalent Privacy. This is data encryption technology for
wireless LAN communication. For wireless LAN communication between computers, a com-
mon encryption key (like a password) is set, and the data cannot be deciphered when the
encryption keys are not the same.
Autorun A function for automatic program start when a CD is set to the CD-ROM drive.
Gateway This is a computer or software for connection of a computer network to another network us-
ing different media or protocols.
Subnet mask A value defined for identification of a gigantic network like the Internet and a small network
connecting computers etc. underneath it.
Driver Software acting as go-between for OS control of peripheral equipment with different specifi-
cations and control methods for each product.
Network key An encryption key used with a wireless LAN.
Protocol A protocol for communication between computers via a network.
Wireless LAN card A communication expansion card installed in a personal computer for LAN communication
with wireless transmission and reception of data.
Wireless access point A device relaying electric waves for connection of terminals for wireless LAN communica-
tion.

28
 Communication Messages

Communication Messages NOTE:

If an error occurs but an error message does not ap-
With the SSMΙΙΙ, the PC application communicates
pear, restart the PC application and the SDI. When
via the SDI with the control modules for which SS-
restarting the SDI, either disconnect the diagnosis
MΙΙΙ diagnosis is supported.
cable from the vehicle’s data link connector, or hold
While the PC application is performing a communi-
down both the [MENU] key and the [DOWN] key of
cation operation, various messages appear on the
the SDI for at least two seconds to turn the SDI off,
display to indicate communication status. The fol-
and then confirm that the PWR LED of the SDI does
lowing explains the meanings of the messages that
not light. Then turn on the SDI power again.
appear.

Communication Initialization
This message appears when the PC application
starts communication with a control module for
which SSMΙΙΙ diagnosis is supported.
To interrupt communication, click the but-
ton.

SMU-00542

Communication Error
The error code and error message appear when
communication between the PC application and
control module is no longer possible for some rea-
son.
For details about error codes and the actions re-
quired to correct the problem, see the Communica-
tion Error Code List.

SMU-00119

29
 All Systems Diagnosis

All Systems Diagnosis 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [All System Diagnosis] and then press the
Selecting this item displays the fault detect status of
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
all control system control modules for which SSMΙΙΙ
diagnosis is supported, and memorized diagnostic
codes.
When a particular control system cannot be identi-
fied as the causes of a vehicle’s problem, perform
this diagnosis and use the displayed diagnostic
codes to perform diagnosis.
NOTE:
• For a vehicle equipped with a cruise control sys-
tem, turn on the cruise control switch before per-
forming inspection. SMU-00599
• This inspection mode may not function in the
case of certain vehicle models and vehicle spec- The SSMΙΙΙ displays the screen shown below
ifications. when the control system and communication sys-
tem are started up.
Getting Ready To cancel the diagnosis, click the button.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s SMU-00123
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the Diagnosis Result Display
PWR LED of the SDI lights.
A screen appears showing the fault detection status
of all of the control system control modules, and di-
agnostic codes that indicate details about the faults.

SMU-00124

NOTE:
SMU-00113 • The message “No Diagnostic Code Present” indi-
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC. cates that no fault could be detected.
• The message “Communication Impossible” ap-
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. pears when the vehicle being inspected is not
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to equipped with the required control systems, or
start up the application. when something prevents communications from
being performed.

30
 Each System Check

Each System Check 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
This type of inspection allows selection of a particu-
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
lar system from among the control system for which
SSMΙΙΙ diagnosis is supported. Then control mod-
ule input/output data, memorized diagnostic codes,
and other data can be viewed on the PC display.
This screen can also be used to delete diagnostic
codes memorized by a control module, to perform
inspections by forcing operation of actuators, to
configure control module function settings, etc.
NOTE:
• For diagnosis of the cruise control system or auto
air conditioning system, turn on the system main SMU-00600
switches before performing inspection.
• Some functions may not be available in the case 7. On the System Selection Menu, select the de-
of certain vehicle models and vehicle specifica- sired system and then press the Enter key or left-
tions. click with the mouse. (As an example, “Engine” is
selected.)
Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00665

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.

31
 Each System Check

8. When the PC application starts communication

with the control module of the selected system, a
compliance verification message for the system
being diagnosed appears. Click the [OK] button.
NOTE:
The compliance verification message that appears
depends on vehicle model and specifications.

SMU-00128

This displays the fault diagnosis menu screen.

SMU-00601

NOTE:
• The contents of the fault diagnosis menu screen
depend on vehicle model and specifications, and
on the control system.
• Some inspection and adjustment items may not
be available in the case of certain vehicle models
and vehicle specifications.

32
 Current Data Display and Save

Current Data Display and Save 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
This system allows sampling of control module in-
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
put/output data of control systems for which SSMΙΙΙ
diagnosis is supported, and sampling of control da-
ta.
This data can be displayed as digital data, and can
also be switched to a graph data format.
Sampled data can also be assigned a name and
stored as a file in a particular folder in PC memory.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
SMU-00600
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle. 7. On the System Selection Menu, select the de-
sired system and then press the Enter key or left-
NOTE: click with the mouse. (As an example, “Engine” is
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag- selected.)
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00113
SMU-00665
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
8. This displays a compliance verification message
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to button.
start up the application.

SMU-00128

33
 Current Data Display and Save

9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [Cur- Digital Data Screen Operations
rent Data Display & Save] and then press the En-
ter key or left-click with the mouse. Changing the Width of Screen Cells
The widths of cells on the screen can be adjusted as
desired. Move the mouse pointer to the arrow on the
screen below so the cell width adjustment pointer
appears. Then move the pointer left or right to ad-
just the cell width for easy reading.

SMU-00601
SMU-00570
10.This displays the dialog box shown below. Se-
lect [Normal sampling] and then press the Enter Scrolling the Screen
key or left-click with the mouse. You can scroll the screen either by dragging the
scroll bar on the right side of the screen, or by click-
ing the scroll button at the upper/lower end of the
scroll bar.

SMU-00508

11.This displays the Digital Data Screen and auto-

matically starts sampling.

SMU-00569
SMU-00137
The Digital Data Screen shows in real-time cur-
rent values, maximum values, minimum values, NOTE:
and average values of control module’s input/out- Pressing the up or down arrow key on the PC key-
put data and control data. board will scroll the screen by one cell.
Pressing the Page Up or Page Down key on the PC
keyboard will scroll one screen.

34
 Current Data Display and Save

Stopping a Sampling Operation Each press of the [F3] button on the Function Key
Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the Bar cycles in the following sequence: → [F3
button on the Function Key Bar to stop Graph1] → [F3 Graph2] → [F3 Snapshot] →.
sampling. You can also stop sampling by pressing You can also display the Graph 2 Screen by press-
the F2 function key on the PC keyboard. ing the F3 function key on the PC keyboard twice.

SMU-00571 SMU-00574

Starting a Sampling Operation Changing the Item Sequence

Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the The sequence that the items appear on the display
button on the Function Key Bar to start can be changed as desired.
sampling. You can also start sampling by pressing Select the item you want to move. Next, while hold-
the F2 function key on the PC keyboard. ing down both the Ctrl key and Shift key on the PC
keyboard, press the up or down arrow key to move
the selected item upwards or downwards.

SMU-00572

Switching to the Graph 1 Screen SMU-00150

If a sampling operation is being performed, stop it.

Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the Initializing the Item Sequence
button on the Function Key Bar to display The items’ sequence shown on the display can be
the Graph 1 Screen. initialized.
Each press of the [F3] button on the Function Key Clicking the icon on the Data List Toolbar makes
Bar cycles in the following sequence: → [F3 the items go back to their initial positions.
Graph1] → [F3 Graph2] → [F3 Snapshot] →.
You can also display the Graph 1 Screen by press-
ing the F3 function key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00728
SMU-00573

Selecting Graph 2 Screen (Single-screen

8-channel Graph)
If a sampling operation is being performed, stop it.
Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar
twice or click the button on the Function Key Bar
to display Graph 2 Screen.

35
 Current Data Display and Save

Data Select Screen

The Data Select Screen can be used to select partic-
ular data from all of the data sampled and view it.
When there is no sampling operation being per-
formed, click the check box in front of the item you
want to view. An item is selected for viewing when
there is a check mark inside its check box. You can
also select (check) the checkbox of the highlighted
item by pressing the space bar on the PC keyboard. SMU-00154

Returning to the All Data Screen

Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the
button on the Function Key Bar to display
the All Data Screen. You can also return to the All
Data Screen by pressing the F11 function key on
SMU-00151 the PC keyboard.
Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the
button on the Function Key Bar.
This will display the selected items only.
You can also display the selected items by pressing
the F6 function key on the PC keyboard.
SMU-00576

Printing Sampled Data

If a sampling operation is being performed, stop it.
Click the [File] menu and then select [Print]. You
can also print by clicking the icon on the Data
SMU-00575
List Toolbar, by clicking the button on the
NOTE: Function Key Bar, or by pressing the F8 function
• Displaying selected data causes data sampled up key on the PC keyboard.
to that point to be deleted.
• Sampling is faster when specific data items are
selected. (This applies only to engine and trans-
mission sampling.)
• If the message dialog box shown below appears
while you are selecting data items, it means that
the limit on the number of selectable data items SMU-00666
has been reached. Selection of further data items
is not possible after this message appears. Previewing the Print Image
To select other items, deselect the check boxes Print Preview lets you view the print image to con-
next to the currently selected (checked) items, firm there are no problems before actually printing.
and then select the new items. Click the [File] menu and then select [Print Preview].

SMU-00667

36
 Current Data Display and Save

NOTE: NOTE:
If part of the print image runs outside of the print ar- Though it is possible to print with the [Portrait] set-
ea, use the arrow buttons at the bottom of the ting under [Orientation], doing so can cause part of
screen to adjust the cell width. the data to run outside of the printing area. Because
Moving the mouse pointer to an arrow will cause it of this, use of the [Landscape] setting is recom-
to change to an adjustment pointer. Drag the adjust- mended.
ment pointer left or right to adjust cell width.
Saving Sampled Data
There are two different ways to save sampled data:
saving all sampled data and using cut-and-save to
save only specific parts of the sampled data.

Saving All Sampled Data

If a sampling operation is being performed, stop it.
Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar, or the
button on the Function Key bar. You could
also press the F9 function key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00162

Setting Up the Printer

If a sampling operation is being performed, stop it.
Click the [File] menu and then select [Setup printer].
SMU-00577

This causes the sampled data save dialog box to

appear.
The name of the data file being saved is generated
automatically in accordance with the current time
SMU-00668 and date. If you want to use the generated file name
as-is, click the dialog box [Save] button. If you want
After the Print Setup dialog box shown below ap- to change to a different file name, type in the name
pears, use [Printer Name] to select the printer to be you want.
used for printing.
Under [Orientation], select [Landscape] and then
click the [OK] button.

SMU-00164
SMU-00524

37
 Current Data Display and Save

NOTE: Returning to the Fault Diagnosis Menu

• Sample data files are saved in the Data folder Screen
where the PC application is installed. When there is no sampling operation being per-
To change to another storage location, specify formed, click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or
the location you want in the Save in box of the the button on the Function Key Bar.
save data dialog box. You can also return to the previous screen by press-
• The Comment box of the Save As dialog box can ing the F12 function key on the PC keyboard.
be used to save general comments associated
with the data or file.

Saving Specific Sampled Data Using Cut-

and-Save
For details about how to use cut-and-save to save
specific sampled data, see “Two Cursor Analysis”. SMU-00578

Using Non-SI Units to Display Sampled Graph 1 Screen

Data When there is no sampling operation being per-
If a sampling operation is being performed, stop it. formed, click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or
Click the button on the Digital Data Screen the button on the Function Key Bar to dis-
or Graph Screen Function Key Bar, or press the F10 play the Graph 1 Screen.
function key on the PC keyboard to display the sam- Each press of the [F3] button on the Function Key
pled data using the currently selected non-SI dis- Bar cycles in the following sequence: → [F3
play units. Graph1] → [F3 Graph2] → [F3 Snapshot] →.
You can also display the Graph 1 Screen by press-
ing the F3 function key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00169

NOTE:
SMU-00579
To use this function, the desired display units
should be selected using the window that appears Graph 1 Screen
when the [Tool] menu [Option] command is execut-
ed.
To return to SI unit display, click the button
on the Function Key Bar or press the F10 function
key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00580

SMU-00171

38
 Current Data Display and Save

Starting a Sampling Operation NOTE:

Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the When operating the mouse cursor of the Graph
button on the Function Key Bar to start Screen to move the graph cursor, cursor operations
sampling. You can also start sampling by pressing are only on the currently displayed screen. To scroll
the F2 function key on the PC keyboard. the screen in the horizontal direction, operate the
Sampling Status Bar.

SMU-00581

Stopping a Sampling Operation

Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the SMU-00693
button on the Function Key Bar to stop
sampling. You can also stop sampling by pressing Dragging the slider bar of the Sampling Status Bar
the F2 function key on the PC keyboard. left or right moves the graph cursor on the Graph
Screen and scrolls the screen in the corresponding
direction.

SMU-00582

Moving the Graph Cursor

On the Graph Screen, move the mouse pointer to
your desired position and click with the mouse. The SMU-00185
graph cursor moves to that position. Dragging the
graph cursor also moves the graph cursor to the de- The graph cursor also can be moved by clicking the
sired position. left or right arrow buttons at either end of the Sam-
The graph cursor can also be moved by operating pling Status Bar.
the left and right arrow keys on the PC. At this time,
you can also move the cursor position 10 data items
at a time by each press of either the left or right ar-
row key with the [Ctrl] key held down.

SMU-00186

39
 Current Data Display and Save

Sampling Status Bar Slider Data Select Screen

Clicking within the white spaces next to the slider Particular graphs can be selected for display as de-
bar automatically scrolls the graph screen horizon- sired. When there is no sampling operation being
tally until the slider reaches the point you clicked. performed, click the check box in front of the graph
item you want. An item is selected when there is a
check mark inside its check box.
You can also select (check) the checkbox of the
highlighted item by pressing the space bar on the
PC keyboard.
Next, click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or
the button on the Function Key Bar.
This will display the selected graphs only.
SMU-00221 You can also display the selected graphs by press-
ing the F6 function key on the PC keyboard.
Switching to the Digital Data Screen
When there is no sampling operation being per-
formed, click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or
the button on the Function Key Bar twice to
display the Digital Data Screen.
Each press of the [F3] button on the Function Key
Bar cycles in the following sequence: → [F3
Graph1] → [F3 Graph2] → [F3 Snapshot] →.
You can also display the Graph Screen by pressing
the F3 function key on the PC keyboard.
SMU-00584

NOTE:
• Displaying selected data causes data sampled up
to that point to be deleted.
• Sampling is faster when specific data items are
SMU-00583 selected. (This applies only to engine and trans-
mission sampling.)
• If the message dialog box shown below appears
while you are selecting data items, it means that
the limit on the number of selectable data items
has been reached. Selection of further data items
is not possible after this message appears.
To select other items, deselect the check boxes
next to the currently selected (checked) items,
and then select the new items.

SMU-00154

40
 Current Data Display and Save

Changing the Range of the Graph 4. After the graph vertical axis and horizontal axis
Screen range settings are configured as desired, click the
The following procedure can be used to change the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the
range settings of the graph screen vertical and hor- button on the Function Key Bar to apply them.
izontal axes in order to make graphs easier to read. You can also apply the range settings by pressing
the F11 function key on the PC keyboard.
1. While sampling is stopped, click the icon on
the Data List Toolbar or the button on the
Function Key Bar. You can also display the range
setting screen by pressing the F7 function key on
the PC keyboard.

SMU-00586

To cancel the range change operation, click the

icon on the Data List Toolbar or the
button on the Function Key Bar. You can also
SMU-00585 cancel the range change operation by pressing
the F12 function key on the PC keyboard.
2. After the screen below appears, input a value to
specify the vertical axis range of the graph into NOTE:
the range box. If sampling is started while 30 sec/div or 60 sec/div
is selected with the time axis range box, sampling
NOTE:
results will be displayed at 10-second intervals. This
The range box may not appear for some items.
is done to prevent lag of the screen refresh opera-
tion by the PC application.
Stopping the sampling operation displays the 30
sec/div or 60 sec/div time axis screen.

SMU-00195

3. To specify the graph horizontal (time) axis range,

click the range selection box in the lower left cor-
ner of the screen, and then select the desired
time setting.
NOTE:
The time settings that appear depend on sampling
conditions.

SMU-00196

41
 Current Data Display and Save

Changing the Graph Line Color Changing the Graph Line Thickness
Graph line colors can be changed to make graphs One of three different thicknesses can be selected
easier to view. You can change the line color of a for the graph line.
specific item or for all items.
To change the line color for a specific item, select When there is no sampling operation being per-
the cell for the item, and then click the icon on formed, click the icon on the Data List Toolbar.
the Data List Toolbar. On the setting dialog box that On the setting dialog box that appears, click the de-
appears, select the desired line color and then click sired graph line thickness and then click [OK].
the [OK] button.

SMU-00203

NOTE:
If sampling is started while 2 pt or 3 pt is selected for
the graph line thickness, sampling results will be
displayed in a line thickness of 1 point (1 pt). This is
done to prevent lag of the screen refresh operation
by the PC application.
The graph line will change to selected thickness
SMU-00096 when sampling is stopped.
To change line color for all items, click the icon. Marking Function
On the setting dialog box that appears, click the de-
Marking a particular point on the graph is possible
sired graph line color and then click the [OK] button.
while sampling is processing or stopped.
Once marked data is stored, the markings will ap-
pear even when the stored data is shown again.
To do marking during sampling, press one of the
number keys, alphabet keys or symbol keys on the
PC at the time you want to mark a certain point.
To do marking while sampling is stopped or after a
save, move the graph cursor and press one of the
number keys, alphabet keys or symbol keys on the
PC at the position you want to mark a certain point.
Marking numbers are automatically assigned in the
order the key on the PC is pressed.

SMU-00096

SMU-00461

42
 Current Data Display and Save

NOTE: • You can also select (check) the checkbox by

• If the keys on the PC are pressed faster than the pressing the space bar on the PC keyboard.
sampling speed, the marking may not be dis-
3. Click the [OK] button to close the edit screen.
played in numerical order.
Markings on the graph screen will be deleted as
• Marking is not possible with some keys.
soon as the edit screen is closed.
Marking Delete Function
You can delete markings.
There are two following methods to delete mark-
ings.

1) Deleting from marking edit screen

2) Deleting by PC keyboard

Deleting from Marking Edit Screen

1. Display a graph on the screen and select “Edit
Markings” from “Tool” in menu.

SMU-00855

Deleting by PC Keyboard
1. Display a graph on the screen and move a cursor
to the marking to be deleted.
SMU-00853 2. Press one of the number keys, alphabet keys or
2. This displays an Edit Markings screen. Put a symbol keys on the PC.
check mark in the marking number to be deleted NOTE:
and then click the [Confirm on Delete] button. Deleting marking is not possible with some keys.

Changing the Graph Sequence

The sequence that the graphs appear on the display
can be changed as desired.
Select the graph you want to move. Next, while
holding down both the Ctrl key and Shift key on the
PC keyboard, press the up or down arrow key to
move the selected graph upwards or downwards.

Initializing the Graph Sequence

The graphs’ sequence shown on the display can be
initialized.
Clicking the icon on the Data List Toolbar makes
SMU-00854 the graphs go back to their initial positions.

NOTE:
• Clicking the [Confirm on Delete] causes markings
on the edit screen to be deleted. However, mark-
ings on the graph are not deleted at this time.

43
 Current Data Display and Save

Printing Sampled Data You can also return to the previous screen by press-
When there is no sampling operation being per- ing the F12 function key on the PC keyboard.
formed, click the [File] menu and then select [Print].
You can also print by clicking the icon on the Graph 2 Screen (Single-screen 8-
Data List Toolbar, by clicking the button on channel Graph)
the Function Key Bar, or by pressing the F8 function If a sampling operation is being performed, stop it.
key on the PC keyboard. On the Digital Data Screen, click the icon on the
Data List Toolbar or click the button on the
Previewing the Print Image Function Key Bar twice to display Graph 2 Screen.
When there is no sampling operation being per- Each press of the [F3] button on the Function Key
formed, click the [File] menu and then select [Print Bar cycles in the following sequence: → [F3
Preview]. Graph1] → [F3 Graph2] → [F3 Snapshot] →.
You can also display the Graph 2 Screen by press-
Setting Up the Printer ing the F3 function key on the PC keyboard twice.
When there is no sampling operation being per-
formed, click the [File] menu and then select [Setup
printer].

Saving Sampled Data

When there is no sampling operation being per-
SMU-00587
formed, click the icon on the Data List Toolbar,
or the button on the Function Key Bar. You Graph 2 Screen
could also press the F9 function key on the PC key-
board.

Using Non-SI Units to Display Sampled

Data
When there is no sampling operation being per-
formed, click the button on the Digital Data
Screen or Graph Screen Function Key Bar, or press
the F10 function key on the PC keyboard to display
the sampled data using the currently selected non-
SI display units.
NOTE:
• To use this function, the desired display units
should be selected using the window that ap- SMU-00588
pears when the [Tool] menu [Option] command is
executed. Clicking the [G] button in front of an item causes the
• To return to SI unit display, click the but- [G] button color to change to red, and displays the
ton on the Function Key Bar or press the F10 name of the item to be displayed for the vertical axis
function key on the PC keyboard. in the graph area.

Returning to the Fault Diagnosis Menu

Screen
When there is no sampling operation being per-
formed, click the return icon on the Data List Tool-
bar or the button on the Function Key Bar.

44
 Current Data Display and Save

To cancel an item selection, click its [G] button Setting All Clear Function
again. All of the following settings can be returned to their
initial status:
• Item sequence: default setting on each models
• Data Select Screen: all items not selected
• Horizontal axis range of Graph Screen: default
setting on each item
• Vertical axis range of Graph Screen: 0.5 sec/div
• Graph line color of Graph Screen: all red
• Graph line thickness of Graph Screen: 1 point
• Trigger function: without trigger
• Two Cursor Analysis: end of Two Cursor Analysis
While sampling is stopped, click the icon on the
Data List Toolbar.

SMU-00214

NOTE:
• You can display data for up to eight items on a SMU-00694
single screen.
• The location of item axes depends on the se- Functions for Initializing Toolbars
quence the items are selected. The first four
It is possible to initialize the display on each toolbar.
items that are selected are displayed to the left of
If you initialize the toolbars, the display will be
the graph, while the fifth through eighth items se-
shown as follows:
lected are displayed to the right.
• Display or not: Displays all toolbars.
• You can use the same procedures as those for
Graph 1 Screen, to start and stop sampling, to • Position of display: Initial display position.
move the graph cursor, to display data select, to For initializing the toolbars, select “Initializing the
change the range, to change the graph line color toolbar” from “View” on the menu.
and thickness, marking function, etc.

SMU-00867

45
 Sampling Item Memory

Sampling Item Memory 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Sampling item memory can be used to configure re-
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
quired sampling items for each abnormality symp-
tom. Then setting files can be read as required for
sampling.
NOTE:
• The setting files described above are called
“mode files”.
• This function may not be available in the case of
certain vehicle models and vehicle specifications.

Creating a Mode File

1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable, SMU-00600
and a PC with the PC application installed.
7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the Control System] and then press the Enter key or
data link connector of the vehicle. left click with the mouse.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00665

8. This displays a compliance verification message

SMU-00113
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC. button.
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.

SMU-00128

46
 Sampling Item Memory

9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [Se- 11.This displays a save confirmation dialog box.
lect/save sampling items] and then press the En- Click the [Yes] button.
ter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00501

12.This causes save dialog box of the mode files to

appear.
The name of the data file being saved is generat-
ed automatically in accordance with the current
SMU-00499
time and date. If you want to use the generated
10.This displays a sampling item selection screen. file name as-is, click the dialog box [Save] button.
Select the required sampling item and then click, If you want to change to a different file name, type
[Selection Completed]. in the name you want.

SMU-00500

NOTE:
SMU-00502
If the message dialog box shown below appears
while you are selecting data items, it means that the NOTE:
limit on the number of selectable data items has • Mode files are saved in one of the folders shown
been reached. Selection of further data items is not below, which ate located in the directory where
possible after this message appears. To select oth- the PC application was installed.
er items, deselect the check boxes next to the cur- Data folder → Engine or Transmission folder.
rently selected (checked) items, and then select the To change to another storage location, specify
new items. the location you want in the Save in box of the
Save As dialog box.
• The Comment box of the Save As dialog box can
be used to save general comments associated
with the data or file.

SMU-00154

47
 Sampling Item Memory

Reading a Mode File for Sampling 7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine
Control System] and then press the Enter key or
NOTE: left click with the mouse.
This function may not be available in the case of
certain vehicle models and vehicle specifications.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00665

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC. SMU-00128

4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. 9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [Cur-
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to rent Data Display & Save] and then press the En-
start up the application. ter key or left-click with the mouse.
6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00503

SMU-00600

48
 Sampling Item Memory

10.This displays the dialog box shown below. Se- 13.This displays the digital data screen.
lect {Mode reading/sampling} and then press the You can start and stop sampling and perform oth-
Enter key or left-click with the mouse. er operations using the same procedures as
those described under “Current Data Display and
Save”. For details about these operations, see
“Current Data Display and Save”.

SMU-00504

11.This displays a dialog box with a list of saved

files.
Select the desired file and then press the Enter
key or click [Open].

SMU-00589

NOTE:
To display all data after reading a mode file, click
the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the
button on the Function Key Bar. You can also dis-
play to the all data screen by pressing the F11 func-
tion key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00505

12.This displays a sampling start confirmation

screen. Click the [Start sampling] button.

SMU-00506

49
 Trigger

Trigger 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,

select [Each System Check] and then press the
The trigger feature lets you configure a trigger to be
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
applied while sampling is in progress. There are two
types of triggers that can be configured: an “Trigger
of input data” that automatically detects the trigger
in accordance with pre-set parameters, and a “Man-
ual trigger” that is triggered manually. When sam-
pling is performed using a trigger, data is stored
from the start of the sampling until the specified time
from trigger detection elapses.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
SMU-00600
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the 7. On the System Selection Menu, select the de-
data link connector of the vehicle. sired system and then press the Enter key or left-
click with the mouse. (As an example, “Engine” is
NOTE: selected.)
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00665
SMU-00113
8. This displays a compliance verification message
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC. for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. button.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.

SMU-00128

50
 Trigger

9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [Cur- 12.Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar, or the
rent Data Display & Save] and then press the En- button on the Function Key bar. You
ter key or left-click with the mouse. could also press the F4 function key on the PC
keyboard.

SMU-00649

13.This displays the setup trigger screen.

SMU-00601

10.This displays the dialog box shown below. Se-

lect [Normal sampling] and then press the Enter
key or left-click with the mouse. (As an example,
“Normal sampling” is selected.)

SMU-00508 SMU-00650

11.This displays the Digital Data Screen, so sam- 1) Without trigger

pling is stopped. Triggering is not performed. Select this option when
The trigger function can be used while the Digital you want to cancel the trigger function.
Data Screen, Graph 1 Screen, or Graph 2 Screen 2) Trigger of input data
is displayed. This setting is used to configure trigger settings for
each sampling item for automatic trigger detection.
3) Manual trigger
With Manual trigger, triggering is performed manu-
ally by pressing the trigger switch during data sam-
pling.

SMU-00646

51
 Trigger

Configuring Trigger of input data When a sampling item is not switch input
Settings
Configuring triggers to necessary items in advance
automatically detects triggers.
1. On the Specify type of trigger screen, select “Trig-
ger of input data” and then click the [Next] button.

SMU-00653

1) Level
This specifies the trigger level, the value that de-
tects triggers. You can input a value directly into the
box or you can use its up and down arrows to
change the setting. The setting value is limited to
values that can actually be obtained. If you type in a
value that cannot be obtained, the software will au-
SMU-00651
tomatically change it to the nearest allowable value.
2. Specify the trigger source. 2) Slope condition
In the list, select the checkbox next to the item This setting specifies the condition for trigger detec-
whose setting you want to change, or double- tion when the sample data values reach the trigger
click the item. level. When [Both] is selected, a trigger is detected
when either a Upward or Downward condition is first
satisfied.
3) Combinations
When there are multiple triggers, these settings can
be used to configure combinations.

When a sampling item is switch input

SMU-00652

3. This displays the Setup trigger of input data

screen. Configure the settings and then click the
[OK] button.
SMU-00654

1) Level
This specifies the trigger level, the value that de-
tects triggers. The setting is configured by button
operation. This setting cannot be selected for cer-
tain sampling items.

52
 Trigger

2) Slope condition
This setting specifies the data condition for trigger
detection when the sample data values reach the
trigger level.
Selecting [Upward] detects a trigger at the OFF →
ON point.
Selecting [Downward] detects a trigger at the ON → SMU-00154
OFF point.
5. Setup the action that should be performed after a
Selecting [Both] detects a trigger at either the OFF
trigger is detected.
→ ON point or the ON → OFF point, whichever oc-
curs first. Configure the settings and then click the [Exit]
3) Combinations button.
When there are multiple triggers, these settings can
be used to configure Combinations.
4. Checkboxes of the channels to which you set trig-
gers are checked.
If you want to configure multiple triggers, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
After configuring all of the triggers you want, click
the [Next] button.

SMU-00656

1) Time of samples after trigger

This setting is the sampling time after the trigger is de-
tected.
2) Trigger dot display in hold mode transit
This setting specifies the display position of the trigger
detection point (trigger point) when the graph is dis-
played following sampling.
6. This will display the measurement screen and auto-
SMU-00655
matically start sampling. If the trigger is detected
NOTE: during sampling, data is collected for the specified
• To change a trigger setting, select the desired time and then sampling stops automatically.
item and then click the [Edit] button to display the
Setup trigger of input data screen.
• To exclude the setting of an item that is currently
configured for a trigger, clear the check box of the
applicable item.
• If the message dialog box shown below appears
while you are configuring an item setting, it
means that the limit on the number of selectable
items has been reached. Selection of further data
items is not possible after this message appears.
To select other items, deselect the check boxes
next to the currently selected (checked) items you
no longer need, and then select another item to
which you want to assign a trigger.
SMU-00770

53
 Trigger

NOTE: 2. Setup the action that should be performed after a

• Assigning an input trigger to an item causes “T” to trigger is detected.
appear in item’s checkbox. Configure the settings and then click the [Exit]
• Manual trigger can still be used even if input trig- button.
ger sampling is in progress. In this case, the sam-
pling time after trigger detection is the same time
set for the Trigger of input data.
• Clicking the icon on the Data List Toolbar dur-
ing sampling will terminate sampling immediate-
ly, regardless of whether or not there is a trigger.
This is also true if the Function Key Bar
button is clicked or the F2 function key on the PC
keyboard is pressed.
• On the graph, the trigger level is indicated as a
purple chain lines, while the trigger points are in-
dicated by vertical green chain lines. SMU-00656
• Trigger information is displayed on the left side of
1) Time of samples after trigger
the Sampling Status Bar. Clicking the [Details]
This setting is the sampling time after the trigger
button displays an Information of trigger of input
switch is pressed.
data screen, which you can use to view detailed
2) Trigger dot display in hold mode transit
information about the currently assigned trigger.
This setting specifies the display position of the trig-
ger switch press point (trigger point) when the graph
is displayed following sampling.
3. This will display the measurement screen and au-
tomatically start sampling.
When sampling reaches the point where you
want to apply the trigger, click the button
on the Function Key Bar or the F5 function key on
your PC keyboard. After you do, data is collected
SMU-00658
for the specified time and then sampling stops au-
tomatically.
Configuring a Manual Trigger
With a Manual trigger, trigger detection is not per-
formed automatically and a trigger is applied when-
ever the trigger switch is pressed.
1. On the Specify type of trigger screen, select
“Manual trigger” and then click the [Next] button.

SMU-00771

SMU-00659

54
 Trigger

NOTE:
• Clicking the icon on the Data List Toolbar dur-
ing sampling will terminate sampling immediate-
ly, regardless of whether or not there is a trigger.
This is also true if the Function Key Bar
button is clicked or the F2 function key on the PC
keyboard is pressed.
• On the graph, trigger points are shown as vertical
green chain lines.
• Trigger information is displayed on the left side of
the Sampling Status Bar.

55
 Two Cursor Analysis

Two Cursor Analysis 2. Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar.
Two Cursor Analysis is provided with two functions:
display cursor numerical value information between
two points, and cut-and-save data.
As cursor numerical value information between two
points, the numerical values of any two points in the
sampled data, and the maximum value, minimum
SMU-00707
value and average value between two points can be
calculated and displayed. 3. The cursor selection buttons, cursor position
For cut-and-save of data, the between any two times, cursor interval and [Calculate] button are
points in the sample data can be cut and save. displayed on the Sampling Status Bar.

Cursor Numerical Value

Information between Two Points
Cursor numerical value information between two
points can be used in the digital data screen, and ei-
ther of the Graph 1 Screen or Graph 2 Screen.
Note, however, that on the Graph 1 Screen or SMU-00708
Graph 2 Screen, only selected sampling items are
displayed, and on the digital data screen, all sam- 4. The cursor selection button “Cursor A” is select-
pling items are displayed. ed. Move graph Cursor A (light blue) to the de-
Cursor numerical value information between two sired position.
points can also be used when saved data is re-dis-
played.

Displaying Numerical Value Information

on a Graph Screen
1. Display the Graph Screen. (The following expla-
nation is for the Graph 1 Screen.)

SMU-00709

5. Select “Cursor B” by the cursor selection button.

Move graph Cursor B (purple) to the desired po-
sition.

SMU-00705 SMU-00710

56
 Two Cursor Analysis

6. After selecting the sampling item, click the Displaying Numerical Value Information
icon on the Data List Toolbar or the [Calculate] on the Digital Data Screen
button on the Sampling Status Bar. 1. Display the digital data screen.

SMU-00712

7. This displays the numerical value information

screen.
To close this screen, click the [OK] button.

SMU-00715

2. Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar.

SMU-00707

NOTE:
• When displaying the cursor information between
two points, the data value of the currently select-
SMU-00713
ed cursor position is displayed as the display val-
8. To exit the Two Cursor Analysis function, click the ue in the value field.
icon again. • When displaying the cursor information between
two points, the values between cursors A and B
and not the value from the sampling start point
are displayed as the display value for the maxi-
mum, minimum and average values.
3. The cursor selection buttons, cursor position
times and cursor interval are displayed on the
SMU-00714 Sampling Status Bar.

SMU-00716

57
 Two Cursor Analysis

4. The cursor selection button “Cursor A” is select- 7. To exit the Two Cursor Analysis function, click the
ed. Move Cursor A to the desired position with icon again.
“Cursor A” selected as it is.

SMU-00707
SMU-00717

NOTE:
Data Cut-and-Save
In the digital data screen, the cursor is not dis- Data cut-and-save can be used in the digital data
played. So, check the cursor position by the cursor screen, and either of the Graph 1 Screen or Graph
position time to the side of the cursor selection but- 2 Screen.
ton. 1. Display the sampling screen. (The following ex-
planation is for the Graph 1 Screen.)
5. Select “Cursor B” by the cursor selection button,
and move Cursor B to the desired position.

SMU-00718

6. Check the numerical value information between

the two cursors.
In the digital data screen, the numerical value in-
formation of all sampling items is calculated to lin-
ear information and displayed when you move SMU-00705
the cursor position.
2. Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar.

SMU-00707

SMU-00719

58
 Two Cursor Analysis

3. The cursor selection buttons, cursor position 7. This displays the Select how to save data screen.
times, cursor interval and [Calculate] button are Select “Save data between two cursors” and click
displayed on the Sampling Status Bar. the [OK] button.

SMU-00708

4. The cursor selection button “Cursor A” is select-

ed. Move graph Cursor A (light blue) to the de- SMU-00721
sired position.
NOTE:
If you select “Save All data” at this time, cut-and-
save will not be performed, and all sampled data will
be saved.
8. This causes the sampled data save dialog box to
appear. The name of the data file being saved is
generated automatically in accordance with the
current time and date. If you want to use the gen-
SMU-00709
erated file name as-is, click the dialog box [Save]
button. If you want to change to a different file
5. Select “Cursor B” by the cursor selection button. name, type in the name you want.
Move graph Cursor B (purple) to the desired po-
sition.

SMU-00710

6. Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the

button on the Function Key Bar. You
could also press the F9 function key on the PC
keyboard.
SMU-00722

SMU-00720

59
 Two Cursor Analysis

NOTE:
• Sample data files are saved in the Data folder
where the PC application is installed. To change
to another storage location, specify the location
you want in the Save in box of the save data dia-
log box.
• The Comment box of the Save As dialog box can
be used to save general comments associated
with the data or file.
• When performing cut-and-save on selected data
in a file containing all data, the save file name
cannot be set to the same name as the save file
containing all data before the cut is performed,
and cannot be saved.

60
 Converting Sampled Data to CSV

Converting Sampled Data to

CSV
Converting sampled data to CSV format allows to
analyze the data on a PC without SSMΙΙΙ installed.
Converting sampled data to CSV should be per-
formed on the saved data analysis screen.
NOTE:
Up to 50,000 sampled data can be saved as CSV
file. For more than 50,000 sampled data, data cut-
and-save can be used to reduce the number of data
before converting to CSV.

How to Convert to CSV from Menu SMU-00697

1. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to 3. This displays saved data. Select “Converting
start up the application. sampling data to CSV” from “File” in menu.
On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Saved Data Display] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00824

4. This causes the Save CSV file dialog to appear.

SMU-00602
Enter the desired file name, and click the [Save]
button.
2. The dialog box with a list of saved data files is dis-
played.
After selecting “Files of type”, designate the file
you need, and press the Enter key or click the
[Open] button.

SMU-00825

NOTE:
• The file name in dafault setting will be the same
name as saved data which is opened.

61
 Converting Sampled Data to CSV

• CSV files are saved in the Data folder where the

PC application is installed. To change to another
storage location, specify the location you want in
the Save in box of the save data dialog box.
• If the dialog shown below appears after clicking
the [Save] button, reduce the number of data to
be saved. In this case, convert to CSV in accord-
ance with the procedure in “In the Case of Too
Many Sampled Data”

SMU-00697

SMU-00826 3. Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar, or the

button on the Function Key bar. You
How to Convert to CSV with Save could also press the F9 function key on the PC
Icon or Save Button keyboard.
NOTE:
Converting to CSV with icon or button
is effective only when making changes such as add-
ed marking etc.
1. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application. SMU-00577
On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
4. This displays a save dialog. Select “Save data in
select [Saved Data Display] and then press the
CSV (*.csv)” in “Save as type”.
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00602

2. The dialog box with a list of saved data files is dis-

played. SMU-00827
After selecting “Files of type”, designate the file
you need, and press the Enter key or click the
[Open] button.

62
 Converting Sampled Data to CSV

5. Enter the desired file name, and click the [Save] 1. Display a CSV file save dialog in accordance with
button. the procedure described before, and click the
[Save] button.

SMU-00828
SMU-00828
NOTE:
• The file name in dafault setting will be the same 2. This displays a dialog box below. Click the [OK]
name as saved data which is opened. button.
• CSV files are saved in the Data folder where the
PC application is installed. To change to another
storage location, specify the location you want in
the Save in box of the save data dialog box.
• If the dialog shown below appears after clicking
the [Save] button, reduce the number of data to
be saved. In this case, convert to CSV in accord- SMU-00826
ance with the procedure in “In the Case of Too
Many Sampled Data” 3. The cursor selection buttons, cursor position
times, cursor interval and [Calculate] button are
displayed on the Sampling Status Bar.

SMU-00826

In the Case of Too Many Sampled SMU-00708

Data
Up to 50,000 data can be converted to CSV. In the
case of more than this, use cut-and-save and con-
vert data to CSV in accordance with the following
procedure.
NOTE:
This describes how to convert to CSV with Save
icon or Save button. However, you can also convert
data to CSV by selecting “Converting sampling data
to CSV” from “File” in menu.

63
 Converting Sampled Data to CSV

4. The cursor selection button “Cursor A” is select- NOTE:

ed. Move graph Cursor A (light blue) to the de- The Select how to save data screen in the next step
sired position. can be displayed by selecting “Converting sampling
data to CSV” from “File” in menu.
7. This displays the Select how to save data screen.
Select “Save data between two cursors” and click
the [OK] button.

SMU-00709

5. Select “Cursor B” by the cursor selection button.

Move graph Cursor B (purple) to the desired po- SMU-00721
sition.
8. This displays a save dialog. Select “Save data in
CSV (*.csv)” in “Save as type”.

SMU-00710

NOTE:
At this time, look at the Sampling Status Bar to con-
firm that the number of data in selected range is less
than 50,000. SMU-00827

6. Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar, or the NOTE:

button on the Function Key bar. You If you select “Converting sampling data to CSV”
could also press the F9 function key on the PC from “File” in menu, this step is not necessary.
keyboard.

SMU-00720

64
 Converting Sampled Data to CSV

9. Enter the desired file name, and click the [Save]

button.

SMU-00828

NOTE:
• The file name in default setting will be “date and
time” at the time of saving. You can save data
with the same file name as previous one when
converting data to CSV even if you use cut-and-
save. (The previous file is not overwritten be-
cause their extensions are different.)
• CSV files are saved in the Data folder where the
PC application is installed. To change to another
storage location, specify the location you want in
the Save in box of the save data dialog box.

65
 Saving Displayed Data

Saving Displayed Data NOTE:

• The file name in default setting will be “date and
On the sampling screen or saved data display
time” at the time of saving sampled data if you
screen, you can save the screen as a graphic file.
save sampling data, and it will be the same name
NOTE: as saved data if you open the saved data.
• Displayed data of sampling result display (except • Screen data files are saved in the Data folder
Roughness Monitor) can be saved. where the PC application is installed. To change
• The data is saved in BMP (bitmap) format. to another storage location, specify the location
you want in the Save in box of the save data dia-
How to Save log box.
1. Display the sampling screen or saved data dis-
play screen. If you display the sampling screen,
stop sampling.
2. Select “Save displayed data” from “File” in menu.

SMU-00829

3. This causes the displayed data save dialog to ap-

pear.
Enter the desired file name, and click the [Save]
button in dialog box.

SMU-00830

66
 Saved Data Display

Saved Data Display 3. This recalls the data in the file and displays it on
the Digital Data Screen.
Use the following procedure to recall data that was
saved during fault diagnosis and view it on the PC NOTE:
display. Supported data file name extensions are described
below. Use the [Files of types] box to select the file
1. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
type you want to view.
start up the application.
.ssm: This extension is used for a file that contains
On the Main Menu that appears on the display, data saved from the Digital Data Screen or
select [Saved Data Display] and then press the Graph Screen.
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
.obd: This extension is used for a file that contains
data saved by OBD system failure diagno-
sis.
.sdr: This extension is used for a file that contains
data saved by driving recorder.
.biu: This extension is used for a file that contains
data saved a body integrated unit customiz-
ing list.
.ocl: This extension is used for a file that contains
data saved by analog sampling.

SMU-00602

2. The dialog box with a list of saved data files is dis-

played.
After selecting “Files of type”, designate the file
you need, and press the Enter key or click the SMU-00590
[Open] button.
NOTE:
You can also view saved data by double clicking the
sample data file.
Opening the folder where the data file is located and
double-clicking the desired file will start up the PC
application automatically and display the data’s
analysis screen. Note, however, that if you start up
the PC application this way, you will not be able to
change to the sampling screen. If you want to sam-
ple data, start up the PC application using the pro-
cedure under “Starting Up the System”.

SMU-00697

67
 Saved Data Display

Display Screen Operations sample data using the same procedures you use
The Data List Toolbar buttons and the Sampling during data sampling.
Status Bar functions on the saved data display You can also save recall data, edit it, and store your
screen are somewhat different from those on the edits.
Digital Data Screen and Graph Screen. The buttons
and functions on the saved file display screen are Multiple display of saved data
designed to make it easy to find a desired location Multiple display of data saved by SSMΙΙΙ on the
within the recalled data. screen of the personal computer is possible.
There are the following two operation methods for
Data Scroll Buttons display.
The data scroll buttons on the Data List Toolbar are • Display from the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the screen of the
for moving the graph cursor. personal computer.
Clicking [<] or [>] scrolls back or forward by one • Display from the icon on the Data list toolbar.
data item. You can also scroll back or forward by 1 NOTE:
data item by pressing the left or right arrow key on • Multiple display of saved files is possible for a
PC keyboard. maximum of five times.
Clicking [<<] or [>>] moves the graph cursor one • Multiple display of the high-grade roughness
screen back or forward. monitor saved file (.cym) cannot be done from the
You can also make the graph cursor jump back or icon on the data list toolbar.
forward by 10 data items by holding down the Ctrl
key and pressing the left or right arrow key on the Display from the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the
PC keyboard. screen of the personal computer
1. Display one of the targeted saved data.
For the display method, refer to the procedure in
the section “Saved Data Display”.

SMU-00220

Data Cut-and-Save
After displaying previously saved sampling data,
you can cut-and-save parts of the displayed data SMU-00590
and store it in another file.
2. Display the desktop and double-click the SSMΙΙΙ
For information about how to do this, see “Two Cur-
icon.
sor Analysis”.
On the Main Menu that appears on the dis-
NOTE: play,select [Saved Data Display] and then press
The name of the data file you take out from the orig- the Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
inal data CANNOT be the same as that of the origi-
nal file.
In case of cutting and saving data, the file name
must be changed to something different from the
original file name.

Other Operations SMU-00890

The marking function, cursor numerical value infor-
mation between two points, range change, and oth-
er similar operations can be performed on recalled

68
 Saved Data Display

NOTE:
When multiple saved data are displayed, only a part
of the items of the “Main Menu” is displayed. Ac-
cordingly, other items cannot be selected. For use
of the other functions, leave one of the saved data
and close all others. All items of the Main Menu can
be selected when only one saved data is displayed. SMU-00591

3. The dialog box with a list of saved data files is dis- 3. The dialog box with a list of saved data files is dis-
played. played.
After selecting “Files of type”, designate the file After selecting “Files of type”, designate the file
you need, and press the Enter key or click the you need, and press the Enter key or click the
[Open] button. [Open] button.

SMU-00891 SMU-00891

4. The targeted file is displayed. For additional dis- 4. The targeted file is displayed. For additional dis-
play of other saved data, return to step 2 and se- play of other saved data, return to step 2 and se-
lect the saved data. lect the saved data.
NOTE:
Display from the icon on the Data list • Saved data multiple display can also be done by
toolbar double-clicking the saved file of sampling data.
1. Display one of the targeted saved data. By double-clicking multiple files after opening the
For the display method, refer to the procedure in folder in which the saved files are saved, the mul-
the section “Saved Data Display”. tiple saved data analysis screens are displayed.
however, that if you start up the PC application
this way, you will not be able to change to the
sampling screen. If you want to sample data, start
up the PC application using the procedure under
“Starting Up the System”.
• Multiple display is possible for the following types
SMU-00590
of files.
.ssm: This extension is used for a file that contains
2. Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar. data saved from the Digital Data Screen or
Select the desired file from the list of files that ap- Graph Screen.
pears on the display.

69
 Saved Data Display

.obd: This extension is used for a file that contains

data saved by OBD system failure diagno-
sis.
.sdr: This extension is used for a file that contains
data saved by driving recorder.
.biu: This extension is used for a file that contains
data saved a body integrated unit customiz-
ing list.
.ocl: This extension is used for a file that contains
data saved by analog sampling.
cym: This extension is used for a file that contains
data saved by High-Grade Roughness
Monitor.
• Multiple display of saved data with the same
name is not possible.
• When SSMΙΙΙ is started again after a .cym file has
been opened and the display language is
switched, the language for the .cym file will not
switch.
• When SSMΙΙΙ is started again after a .biu file has
been opened and the display language is
switched, the language of the .biu file will not be
switched only for the inspection result.
• When the file name of a window minimized to the
taskbar is confirmed, the file name is displayed at
the beginning, but in case of a .cym file, the file
name is displayed at the end.

70
 Diagnostic Codes Display

Diagnostic Codes Display 7. On the System Selection Menu, select the de-
sired system and then press the Enter key or left-
Use the following procedure to check the diagnostic
click with the mouse. (As an example, “Engine” is
codes memorized by the control module, and can-
selected.)
cel codes.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00665

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00113
SMU-00128
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. 9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [Diag-
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to nostic Code(s) Display] and then press the Enter
start up the application. key or left-click with the mouse.
6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00734

SMU-00600

71
 Diagnostic Codes Display

10.Select the desired item and then press the Enter NOTE:
key or left-click with the mouse. Executing memory clear deletes all diagnostic
codes that are currently memorized by the control
module.

When no diagnostic codes are displayed

The message shown below appears if there are no
diagnostic codes currently memorized by the con-
SMU-00543 trol module.
11.This causes the Diagnostic Code Screen to ap-
pear.

SMU-00228

In accordance with the instructions provided, click

SMU-00230 the [OK] button.

NOTE: The message shown below appears if there are no

The contents of the display screen depend on the cancel codes currently memorized by the control
system being diagnosed, vehicle model and speci- module when cruise control system cancel codes
fications, and system fault diagnosis mode. are checked.
{Latest Diagnostic Code(s)}
This shows the latest diagnostic codes detected by
the control module.

{Memorized Diagnostic Code(s)}

This shows diagnostic codes detected in the past
SMU-00229
that are memorized by the control module, and the
latest currently detected diagnostic codes. NOTE:
In the case of a vehicle that is demonstrating a fault
{D-Check Diagnostic Code(s)} that cannot be detected by diagnostic codes, per-
This shows the results of fault diagnosis in the deal- form repair work in accordance with the fault diag-
er check mode. nostic procedures in the Service Manual.

{Temporary Diagnostic Code(s)} When diagnostic codes are displayed

This shows temporary codes detected by the OBD A screen showing the diagnostic codes and any
system. message text related to the source of the fault ap-
pears if there are diagnostic codes memorized by
{Current Diagnostic Code(s)} the control module.
This shows diagnostic codes currently detected by
the control module.

{History Diagnostic Code(s)}

This shows diagnostic codes detected in the past
that are memorized by the control module, and the
latest currently detected diagnostic codes. SMU-00230

72
 Diagnostic Codes Display

Executing Memory Clear

Click the button on the Function Key Bar or
the F2 function key on the PC keyboard.

Printing the Diagnostic Code Screen

Click the button on the Function Key Bar or
the F8 function key on the PC keyboard.

Returning to the Fault Diagnosis Menu

Screen
Click the button on the Function Key Bar or
the F12 function key on the PC keyboard.

73
 Manual Link (Excluding North America)

Manual Link (Excluding North

America)
* This function is not supported in North America.

Manual Link is the fusion of SSMΙΙΙ and Service

Manual on a PC. Until now it was necessary to
search the Service Manual for each model and then
to search the corresponding page. However, when
a Hybrid-version Service Manual compatible with
Manual Link is installed on a PC where SSMΙΙΙ is in-
stalled, the corresponding diagnosis page of the
Service Manual can be found by simple operation
SMU-00889
from the DTC detected by “Diagnostic Code(s) Dis-
play” of SSMΙΙΙ. Manual Link makes it possible to 1. Display the DTC check result screen. (Checking
aim for better efficiency by reducing the time re- of engine DTC is showed as an example here.)
quired to search for the corresponding manual.
NOTE:
• This function may not be available in the case of
certain vehicle models.
• The Manual Link function can be used for “All
System Diagnosis” and for “Diagnostic Code(s)
Display” for each system.
• The following software is required to use the
Manual Link function and should be installed in
advance.
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher (6.0 or higher rec-
ommended)
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or higher SMU-00881
• Please install the Service Manual for each model
to be diagnosed in advance for use of the Manual NOTE:
Link function. For the installation method, refer to Refer to the corresponding item for the “Diagnostic
the Installation Manual by clicking “See Installa- Code(s) Display” procedure.
tion Manual” in the menu displayed at the time of 2. Enter a check mark into the checkbox for the DTC
installation of the Hybrid-version Service Manual. to be viewed in the Service Manual.
At the time of installation, install the SSMΙΙΙ PC
application first and then the Service Manual.
When the SSMΙΙΙ PC application has not been in-
stalled, the Service Manual cannot be installed.

SMU-00882

74
 Manual Link (Excluding North America)

NOTE:
A check mark can be entered only for one DTC.
3. Click the button on the Function Key
Bar, or press the F11 function key on the PC key-
board.

SMU-00883

4. The Manual Selection screen is displayed. Select

the desired manual and click the [OK] button.
SMU-00885

NOTE:
This screen is not displayed when the search result
shows only one model.
6. The fault diagnosis screen for the Service Manual
is displayed. For the operation procedure from
this point on, refer to the “Service Manual Guide”.

SMU-00884

NOTE:
The Service Manual selected here is applied until
return is made to the “System Selection Menu”
screen. When view to a different Service Manual is
desired, return once to the “System Selection
Menu” and restart SSMΙΙΙ.
5. The DTC search result screen for the Service
Manual is displayed. Click the reference but-
ton for the desired model.
SMU-00886

75
 Clearing Memory

Clearing Memory 7. On the System Selection Menu, select the de-

sired system and then press the Enter key or left-
Use the following procedure to delete the diagnostic
click with the mouse. (As an example, “Engine” is
codes memorized by the control modules of each
selected.)
system after correcting the fault.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00665

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00113
SMU-00128
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. 9. From the list of fault diagnosis, select [Clear
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to Memory] and then press the Enter key or left-click
start up the application. with the mouse.
6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00603

SMU-00600

76
 Clearing Memory

10.This causes a memory clear confirmation mes-

sage to appear.
Use the mouse to click the [Yes] button.

SMU-00239

Executing the memory clear operation causes the

message shown below to appear. In accordance
with the instructions of the message, turn off the
vehicle’s ignition switch and then use the mouse
button to click [OK].

SMU-00240

NOTE:
Also, there are some systems that do not have a
memory clear item on the fault diagnosis screen.
With such a system, the dialog box will disappear
from the display when you turn off the vehicle’s igni-
tion switch.

Transmission System Memory Clear 2

On the fault diagnosis screen for the transmission
system, [Clear Memory] and [Clear Memory 2]
items may be displayed.
Selecting the [Clear Memory 2] item deletes diag-
nostic codes and learning control values memo-
rized by the transmission control module.

Airbag System Memory Clear

To execute the memory clear operation in the air-
bag system, you must first completely service all
problems. If there is even one problem remaining,
the memory clear operation cannot be executed.

77
 System Operation Check Mode

System Operation Check Mode 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Use the following procedure to force operation of
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
engine control system actuators to check their oper-
ation.
NOTE:
This function is not supported in some vehicle mod-
els.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle. SMU-00600

NOTE: 7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine

SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag- Control System] and then press the Enter key or
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR left-click with the mouse.
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00113
SMU-00665
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. 8. This displays a compliance verification message
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to button.
start up the application.

SMU-00128

78
 System Operation Check Mode

9. From the list of fault diagnosis, select [System Actuator ON/OFF Operation
Operation Check Mode] and then press the Enter This function is used to perform test operation of
key or left-click with the mouse. various actuators related to the engine control sys-
tem. The test mode connector needs to be connect-
ed in order to perform the test.
Selecting actuator ON/OFF operation on the sys-
tem operation check mode screen causes the
screen shown below to appear. Select the desired
item and then click the button to force op-
eration of the actuators for testing.

SMU-00604

10.This displays a system operation check mode

menu screen.
Select the desired item and then press the Enter
key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00248

SMU-00877 NOTE:
Make sure the vehicle’s ignition switch is off before
IMPORTANT: connecting or disconnecting the test mode connec-
In System Operation Check Mode, if you work on tor.
this in the mode with the engine started, it must only
be done when the engine is idling. It is very danger-
ous if you work on this mode while the vehicle is
Fuel Pump Control
running, because the engine may stall or the brakes This function has 2 modes: the fuel pump “OFF
may lose some of the braking force depending on Drive” mode and the fuel pump “ON/OFF
the settings. Drive”mode.

NOTE: NOTE:
The display items that appear depend on the model • The test mode connector does not need to be
and specifications of the vehicle on which fault diag- connected to operate this function.
nosis is being performed. • Always execute “Clear Memory” after operating
this function.

OFF Drive
Use this function to turn the fuel pump OFF and re-
move the residual pressure in the fuel pipe.
Follow the on-screen instructions to execute this
procedure.

79
 System Operation Check Mode

IMPORTANT: Injector Control

This mode should be executed at the time of idling. This function has two modes: “Injection Stop Mode”
When the accelerator pedal has been depressed and “Injection Quantity Control” mode.
etc., so that the engine is not in idling condition, this
mode is stopped and the fuel pump becomes ON. NOTE:
• The test mode connector does not need to be
ON/OFF Drive connected to operate this function.
Use this function to turn the fuel pump ON/OFF and • Always execute “Clear Memory” after operating
remove the fuel in the fuel tank. this function.
Follow the on-screen instructions to execute this
procedure. Injection Stop Mode
This function allows you to stop any cylinder injector
IMPORTANT: when identifying which cylinder is malfunctioning.
Do not operate the fuel pump if there is no fuel in the Follow the on-screen instructions to execute this
fuel tank; otherwise, the fuel pump may be dam- procedure.
aged.
Injection Quantity Control
Fixed Idle Ignition Timing The injection quantity can be increased according
This function fixes the ignition timing during idling, to the set percentage. This function can be used in
and by stopping the “idle ignition timing correction”, cases such as when the engine is not running prop-
it allows you to check the basic idle ignition timing erly and you need to check whether the problem is
and whether the idle ignition timing control is oper- a lean air-fuel ratio.
ating properly. Follow the on-screen instructions to Follow the on-screen instructions to execute this
execute this procedure. procedure.
NOTE: IMPORTANT:
• The test mode connector does not need to be • Keep in mind that increasing the injection quantity
connected to operate this function. may cause fuel to stick to the spark plugs, result-
• The ignition timing fixed value varies depending ing in engine malfunction.
on the vehicle model. Also, the fixed value cannot • Avoid running the engine for a long period of time
be changed. with the injection quantity increased, or else the
• The engine speed may vary while this mode is emissions will deteriorate.
operated.
• Always execute “Clear Memory” after operating EGR Valve Control
this function.
This function allows you to operate the EGR valve
in a preset number of steps and control the EGR
Idle Speed Control rate to a desired value. It is a means of checking
This function allows you to set the idle speed you whether or not the EGR valve is working properly.
want. Follow the on-screen instructions to execute this
Follow the on-screen instructions to execute this procedure.
procedure.
NOTE:
NOTE: • The test mode connector does not need to be
• The test mode connector does not need to be connected to operate this function.
connected to operate this function. • The number of steps that can be set varies de-
• Depending on conditions such as vehicle model pending on the vehicle models.
and elevation, the actual idle speed may not go • Always execute “Clear Memory” after operating
up when the idle speed setting is raised. this function.
• Always execute “Clear Memory” after operating
this function.

80
 Dealer Check Mode Procedure

Dealer Check Mode Procedure 7. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
This function can be used to perform inspection of a
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
simplified dealer check by performing operations as
prompted by messages that appear on the PC dis-
play.

The Dealer check mode procedure is one of the

self-diagnostic functions of the control module. The
dealer check mode provides the means to perform
more thorough system fault diagnosis.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed. SMU-00600

2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the 8. On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine
data link connector of the vehicle. Control System] and then press the Enter key or
left-click with the mouse.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00665

SMU-00113 9. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
button.
4. Connect the test connector. (Make sure that the
vehicle’s ignition switch is OFF.)
5. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
6. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.

SMU-00128

81
 Dealer Check Mode Procedure

10.From the list of fault diagnosis item, select [Deal- Entering the Dealer Check Mode
er Check Mode Procedure] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00256

As instructed by the display message, turn on the

SMU-00605
vehicle’s ignition switch (make sure that the engine
This displays an operation confirmation mes- is currently not running).
sage. As instructed by the message, click the Click button to advance to the next
button. screen, or the button to return to a previ-
ous screen. To exit the Dealer check mode, click the
button.

Check Engine Lamp Check

SMU-00255

This displays the Dealer check mode operation

instruction screen. Perform Dealer check mode
operations in accordance with the instructions SMU-00260
that appear.
Inspect the check engine lamp to see if it is lit or
NOTE: flashing.
• The test mode connector must be connected in
order to perform the Dealer check mode. If the check engine lamp is lit or flashing, click the
• When performing the Dealer check mode while button. Click the button to re-
the vehicle is in operation, never allow the driver turn to a previous screen or the button to
to operate the SSMΙΙΙ or SDI. cancel the Dealer check mode.
NOTE:
If the check engine lamp is not lit, perform fault di-
agnosis on the check engine lamp circuit as detailed
in the Service Manual.

82
 Dealer Check Mode Procedure

Actuator Operation Check Engine Start

SMU-00264 SMU-00272

This procedure checks for proper operation of the Start the engine of the vehicle.
various actuators of the fuel pump, radiator fan, and
other engine control system-related components. Click button to advance to the next
screen, or the button to return to a previ-
When an actuator is operating normally, click ous screen. To exit the Dealer check mode, click the
button to advance to the next screen, or button.
the button to return to a previous screen.
To exit the Dealer check mode, click the Vehicle Speed Signal Check
button.
NOTE:
If an actuator abnormality is discovered, perform
fault diagnosis in accordance with the Service Man-
ual.

Throttle Valve Position Sensor Input

Signal Check

SMU-00276

Run the vehicle at a speed of at least 10km/h (6

MPH).
IMPORTANT:
When performing the Dealer check mode while the
vehicle is in operation, never allow the driver to op-
erate the SSMΙΙΙ or SDI.
SMU-00268
Click button to advance to the next
Slowly press the accelerator pedal down as far as it
screen, or the button to return to a previ-
will go, and then release it.
ous screen. To exit the Dealer check mode, click the
button.
Click button to advance to the next
screen, or the button to return to a previ-
ous screen. To exit the Dealer check mode, click the
button.

83
 Dealer Check Mode Procedure

O2 Sensor Check When a fault is detected by the Dealer

check mode procedure
The applicable diagnostic code appears when a
fault is detected.
Check the diagnostic codes, and perform repair
work in accordance with Service Manual fault diag-
nosis procedures.

SMU-00280

Increase engine speed to the range of 2000 to 3000 SMU-00284

rpm, and keep it there for at least one minute.
A diagnostic result display will appear after the NOTE:
Dealer check mode is complete. After completing the Dealer check mode procedure,
To cancel the Dealer check mode part way through, turn off the vehicle’s ignition switch and disconnect
click the button. the test mode connector.

When no fault is detected by the Dealer

check mode procedure
The dialog box shown below appears when no fault
is detected.
Click the [OK] button.

SMU-00282

This displays dealer check mode ending screen.

Click the [Exit] button to complete the check.

SMU-00283

84
 OBD System

OBD System 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,

select [Each System Check] and then press the
Vehicle fault diagnosis can be performed by check-
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
ing the OBD system control parameters.
NOTE:
This function cannot be performed if the vehicle is
not equipped with an OBD system.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
SMU-00600
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag- 7. On the System Selection Menu, select the de-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR sired system and then press the Enter key or left-
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s click with the mouse. (As an example, “Engine” is
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press selected.)
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. SMU-00665

5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to 8. This displays a compliance verification message
start up the application. for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00128

85
 OBD System

9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [OBD The following describes the items that appear on
System] and then press the Enter key or left-click this screen.
with the mouse.
All data display
Use this item to check OBD system diagnostic re-
sults, and control module input signals, which are
needed for diagnosis.

SMU-00592
SMU-00606
Analog data display Menu
10.This causes the OBD system menu screen to
Use this item to check control module input signals
appear.
and control module control data.
Select the desired item and then click the mouse.
NOTE:
The items that appear depend on the system being
diagnosed.

SMU-00593

O2 sensor system data display

Use this item to check O2 sensor-related control
module input signals and control data.

SMU-00545

SMU-00594
Current Data Display & Save
Selecting [Current Data Display & Save] on the Diagnosis process display
OBD menu screen displays the screen shown be- Use this item to check OBD system diagnostic re-
low. sults.

SMU-00595

SMU-00546

86
 OBD System

Saved Data Display Diagnostic Code Display

Use this item to recall and check data saved with Selecting [Diagnostic Code(s) Display] on the OBD
the SSMΙΙΙ OBD system. menu displays a screen like the one shown below.
On the file type dialog box, select “OBD sampling This screen can be used to check diagnostic codes
data (*.obd)”. detected by the OBD system.

SMU-00298

Diagnostic Code Clear

Selecting [Diagnostic Code(s) Cleared] on the OBD
menu displays a dialog box like the one shown be-
low.
As instructed by the dialog box text, click the [Yes]
button to delete the diagnostic codes memorized by
the control module.

SMU-00698

Freeze Frame Data Display

Selecting [Freeze Frame Data Display] on the OBD
menu displays a screen like the one shown below.
This screen can be used to check the input data to
the control module at the point that the OBD system
fault is detected.
The dialog box at the top of the screen can be used
to select and display the data for up to three fault
detection instances.
SMU-00299

Executing the diagnostic clear operation causes the

message shown below to appear.
Click the [OK] button.

SMU-00297

SMU-00300

87
 OBD System

O2 Sensor Monitor Get Vehicle Info

Selecting [O2 Sensor Monitor Test] on the OBD Selecting [Getting of vehicle information] on the
menu displays a screen like the one shown below. OBD menu displays a screen like the one shown
(This display screen is an example.) below.
The O2 sensor related control module input signal
and control data screen can be displayed by select-
ing the item on the display that conforms to the ve-
hicle being inspected. This makes it possible to
check the current O2 sensor status.

SMU-00304
SMU-00547

NOTE:
Some functions may not be available in the case of
certain vehicle models and vehicle specifications.

Onboard Monitor Test Results

Selecting [Result of on-board monitor test] on the
OBD menu displays a screen like the one shown
below.

SMU-00302

Temporary Code Check

Selecting [Temporary Code(s) Inspection] on the
OBD menu displays a screen like the one shown
below.
This screen shows temporary codes detected by
the OBD system.

SMU-00303

88
 Function Check Sequence

Function Check Sequence 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
The brake control system fault diagnosis screen in-
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
cludes a function check sequence item. The func-
tion check sequence can be used to perform checks
of ABS system and VDC system hydraulic control
valve operation, and to set the center point of the
VDC system steering angle sensor and the 0 point
of the lateral G sensor.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the SMU-00600
data link connector of the vehicle.
7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Brake
NOTE: Control System] and then press the Enter key or
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag- left-click with the mouse.
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00113
SMU-00669
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
8. This displays a compliance verification message
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. for the brake control system. Click the [OK] but-
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to ton.
start up the application.

SMU-00308

89
 Function Check Sequence

9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select VDC Function Check Mode
[Function Check Sequence] and then press the Selecting the check sequence for a vehicle
Enter key or left-click with the mouse. equipped with a VDC causes the screen shown be-
low to appear.
Perform the procedure as instructed by the text on
the screen will automatically enter the VDC function
check mode and perform a hydraulic control valve
operation check.

SMU-00607

ABS Function Check Mode

Selecting the check sequence for a vehicle SMU-00413

equipped with an ABS causes the screen shown be- NOTE:

low to appear. • Connection of the test mode connector is not re-
Perform the procedure as instructed by the text on quired for this check.
the screen will automatically enter the ABS function • Be sure to refer to the Service Manual when per-
check mode and perform a hydraulic control valve forming this check.
operation check.
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral and
Lateral G Sensor Zero Setting
Mode
Selecting the steering angle sensor neutral and lat-
eral G sensor zero setting mode for a vehicle
SMU-00670 equipped with a VDC causes the screen shown be-
low to appear.
NOTE: Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to
• Keep the brake pedal depressed until the check set steering sensor neutral and lateral G sensor ze-
is complete. Releasing the brake pedal while ro.
checking is part way through will result in an in-
correct check.
• Connection of the test mode connector is not re-
quired for this check.
• Be sure to refer to the Service Manual when per-
forming this check.
SMU-00414

NOTE:
• Connection of the test mode connector is not re-
quired for this check.
• Be sure to refer to the Service Manual when per-
forming this setting operation.

90
 Fault Data Display

Fault Data Display 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
This display makes it possible to check control mod-
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
ule input data and the module control status when
the brake control system control module detects a
fault.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag- SMU-00600

nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR 7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Brake
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s Control System] and then press the Enter key or
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press left-click with the mouse.
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
SMU-00669
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application. 8. This displays a compliance verification message
for the brake control system. Click the [OK] but-
ton.

SMU-00308

91
 Fault Data Display

9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select

[Freeze Frame Data] and then press the Enter
key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00608

10.Selecting [Freeze Frame Data] displays a

screen like the one shown below.
The select box at the top of the screen can be
used to select and display the data for up to three
fault detection instances.

SMU-00316

NOTE:
• The control module always maintains the three
latest fault information entries in memory.
• If the screen shows a diagnostic code with a
question mark (?), it means that the fault informa-
tion was not stored correctly by the control mod-
ule when the fault was detected.

92
 Selection of Parameter

Selection of Parameter 4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.

This function is used to select/register parameters 5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
when the VDC control module has been replaced start up the application.
with a normal spare part. 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
NOTE:
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
• Always execute “Clear Memory” after operating
this function.
• This function cannot be used with a control mod-
ule that is not a normal spare part.
• To confirm the applied model, refer to the “model
No. plate” affixed to the vehicle. The location of
the model No. plate is shown in the Service Man-
ual.

SMU-00600

7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Brake

Control System] and then press the Enter key or
SMU-00868
left-click with the mouse.
Registration Procedure
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the
PWRLED of the SDI does not light, turn on the ve-
hicle's ignition switch or start the engine, and then
press the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if
the PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00669

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

SMU-00869

93
 Selection of Parameter

9. From the list of fault diagnosis, select [Selection NOTE:

of Parameter] and then press the Enter key or If the applied model and grade are different than
left-click with the mouse. those of the vehicle, execute the registration proce-
dure again after clicking the [OK] button.

SMU-00870

10.Input the applied model and press the Enter key.

SMU-00871

11.Stand by as the message below will appear on

the screen.

SMU-00872

12.The vehicle information check screen will be dis-

played.
Make sure that the applied model and grade
shown on the screen are correct and then click
the [OK] button.

SMU-00873

94
 Confirm on Parameter

Confirm on Parameter
This function allows you to confirm the parameters
registered in the VDC control module.
NOTE:
This function can be used even if the VDC control
module is not a normal spare part.

Confirm Procedure
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed. SMU-00600

2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the 7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Brake
data link connector of the vehicle. Control System] and then press the Enter key or
left-click with the mouse.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the
PWRLED of the SDI does not light, turn on the ve-
hicle's ignition switch or start the engine, and then
press the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if
the PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00669

SMU-00113 8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
button.
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.
6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
SMU-00869

95
 Confirm on Parameter

9. From the list of fault diagnosis, select [Confirm on

Parameter] and then press the Enter key or left-
click with the mouse.

SMU-00874

10.The parameter confirm screen will be displayed.

Make sure the “Applied model” and “Grade” of the
pertinent vehicle are displayed, and then click the
[OK] button.

SMU-00875

96
 Body Integrated Module Destination Market Registry (Excluding North America and Japan)

Body Integrated Module

Destination Market Registry
(Excluding North America and
Japan)
When the body integrated module has been re-
placed by a normal spare part, the vehicle destina-
tion information is set to the body integrated
module.
NOTE:
• Body integrated module destination registry is a
function for markets other than North America
and Japan.
• This function cannot be used with a control mod-
ule that is not a normal spare part.
SMU-00672
• Upon replacement of body integrated module, ve-
hicle destination input is necessary. Please con- 4. This displays a compliance verification message
firm market destination of the vehicle which the for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
module replacement is to be performed, before button.
the module is replaced by a spare part.

Confirmation of Vehicle
Destination (Part 1)
Confirm the vehicle destination registered in the
body integrated module prior to replacement.
SMU-00380
1. Start the PC application according to section
"Starting Up the System" and display the Main 5. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [Cur-
Menu screen. rent Data Display & Save] and then press the En-
2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display, ter key or left-click with the mouse.
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-01103

SMU-00600

3. On the System Selection Menu, select [Integ. unit

mode] and then press the Enter key or left-click
with the mouse.

97
 Body Integrated Module Destination Market Registry (Excluding North America and Japan)

6. When digital data is displayed as shown below,

scroll down and confirm the item [Destination Set- Model Number Label Destination
ting]. The value shown defines the market the ve-
Arabic KS
hicle is destined for.

SMU-01104

Confirmation of Vehicle SMU-01106

Destination (Part 2)
If market destination is impossible to obtain digitally
(e.g. when the body integrated module is out of or- Model Number Label Destination
der), refer to [Model Number Label] fixed onto the Non-Arabic EC, EL, EA, EH, E2, EP,
vehicle itself. K4, K5
The location of the model number label is shown in
the Service Manual.

For right-hand drive models

Confirm vehicle destination by “Applied Model”
number row of the model number label, in which 5th
out of 7 digits (count from left) distinguish the mar-
ket vehicle is intended for.
Applied Model
5th Digit Destination SMU-01105
Number
****K** K EK, ER
****4** 4 or 5 JP
****5**

SMU-01110

For left-hand drive models

Destination market is distinguished by whether the
model number label is in Arabic or not.

98
 Body Integrated Module Destination Market Registry (Excluding North America and Japan)

Registration Steps for Registering

Vehicle Destination
1. After the vehicle destination is confirmed, replace
the body integrated module with a fresh spare.
NOTE:
Please refer to Service Manual for instruction of
body integrated module replacement.
2. Begin destination registry for the spare body inte-
grated module.
SMU-01108
First, follow steps shown in column 1 through 4 of
[Confirmation of vehicle destination (Part 1)] Option Code Correlation Table
shown above.
Destination Option Code
3. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [In-
teg. Unit customizing] and then press the Enter JPN JP00
key or left-click with the mouse. EK , ER EK00
EC, EL, EA, EH, E2, EP, EC00
K4, K5
KS KS00

6. Screen will then display message shown below.

Reconfirm the displayed vehicle destination with
the one identified by steps previously mentioned,
SMU-00674
then click [OK] to conclude the registry operation.

4. The screen shown below will appear. Click the

[OK] button.

SMU-01109

NOTE:
SMU-01107
If the applied model and grade are different than
those of the vehicle, execute the registration proce-
5. Option code registry screen will then be dis- dure again after clicking the [Cancel] button.
played. Refer to [Option Code Correlation Table]
shown below, enter the option code matching the
destination correlating to the result of steps
shown above, and then click [OK].

99
 Body Integrated Module Function Check

Body Integrated Module 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Function Check Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
The following procedure can be used to force oper-
ation of the various actuators that control the body
integrated module and check their operation.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SMU-00600
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR 7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Integ. unit
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s mode] and then press the Enter key or left-click
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press with the mouse.
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. SMU-00672
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
8. This displays a compliance verification message
start up the application.
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00380

100
 Body Integrated Module Function Check

9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select This forces operation of the actuator(s). After
[Function check] and then press the Enter key or checking the operational status of the actuator(s),
left-click with the mouse. click the [Exit] button.

SMU-00673

On the screen that appears, select the actuator(s)

SMU-00384
to be checked, and then click the [Next] button.
This causes a confirmation message to appear.
NOTE:
Click the [OK] button.
• A check mark will not appear next to an actuator
when it is selected on the screen if the selected
actuator is not equipped on the vehicle.
• Perform the shift lock solenoid operation check in
the P range.

SMU-00385

If the function check reveals abnormal operation

in any actuator, perform repair work in accord-
ance with the Service Manual.
SMU-00520

This displays a screen for confirming operation of

the selected actuator(s). Click the [Next] button.

SMU-00383

101
 Body Integrated Module Function Setting (Integ.Unit Customizing)

Body Integrated Module 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Function Setting (Integ.Unit Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
Customizing)
The following procedure can be used to configure
operational details, operation time, and other set-
tings for the actuators controlled by the body inte-
grated module.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure you perform setting operations in ac-
cordance with the Service Manual when using the
unit customization function. Configuring the wrong
settings can cause abnormal system operation and
other problems. SMU-00600

7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Integ. unit

Getting Ready mode] and then press the Enter key or left-click
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable, with the mouse.
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00672

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application. SMU-00380

102
 Body Integrated Module Function Setting (Integ.Unit Customizing)

9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [In-

teg.Unit customizing] and then press the Enter
key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-01107
SMU-00674
This displays a customized setting screen for the
On the screen that appears, select the setting(s) selected item(s). Select the desired setting(s),
to be configured, and then click the [Next] button. and then click the [OK] button.

SMU-00408

This causes a message to appear indicating that

SMU-00391
setting configuration is complete. Click the [OK]
NOTE: button.
• Make sure you perform setting operations in ac-
cordance with the Service Manual. Configuring
the wrong settings can cause abnormal system
operation and other problems.
• If there is no destination registry in the body inte-
grated module, the screen may display message
shown below.
In such case, please refer to item [Body Integrat-
ed Module Destination Market Registry (Exclud- SMU-00415
ing Japan and North America)], and perform
destination registry.

103
 Display the List of Function Setting (Integ.Unit Customizing)

Display the List of Function

Setting (Integ.Unit
Customizing)
You can display, print, or save a list of Function Set-
ting (Integ.Unit Customizing) status for body inte-
grated module.
On the list, you can enter information, such as “Ve-
hicle Registration Number”, “Vehicle Number”, etc.
NOTE:
SMU-00856
The customized setting cannot be changed from
this function. To change customized setting, per- 7. On the Others Menu, select [Customized Setting]
form from “Integ.Unit customizing”. and then press the Enter key or left-click with the
mouse.
How to Display the List
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE: SMU-00857
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
8. This displays the list of Function Setting status for
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
body integrated module.
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle's
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press Enter information into the items; Customer's
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the Name / Vehicle Registration Number / Vehicle
PWR LED of the SDI lights. Number / Dealership / Inspector’s Name.
Confirm the entered items and then click the
[Completion of data entry] button.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Turn on the vehicle's ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application. SMU-00878

6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display, NOTE:

select [Others] and then press the Enter key or The items displayed in the list depend on vehicle
left-click with the mouse. model and specifications.

104
 Display the List of Function Setting (Integ.Unit Customizing)

9. This displays a confirmation dialog box for the

function setting status. Click the [Yes] button.

SMU-00859

10.After completing confirmation of function setting

status, data will be input in blanks. This also dis-
plays a save confirmation dialog box simultane-
SMU-00862
ously.
NOTE:
• The function setting status file is saved in the
Data folder where the PC application is installed.
To change to another storage location, specify
the location you want in the Save in box of the
save data dialog box.
• The Comment box of the Save As dialog box can
be used to save general comments associated
with the data or file.

Displaying Saved Files

1. On the Main Menu, select [Saved Data Display]
and then click with the mouse.
SMU-00879

NOTE:
“-” may be displayed in the case of certain vehicle
models and vehicle specifications.
11.To save displayed data, click the [Yes] button in
the save confirmation dialog box.

SMU-00863

SMU-00861

12.This displays the “Save As” dialog box.

The name of the data file being saved is generat-
ed automatically in accordance with the current
time and date. If you want to use the generated
file name as-is, click the dialog box [Save] button.
If you want to change to a different file name, type
in the name you want.

105
 Display the List of Function Setting (Integ.Unit Customizing)

2. This displays the “Open” dialog box. Click “Files

of type” and select {Customized settings (*.biu)}.

SMU-00864

3. After selecting the desired file, clicking the [Open]

button allows to open saved file.

SMU-00865

Printing the Data

Click the [File] menu and then select [Print]. You
can also print by clicking the icon on the Data
List Toolbar, by clicking the button on the
Function Key Bar, or by pressing the F8 function
key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00666

106
 Impact Sensor

Impact Sensor 7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Impact

Sensor] and then press the Enter key or left-click
Impact Sensor sensitivity adjustment on the securi-
with the mouse.
ty system can be done by this function.
It is necessary to refer to service manuals when you
do this adjustment.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-01024

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. SMU-01025
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application. 9. On the Diagnostic Menu, select [Sensitivity Ad-
justment Mode] and then press the Enter key or
6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display, left-click with the mouse.
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-01026

SMU-00600

107
 Impact Sensor

10.This displays an execution confirmation mes-

sage of the Sensitivity Adjustment Mode. Click
the [Yes] button.

SMU-01027

11.Sensitivity Adjustment Mode dialog box ap-

pears. Select a sensitivity value of the Impact
Sensor by clicking button and then click
the [OK] button. It can be selected by pressing left
and right arrow keys on the PC, too.

SMU-01028

NOTE:
• The bigger the value of the sensitivity, the lower
the Impact Sensor sensitivity is.
• If the sensitivity adjustment could not be done
normally, a buzzer sounds 4 times.
12.Sensitivity adjustment confirmation message ap-
pears. Click the [OK] button.

SMU-01029

108
 Registering the Transmitter

Registering the Transmitter 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
This allows to register the transmitter of keyless
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
system.
NOTE:
• A maximum of four transmitters can be registered
for each individual vehicle.
• When replacing or adding the transmitter, you
need to register the previously registered trans-
mitter again.
• Make sure to refer to the service manual when
registering a transmitter.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed. SMU-00600

2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the 7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Keyless
data link connector of the vehicle. Unit Mode] and then press the Enter key or left-
click with the mouse.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag- NOTE:
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR For model with body integrated module, select
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s [Keyless ID registration] from [Integ. Unit Mode].
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

SMU-00761
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.

109
 Registering the Transmitter

8. This displays a compliance verification message 11.This displays confirmation screen of Keyless ID
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK] which is input. Make sure that the ID displayed on
button. screen is correct and then click the [OK] button.

SMU-00762

9. From the list of keyless diagnosis items, select

SMU-00765
[Keyless ID registration] and then press the Enter
key or left-click with the mouse. 12.Stand by as the keyless ID is registered.
13.The screen shown below will appear if registra-
tion ends normally.
If you have another transmitter to be registered,
click the [OK] button. If you do not have any more
transmitters to be registered, click the [Cancel]
button and advance to step 15.

SMU-00763

10.This displays Keyless ID Input screen. Input the

ID and then click the [OK] button.
NOTE:
The keyless ID, eight-digit number, is attached to vi-
nyl bag, which contains transmitter, or circuit board
inside transmitter.

SMU-00766

14.If you need to register other transmitter, repeat

steps 10 through 13.
15.After completing registration of transmitter,
make sure that the transmitter is operating nor-
mally, and then quit the registration operation.

SMU-00764
NOTE:
If an error is occurred during keyless ID registration,
refer to the service manual and follow the instruc-
tions that appear on the screen to correct the prob-
lem.

110
 Keyless Entry Control Module Function Setting (Keyless unit Customizing)

Keyless Entry Control Module 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Function Setting (Keyless unit Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
Customizing)
The following procedure can be used to configure
operational details, operation time, and other set-
tings for the actuators controlled by the keyless con-
trol module.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure you perform setting operations in ac-
cordance with the Service Manual when using the
unit customization function. Configuring the wrong
settings can cause abnormal system operation and
other problems. SMU-00600

NOTE: 7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Keyless

For model with body integrated module, this cus- Unit Mode] and then press the Enter key or left-
tomizing can be performed in “Body Integrated click with the mouse.
Module Function Setting (Integ.Unit Customizing)”.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00761

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to SMU-00762
start up the application.

111
 Keyless Entry Control Module Function Setting (Keyless unit Customizing)

9. From the list of keyless diagnosis items, select

[Keyless unit customizing] and then press the En-
ter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00767

10.This displays a customized setting screen. Click

the desired setting item with mouse or select it
with up or down arrow key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00768

11.After selecting item, change the setting by dou-

ble-click with mouse or left or right arrow key on
the PC keyboard, and then click the [OK] button.

SMU-00769

112
 Registering the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Transmitter (ID)

Registering the Tire Pressure 5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.
Monitoring System
6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
Transmitter (ID) select [Each System Check] and then press the
The procedure below can be used to register the tire Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
pressure monitoring system transmitter (ID). Regis-
tration of the transmitter (ID) is required after per-
forming any one of the following repair work
procedures.
• Transmitter replacement
• Tire rotation (causing change of transmitter posi-
tion)
• Tire pressure monitoring control module replace-
ment
NOTE:
Be sure to perform transmitter (ID) registration work SMU-00600
in accordance with the Service Manual.
7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Tire pres-
Getting Ready sure monitor] and then press the Enter key or left-
click with the mouse.
Adjust the air pressure of all of the tires so they are
at the standard value.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00675

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

SMU-00395
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.

113
 Registering the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Transmitter (ID)

9. On the Tire pressure monitor diagnosis screen, The message “complete” appears when each
select [Transmitter ID regist confirm] and then wheel ID registration is complete.
press the Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-01126
SMU-00396
The dialog box shown below appears when ID
ID registration registration for all wheels is complete.
1. On the Transmitter ID regist confirm screen, se- Click the [OK] button to exit the operation.
lect [ID registration] and then press the Enter key
or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00397 SMU-00401

2. This displays a confirmation screen asking if you NOTE:

want to delete the registered transmitter ID. Click Registering a transmitter ID causes the previously
the [OK] button. registered ID to be deleted.

Transmitter ID Data Monitor

The currently registered ID data and the ID data
sent from the transmitter to the tire pressure moni-
toring control module can be viewed by selecting
[Transmitter ID data monitor] on the Transmitter ID
regist confirm screen.

SMU-00398

3. On the transmitter ID registration confirmation

screen, click the [OK] button to start ID registration.

SMU-00402

SMU-00399

114
 Registering the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Transmitter (ID)

Transmitter ID Data Screen

SMU-01127

115
 Calibrating the Occupant Detection System

Calibrating the Occupant 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Detection System Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
The procedure below can be used to calibrate the
occupant detection system after performing repair
work on the system.
NOTE:
• Perform occupant detection system calibration
work in accordance with the Service Manual.
• The air bag warning lamp will light if some abnor-
mality occurs, such as interruption of the adjust-
ment procedure or interruption of the sensor data
read procedure.
SMU-00600
Getting Ready
7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Occupant
Prepare the vehicle for calibration as instructed by
Detection System] and then press the Enter key
the Service Manual.
or left-click with the mouse.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00679

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to SMU-00358
start up the application.

116
 Calibrating the Occupant Detection System

9. On the Occupant Detection System screen, se- After making sure the front passenger seat is va-
lect [System Calibration] and then press the Enter cant, click the [OK] button.
key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00359

After confirming the contents of the screen shown

below, click the [OK] button.
SMU-00362

After making sure the front passenger seat is in

the condition specified by the Service Manual,
click the [OK] button.

SMU-00360

When a screen appears confirming that there are

no fault codes, click the [OK] button.

SMU-00363

A load test confirmation screen appears after

threshold adjustment ends normally. Click the
[OK] button.

SMU-00361

SMU-00364

117
 Calibrating the Occupant Detection System

After making sure the front passenger seat is va- After confirming that the weight on the front pas-
cant, click the [OK] button. senger seat is positioned as specified in the Serv-
ice Manual, click the [OK] button.

SMU-00365
SMU-00368
After making sure the front passenger seat is in
the condition specified by the Service Manual, After confirming that special tool Weight A and
click the [OK] button. Weight B are combined and positioned on the
front passenger seat as specified in the Service
Manual, click the [OK] button.

SMU-00366

Input the weight value, and then click the [OK] SMU-00369
button.

SMU-00367

118
 Calibrating the Occupant Detection System

After confirming that system adjustment has end-

ed normally, click the [OK] button to exit the oper-
ation.

SMU-00370

Reading Sensor Data

Data from each sensor can be viewed by selecting
[Sensor Data Output] on the Occupant Detection
System screen.

SMU-00371

Sensor Data Output Screen

SMU-00372

119
 Airbag System

Airbag System 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,

select [Each System Check] and then press the
This function can be used to check the operational
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
status of each sensor when abnormality of seat belt
buckle switch and seat position sensor occurs, or
after replacing the seat belt buckle switch and the
seat position sensor.
NOTE:
Status data screen will appear in North American
models only.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed. SMU-00600

2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the 7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Airbag
data link connector of the vehicle. System] and then press the Enter key or left-click
NOTE: with the mouse.
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00682
SMU-00113
8. This displays a compliance verification message
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC. for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch. button.

5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to

start up the application.

SMU-00374

120
 Airbag System

9. On the Airbag System screen, select [Status Da-

ta] and then press the Enter key or left-click with
the mouse.

SMU-00375

After checking the status of each sensor, click the

[OK] button.

SMU-00376

121
 CAN System Fault Location

CAN System Fault Location

When there is some trouble in the CAN system, the
location of this trouble can be confirmed.
NOTE:
• This function corresponds only to troubles mem-
orized DTC. In case of troubles not memorized
DTC, their locations are not displayed.
• The DTC displayed by the “Diagnostic Code Dis-
play” of the CAN system are only the codes relat-
ed to the CAN system out of the group of DTCs
displayed by “Diagnostic Code Display” of the
Body Integrated Module. Accordingly, the DTC
displayed by the CAN system also can be con-
firmed from the Body Integrated Module.
1. Start the PC application according to section SMU-00892
“Starting Up the System” and display the Main
Menu screen. 4. This displays a compliance verification message
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
2. On the Main Menu that appears on the dis- button.
play,select [Each System Check] and then press
the Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00893

5. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [Fault

Location] and then press the Enter key or left-
click with the mouse.

SMU-00600

3. On the System Selection Menu, select [CAN Sys-

tem] and then press the Enter key or left-click with
the mouse.

SMU-00894

6. The fault location is displayed.

SMU-00895

122
 Registering the Immobilizer (Not Equipped with Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

Registering the Immobilizer NOTE:

SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
(Not Equipped with Keyless nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
Access with Push Button Start LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
System) ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
WARNING: PWR LED of the SDI lights.
• The security ID and registration command must
be handled as confidential information and shall
not be announced to outsiders.
• When wireless radios or car telephones are in-
stalled, they must be installed so that the immobi-
lizer system is not influenced by electric waves.
• Do not operate cell phones or wireless radios or
the like when either trouble diagnosis or immobi-
lizer registration is in progress.
• During immobilizer registration, do not bring a key
with a different ID close to the ignition switch.
When the key is on a keychain, remove it from the SMU-00113
chain before start of diagnosis. When there are
3. Connect the SDI to the PC with the USB cable.
several keys on one keychain, remove them from
the keychain and use them individually for the 4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
work. 5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
• When the engine cannot be started with a regis- start up the PC application.
tered key, pull the ignition key from the ignition
switch, wait approximately one second until the 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
immobilizer warning lamp starts flashing, and select [Immobilizer] and then press the Enter key
then turn the ignition key slowly to start the en- or left-click with the mouse.
gine.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.

SMU-00663

123
 Registering the Immobilizer (Not Equipped with Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

7. Click the [YES] button if the system selection

screen is displayed.

SMU-00876

11.Input the teaching operation code, and then click

SMU-00946
the [OK] button.
NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
8. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
access with push button start system. Click the
[NO] button.

SMU-00908
SMU-00431
NOTE:
• The term [smart system] that appears on this NOTE:
screen is synonymous with the term [keyless ac- When you wish to return to the Main Menu screen,
cess with push button start system] used in this click the [QUIT] button.
text. 12.On the registration mode confirmation dialog box
• The keyless access with push button start system that appears, click the [OK] button.
is not equipped with some vehicles, depending
on the specifications, for North America, Austral-
ia, and some other areas.
9. Click [YES] after confirming if the ignition switch
is ON, as following screen will be displayed.

SMU-00909

SMU-00432
10.In response to the compliance verification dialog
box that appears, click the [OK] button.

124
 Registering the Immobilizer (Not Equipped with Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

13.Input the security ID and then click the [OK] but-

ton.

SMU-00435

17.The screen shown below will appear if registra-

SMU-00732
tion ends normally.
14.Stand by as the security ID is being collated. If you have another key to be registered, click the
[OK] button. If you do not have any more keys to
be registered, click the [Cancel] button and ad-
vance to step 26.

SMU-00434

15.In response to the key registration confirmation

screen dialog box that appears, click the [OK] SMU-00436
button.

SMU-00439

16.Stand by as the key is registered.

125
 Registering the Immobilizer (Not Equipped with Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

18.Turn off the ignition switch, and then change the

key to one to be registered.
NOTE:
You need to change key within about 30 seconds.

SMU-00439

21.Stand by as the key is registered.

SMU-00437

19.Turn off the ignition switch and the screen shown

below will appear. Insert the key you want to reg-
ister into the key cylinder, and turn on the ignition
switch.

SMU-00435

22.The screen shown below will appear if registra-

tion ends normally.
If you have another key to be registered, click the
[OK] button. If you do not have any more keys to
be registered, click the [Cancel] button and ad-
vance to step 26.
SMU-00438

20.In response to the key registration confirmation

screen dialog box that appears, click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00440

126
 Registering the Immobilizer (Not Equipped with Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

23.Repeat steps 18 through 21.

24.The screen shown below will appear if registra-
tion ends normally.
If you have another key to be registered, click the
[OK] button. If you do not have any more keys to
be registered, click the [Cancel] button and ad-
vance to step 26.

SMU-00441

25.Repeat steps 18 through 21.

26.The screen shown below will appear if registra-
tion ends normally.
Click the [OK] button.

SMU-00733

27.After confirming that the immobilizer system is

operating normally, quit the registration opera-
tion.

127
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

Registering the Immobilizer

(Equipped with the Keyless
Access with Push Button Start
System)
WARNING:
• The security ID and registration command must
be handled as confidential information and shall
not be announced to outsiders.
• When you install wireless radios or car phones,
SMU-01094
make sure that mobile keys (access keys) are not
influenced by their electric waves. (1) Let the mechanical key insertion opening
• Do not operate cell phones or wireless radios or of the mobile key (AccessKey) face down.
the like when either trouble diagnosis or mobile (2) Hold the Subaru ornament side to the push
key (access key) registration is in progress. engine switch (push-button ignition switch)
• The work of "Registering the Smart Immobilizer", side.
"Registering the Smart ECM" and "Delete the Mo- (3) Bring it close until it touches the push en-
bile Key (AccessKey) ID" includes the operation gine switch (push-button ignition switch).
of holding up the mobile key (AccessKey) to the When replacing the parts for vehicles with key-
push engine switch (push-button ignition switch). less access with push button start system, always
Pay attention to the following when performing use new parts for "mobile key (AccessKey)", "col-
this operation. lation ECM", "ID code box", "steering lock ECM",
1) Confirm that the battery voltage is 11 V or and "body integrated module", and never replace
more and execute each mode. by used parts.
2) When confirm/register mobile key (access • If the engine cannot get started with a registered
key), only one key can be brought into vehicle mobile key (access key), wait approximately one
at a time. second until the immobilizer warning lamp starts
For registration of multiple keys, bring a key flashing. Then try to start the engine again with
into vehicle and perform registration while the registered mobile key (access key).
leaving rest of other keys outside. • Do not place a PC within 10cm around mobile
3) When holding up the mobile key (AccessKey) keys (access keys) and receiver antennas to
to the push engine switch (push-button ignition avoid any malfunctions of the keyless access with
switch), do not hold two or more mobile keys push button start system.
(AccessKey) at the same time, but use only
one each time. (When the mobile key (Access- NOTE:
Key) is on a keychain, remove it from the key- • The keyless access with push button start system
chain before the work.) is not equipped with some vehicles, depending
4) When holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up on the specifications, for North America, Austral-
to the push engine switch (push-button ignition ia, and some other areas.
switch), bring the mobile key (AccessKey) • Carry out the "Registering the Smart Immobilizer’
close to the push engine switch (push-button procedure in case you replace a mobile key (ac-
ignition switch) as shown below. cess key), collation ECM, body integrated module
or a combination meter.
• In case of replacing a steering lock ECM, execute
the "Registering the Smart ECM" procedure.
• When replacing the ID code box, "Registering the
Engine ECM" and "Registering the Smart ECM"
must be performed in this order.

128
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

• In case of replacing an engine ECM, execute the 2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
"Registering the Engine ECM" procedure. select [Immobilizer] and then press the Enter key
• Immobilizer registration is NOT necessary when or left-click with the mouse.
a power supply ECM or a gateway ECM is re-
placed.
• When turning the ignition on, press the push en-
gine switch (push-button ignition switch) twice
without stepping on the brake pedal. Power sup-
ply status changes to ACC-ON, IG-ON, OFF,
ACC-ON accordingly, as pressing the push en-
gine switch (push-button ignition switch) once.
• At the time of engine start, press the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch) once with the
brake pedal depressed in case of an AT vehicle.
SMU-00663
In case of an MT vehicle, press the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch) once with the 3. Click the [YES] button if the system selection
clutch pedal depressed. screen is displayed.
• When performing either one of the operations
shown below, perform also the "registration of the
remote control engine starter".
1) Installing remote control engine starter
2) Replacing remote control engine starter
3) Replacing collation ECM of a vehicle equipped
with remote control engine starter
• At the time of replacement of the body integrated
module and the combination meter, perform
SMU-00946
"Registering the Smart Immobilizer".
• When a mobile key (AccessKey) has been lost, NOTE:
perform "Delete the Mobile Key (AccessKey) ID". Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
When all mobile keys (AccessKey) have been
lost, refer to "Keyless access with push button 4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
start system: Correspondence table at the time of access with push button start system. Click the
parts failure". [YES] button.
• There is a possibility that registry fails due to poor
connector coupling of cabin antenna. In such
case, please repair electrical contacts of keyless
access indoor antenna (front) before performing
immobilizer registry. Keyless access indoor an-
tenna (front) is the only antenna used in immobi-
lizer registry. SMU-00910

NOTE:
Registering the Smart Immobilizer The term [smart system] that appears on this screen
You can get the immobilizer registered for vehicles is synonymous with the term [keyless access with
equipped with keyless access with push button start push button start system] used in this text.
system.
1. Start the PC application according to section
"Starting Up the System" and display the Main
Menu screen.

129
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

5. Input the teaching operation code, and then click

the [OK] button.

SMU-00913

8. Input the security ID and then click the [OK] but-

SMU-00911
ton.
NOTE:
When you wish to return to the Main Menu screen,
click the [QUIT] button.
6. The registration mode selection dialog box ap-
pears. Click the [Smart Immobilizer Registration]
button.

SMU-00914

9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated.

SMU-00912

7. On the registration mode confirmation dialog box

that appears, click the [OK] button.

SMU-00915

130
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

10.Wait until the smart immobilizer is then being 2) Hold the Subaru ornament side to the push en-
registered. gine switch (push-button ignition switch) side.
3) Bring it close until it touches the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch).
• The procedure to hold a mobile key (access key)
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) has to be done within 30 seconds after
the screen above appears.
12.When screen displays mobile key (access key)
registration mode shown below, hold one mobile
key (access key) you wish to register additionally
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch).

SMU-00916

11.The dialog box to confirm already registered mo-

bile keys (access keys) appears. Hold one of
those mobile keys (access keys) over the push
engine switch (push-button ignition switch).
After the buzzer sounds once, move the mobile
key (AccessKey) away from the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch) and go to the
next step.

SMU-00918

NOTE:
• When the buzzer has sounded twice, the work of
holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up has been
completed, but for 10 seconds after the work, the
mobile key (AccessKey) should be kept inside the
vehicle (near the select lever).
• For registration of the next mobile key (Access-
Key), the previously registered mobile key (Ac-
cessKey) should be removed from the vehicle.
• Do not click the [Quit] button until you finish reg-
SMU-00917 istering all the mobile keys (access keys) you
wish to register.
NOTE: • When you hold a mobile key (access key) over
• When holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up to the push engine switch (push-button ignition
the push engine switch (push-button ignition switch), do so with 30 seconds after above
switch), bring the mobile key (AccessKey) close screen is shown.
to the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) as shown below.
1) Let the mechanical key insertion opening of
the mobile key (AccessKey) face down.

131
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

13.Stand by as the mobile key (access key) is being

registered.

SMU-01121

16.Then following screen appears. Turn the ignition

SMU-00916
on.
14.Once the registration ends normally, the [Regis-
tered number] increases by one as you can see
on the screen below.
If you have another mobile key (access key) to be
registered, repeat steps 12 through 13. If you do
not have any more mobile keys (access keys) to
be registered, click the [Quit] button and move on
to step 15.

SMU-00921

17.Stand by as the registration to the engine ECM

is being completed.

SMU-00919

15.Once following screen appears, turn the push

engine switch (push-button ignition switch) off.
Then open or close the driver’s door, depending
on its status.

SMU-00922

132
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

18.The screen shown below will appear if registra- 3. Click the [YES] button if the system selection
tion ends normally. Click the [OK] button. screen is displayed.

SMU-00946

NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
4. On the ne/xt screen, confirm the system is key-
SMU-00923 less access with push button start system. Click
the [YES] button.
19.After confirming that the keyless access with
push button start system operates normally, quit
the registration operation.
NOTE:
Depending on the replacement part, a different
screen from the screen shown in this item may be
SMU-00910
displayed. In such a case, perform the work follow-
ing the on-screen instructions. NOTE:
The term [smart system] that appears on this screen
Registering the Smart ECM is synonymous with the term [keyless access with
You can get smart-related ECM registered in the push button start system] used in this text.
keyless access with push button start system.
5. Input the teaching operation code, and then click
1. Start the PC application according to section the [OK] button.
"Starting Up the System" and display the Main
Menu screen.
2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Immobilizer] and then press the Enter key
or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00911

SMU-00663 NOTE:
When you wish to return to the Main Menu screen,
click the [QUIT] button.

133
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

6. The registration mode selection dialog box ap-

pears. Click the [Smart ECM Registration] button.

SMU-00914

9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated.

SMU-00924

7. On the registration mode confirmation dialog box

that appears, click the [OK] button.

SMU-00915

10.Wait until the smart ECM is then being regis-

tered.
SMU-00925

8. Input the security ID and then click the [OK] but-

ton.

SMU-00926

134
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

11.The dialog box to confirm already registered mo-

bile keys (access keys) appears. Hold one of
those mobile keys (access keys) over the push
engine switch (push-button ignition switch).
After the buzzer sounds once, move the mobile
key (AccessKey) away from the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch) and go to the
next step.

SMU-00928

13.After confirming that the keyless access with

push button start system operates normally, quit
the registration operation.

Registering the Engine ECM

You can get engine ECM registered in the keyless
SMU-00927
access with push button start system.
1. Start the PC application according to section
NOTE: "Starting Up the System" and display the Main
• When holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up to Menu screen.
the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch), bring the mobile key (AccessKey) close 2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
to the push engine switch (push-button ignition select [Immobilizer] and then press the Enter key
switch) as shown below. or left-click with the mouse.
1) Let the mechanical key insertion opening of
the mobile key (AccessKey) face down.
2) Hold the Subaru ornament side to the push en-
gine switch (push-button ignition switch) side.
3) Bring it close until it touches the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch).
• The procedure to hold a mobile key (access key)
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) has to be done within 30 seconds after
the screen above appears.
12.Smart ECM registration is then automatically ex- SMU-00663

ecuted. When the registration ends normally, the

following screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

135
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

3. Click the [YES] button if the system selection 6. The registration mode selection dialog box ap-
screen is displayed. pears. Click the [Engine ECM Registration] but-
ton.

SMU-00946

NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
access with push button start system. Click the
[YES] button. SMU-00929

7. On the registration mode confirmation dialog box

that appears, click the [OK] button.

SMU-00910

NOTE:
The term [smart system] that appears on this screen
is synonymous with the term [keyless access with
push button start system] used in this text.
5. Input the teaching operation code, and then click
the [OK] button.

SMU-00930

SMU-00911

NOTE:
When you wish to return to the Main Menu screen,
click the [QUIT] button.

136
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

8. Input the security ID and then click the [OK] but- 11.The screen shown below will appear if registra-
ton. tion ends normally. Click the [OK] button.

SMU-00914 SMU-00932

9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated. 12.After the screen shown below appears, wait until
the Main Menu screen shows up again.

SMU-00915
SMU-00933
10.Wait until the engine ECM is then being regis-
tered. 13.After confirming that the keyless access with
push button start system operates normally, quit
the registration operation.

SMU-00931

137
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

Readout the Number of Mobile Key NOTE:

(Access Key) Registration The term [smart system] that appears on this screen
is synonymous with the term [keyless access with
The number of mobile keys (access keys) currently
push button start system] used in this text.
registered on the vehicle can be read.
1. Start the PC application according to section 5. Input the teaching operation code, and then click
"Starting Up the System" and display the Main the [OK] button.
Menu screen.
2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Immobilizer] and then press the Enter key
or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00911

SMU-00663 NOTE:
3. Click the [YES] button if the system selection When you wish to return to the Main Menu screen,
click the [QUIT] button.
screen is displayed.
6. The registration mode selection dialog box ap-
pears. Click the [Readout the number of mobile
key registration] button.

SMU-00946

NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
access with push button start system. Click the
[YES] button.

SMU-00934

SMU-00910

138
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

7. The confirmation dialog box to carry out the reg- 1. Start the PC application according to section
istered mobile key (access key) number reading "Starting Up the System" and display the Main
mode is shown. Click the [OK] button. Menu screen.
2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Immobilizer] and then press the Enter key
or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00935 SMU-00663

8. The number of mobile keys (access keys) cur- 3. Click the [YES] button if the system selection
rently registered will be displayed. After clicking screen is displayed.
the [OK] button, the screen will return to the main
menu.

SMU-00946

NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
access with push button start system. Click the
[YES] button.
SMU-00936

Delete the Mobile Key (Access

Key) ID
Unnecessary mobile key (access key) ID registered
on the keyless access with push button start system
SMU-00910
can be deleted. In this procedure, the necessary ID
will not be deleted. NOTE:
The term [smart system] that appears on this screen
NOTE:
is synonymous with the term [keyless access with
You cannot delete all of mobile key (access key) ID
push button start system] used in this text.
by this function. The ID of a mobile key (access key)
placed over the push engine switch (push-button ig-
nition switch) will not be deleted.

139
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

5. Input the teaching operation code, and then click

the [OK] button.

SMU-00938

8. Input the security ID and then click the [OK] but-

SMU-00911
ton.
NOTE:
When you wish to return to the Main Menu screen,
click the [QUIT] button.
6. The registration mode selection dialog box ap-
pears. Click the [Delete the mobile key ID] button.

SMU-00914

9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated.

SMU-00937

7. The confirmation dialog box to carry out the mo-

bile key (access key) ID deletion mode appears.
Click the [OK] button.

SMU-00915

140
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

10.Please wait for deleting registered mobile key to the push engine switch (push-button ignition
(access key) ID. switch) as shown below.
1) Let the mechanical key insertion opening of
the mobile key (AccessKey) face down.
2) Hold the Subaru ornament side to the push en-
gine switch (push-button ignition switch) side.
3) Bring it close until it touches the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch).
• The procedure to hold a mobile key (access key)
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) has to be done within 30 seconds after
the screen above appears.
12.The screen shown below will appear if mobile
key (access key) ID deletion ends normally. Click
the [OK] button.
SMU-00939

11.As the number of registered mobile keys (access

keys) confirmation screen will be displayed, place
one of the registered mobile keys (access keys),
the key, which you do not want to delete the ID,
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch).
After the buzzer sounds once, move the mobile
key (AccessKey) away from the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch) and go to the
next step.

SMU-00941

13.Complete this procedure after confirming if the

keyless access with push button start system
works properly by using a mobile key (access
key), which has the ID not deleted.

Registering the Remote Control

Engine Starter
You can get remote control engine starter regis-
tered in the keyless access with push button start
system.
SMU-00940
NOTE:
NOTE: Remote control engine starter is the specification
• The ID of a mobile key (access key) placed over only for the Japan.
the push engine switch (push-button ignition
1. Start the PC application according to section
switch) will only be left.
"Starting Up the System" and display the Main
• When holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up to
Menu screen.
the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch), bring the mobile key (AccessKey) close

141
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,

select [Immobilizer] and then press the Enter key
or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00663 SMU-00911

3. Click the [YES] button if the system selection NOTE:

screen is displayed. When you wish to return to the Main Menu screen,
click the [QUIT] button.
6. The registration mode selection dialog box ap-
pears. Click the [Remote Control Engine Starter
Registration] button.

SMU-00946

NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
access with push button start system. Click the
[YES] button.

SMU-00942

SMU-00910

NOTE:
The term [smart system] that appears on this screen
is synonymous with the term [keyless access with
push button start system] used in this text.
5. Input the teaching operation code, and then click
the [OK] button.

142
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

7. On the registration mode confirmation dialog box

that appears, click the [OK] button.

SMU-00915

10.Wait until the remote control engine starter is

SMU-00943
then being registered.
8. Input the security ID and then click the [OK] but-
ton.

SMU-00944

SMU-00914

9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated.

143
 Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)

11.The screen shown below will appear if remote

control engine starter registration ends normally.
Click the [OK] button.

SMU-00945

12.After confirming that the keyless access with

push button start system and remote control en-
gine starter operate normally, quit the registration
operation.

144
 Keyless access with push button start system: Correspondence table at the time of parts
failure
IMPORTANT:
Parts to be replaced always shall be replaced by new parts, never by used parts.
Explanation of the SSM III registration mode

Items to be
Mode name Contents Items to be prepared 2 Remarks
prepared 1

Registering the Smart Immobilizer To be performed at the time of additional registration of a mobile key (AccessKey) or at the time Security ID One registered mobile key (Ac- At the time of collation ECM replacement, all mobile keys (AccessKey) reg-
of replacement of the collation ECM. (Up to seven mobile keys (AccessKey) can be registered.) cessKey) istered for the vehicle areÅ@required.

Registering the Smart ECM To be performed when the ID code box or the steering lock ECM has been replaced. Security ID One registered mobile key (Ac-
cessKey)

Delete the mobile key ID Leave the ID of one mobile key (AccessKey) and delete all others. (One is required at the time Security ID One registered mobile key (Ac-
of mode execution.) cessKey)

Registering the Engine ECM Perform registration between engine ECM and ID code box. Security ID This mode cannot be registered unless all parts other than the engine ECM
have been registered.

Registering the Remote Control Engine When a remote control engine starter has been installed. Security ID
Starter

*Smart immobilizer registration also includes steering lock initialization work and engine ECM registration.

Parts replacement table

NOTE:
• # This mark indicates that the part is not defective, but must be replaced for theft prevention. (*1,*2)
• When registering smart immobilizer, perform registration with driver’s door kept open after closing it once and then opening. If the ignition switch is turned on 10 times in succession with driver’s door shut, the
body integrated module will enter sleep mode and it will be impossible to turn the ignition on again.
<In case one part failed/was lost>

145
Parts requiring replacement or securement in case of failure of the
Failed or lost part Measures after parts replacement
parts shown left

Mobile Key (AccessKey)

Steering Steering
Examples Collation ID Code Engine Mobile Key Collation ID Code Engine
All Lock Lock Treatment procedure 1 Treatment procedure 2 Treatment procedure 3 Treatment procedure 4 Treatment procedure 5
functioning ECM Box ECM (Access Key) ECM Box ECM
failed/ ECM ECM
normally
lost
exists

Execution of smart
Deletion of the mobile key
immobilizer registration
One registered mobile (AccessKey) ID (deletion
O (when a mobile key
key (AccessKey) of the ID of a failed or lost
(AccessKey) is to be
mobile key (AccessKey) )
added)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O # # (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration (*1)

All registered mobile Execution of smart immo-

O O (*4)
keys (AccessKey) bilizer registration

One registered mobile Execution of smart ECM Steering lock initialization

O O
key (AccessKey) registration work (*3)

One registered mobile Execution of smart ECM Execution of engine ECM

O O
key (AccessKey) registration registration

Execution of engine ECM

O O
registration

*1. When all mobile keys (AccessKey) have failed or been lost, collation ECM and ID code box must be replaced by new ones and smart immobilizer registration must be performed.
*2. When the collation ECM has been replaced and all registered mobile keys (AccessKey) are not available, the ID code box must be replaced by a new one and smart immobilizer registration must be performed.
*3.Steering lock initialization work: Initialization is complete if the steering is locked about 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off and driver’s door was either opened then closed or closed then opened.
*4. When the collation ECM has been replaced for a vehicle equipped with a remote control engine starter, perform registration of the remote control engine starter.
Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)
 <In case two parts failed/were last>

Parts requiring replacement or securement in case of failure of the

Failed or lost part Measures after parts replacement
parts shown left

Mobile Key (AccessKey)

Steering Steering
Examples Collation ID Code Engine Mobile Key Collation ID Code Engine
All Lock Lock Treatment procedure 1 Treatment procedure 2 Treatment procedure 3 Treatment procedure 4 Treatment procedure 5
functioning ECM Box ECM (Access key) ECM Box ECM
failed/ ECM ECM
normally
lost
exists

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

o o o # (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration (*2)

Deletion of the mobile key Execution of smart immo-

One registered mobile Execution of smart ECM Steering lock initialization (AccessKey) ID (deletion bilizer registration (when a
o o o
key (AccessKey) registration work (*3) of the ID of a failed or lost mobile key (AccessKey) is
mobile key (AccessKey) ) to be added)

Deletion of the mobile key Execution of smart immo-

One registered mobile Execution of smart ECM Execution of engine ECM (AccessKey) ID (deletion bilizer registration (when a
o o o
key (AccessKey) registration registration of the ID of a failed or lost mobile key (AccessKey) is
mobile key (AccessKey) ) to be added)

Deletion of the mobile key Execution of smart immo-

One registered mobile (AccessKey) ID (deletion Execution of engine ECM bilizer registration (when a
o o o
key (AccessKey) of the ID of a failed or lost registration mobile key (AccessKey) is
mobile key (AccessKey) ) to be added)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

o o o # (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration (*1)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

o o # o # (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration (*1)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

o o # o (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration (*1)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

o o # # o (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration (*1)

All registered mobile Execution of smart immo-

o o o o (*4)
keys (AccessKey) bilizer registration

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

146
o o o o (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration

All registered mobile Execution of smart immo-

o o o o (*4)
keys (AccessKey) bilizer registration

One registered mobile Execution of smart ECM Steering lock initialization Execution of engine ECM
o o o o
key (AccessKey) registration work (*3) registration

One registered mobile Execution of smart ECM Steering lock initialization Execution of engine ECM
o o o o
key (AccessKey) registration work (*3) registration

One registered mobile Execution of smart ECM Execution of engine ECM

o o o o
key (AccessKey) registration registration

*1. When all mobile keys (AccessKey) have failed or been lost, collation ECM and ID code box must be replaced by new ones and smart immobilizer registration must be performed.
*2. When the collation ECM has been replaced and all registered mobile keys (AccessKey) are not available, the ID code box must be replaced by a new one and smart immobilizer registration must be performed.
*3.Steering lock initialization work: Initialization is complete if the steering is locked about 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off and driver’s door was either opened then closed or closed then opened.
*4. When the collation ECM has been replaced for a vehicle equipped with a remote control engine starter, perform registration of the remote control engine starter.
Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)
 <In case there are three parts that failed/lost>

Parts requiring replacement or securement in case of failure of the

Failed or lost part Measures after parts replacement
parts shown left

Mobile Key (AccessKey)

Steering Steering
Examples Collation ID Code Engine Mobile Key (Access Collation ID Code Engine
All Lock Lock Treatment procedure 1 Treatment procedure 2 Treatment procedure 3 Treatment procedure 4 Treatment procedure 5
functioning ECM Box ECM key) ECM Box ECM
failed/ ECM ECM
normally
lost
exists

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O O O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration (*2)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O O O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O O O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration (*2)

One registered mobile Deletion of the mobile key Execution of smart immo-
key (AccessKey) Execution of smart ECM Steering lock initialization Execution of smart ECM (AccessKey) ID (deletion bilizer registration (when a
O O O O O
registration work (*3) registration of the ID of a failed or lost mobile key (AccessKey) is
mobile key (AccessKey) ) to be added)

One registered mobile Deletion of the mobile key Execution of smart immo-
key (AccessKey) Execution of smart ECM Steering lock initialization Execution of smart ECM (AccessKey) ID (deletion bilizer registration (when a
O O O O O
registration work (*3) registration of the ID of a failed or lost mobile key (AccessKey) is
mobile key (AccessKey) ) to be added)

One registered mobile Deletion of the mobile key Execution of smart immo-
key (AccessKey) Execution of smart ECM Execution of engine ECM (AccessKey) ID (deletion bilizer registration (when a
O O O O O
registration registration of the ID of a failed or lost mobile key (AccessKey) is
mobile key (AccessKey) ) to be added)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O O O # (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration(*1)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O O O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O O # O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration(*1)

147
All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-
O O O # O O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration(*1)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O # O # O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration(*1)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O # O O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration(*1)

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O O O O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration

All registered mobile Execution of smart immo-

O O O O O O (*4)
keys (AccessKey) bilizer registration

All mobile keys (Access- Execution of smart immo-

O O O O O O (*4)
Key) to be registered bilizer registration

One registered mobile Execution of smart ECM Steering lock initialization Execution of engine ECM
O O O O O O
key (AccessKey) registration work (*3) registration

*1. When all mobile keys (AccessKey) have failed or been lost, collation ECM and ID code box must be replaced by new ones and smart immobilizer registration must be performed.
*2. When the collation ECM has been replaced and all registered mobile keys (AccessKey) are not available, the ID code box must be replaced by a new one and smart immobilizer registration must be performed.
*3.Steering lock initialization work: Initialization is complete if the steering is locked about 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off and driver’s door was either opened then closed or closed then opened.
*4. When the collation ECM has been replaced for a vehicle equipped with a remote control engine starter, perform registration of the remote control engine starter.
Registering the Immobilizer (Equipped with the Keyless Access with Push Button Start System)
 Registering the Audio Security (U.K Only)

Registering the Audio Security

(U.K Only)
*Please note that this procedure document is in
English only, because audio security function is for
United Kingdom only.

You can perform serial registry of audio and naviga-

tion system with audio security function.
NOTE:
When audio or navigation system screen displays SMU-00663
message shown below, it is necessary to perform
3. Click the [NO] button if the system selection
audio security registering.
screen is displayed.
<Audio>

SMU-01097
SMU-01095
4. Click [YES] after confirming if the ignition switch
<Navigation System> is ON, as following screen will be displayed.

SMU-00909

SMU-01096 5. In response to the compliance verification dialog

box that appears, click the [OK] button.
1. Start the PC application according to section
"Starting Up the System" and display the Main
Menu screen.
2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Immobilizer] and then press the Enter key
or left-click with the mouse.
SMU-00876

148
 Registering the Audio Security (U.K Only)

6. Input the teaching operation code, and then click

the [OK] button.

SMU-01099

NOTE:
SMU-00911
While registering is underway, audio or navigation
7. On the registration mode confirmation dialog box system screen displays [REENTRY] message.
that appears, click the [OK] button. 9. The screen shown below will appear if registra-
tion ends normally. Click the [OK] button.

SMU-01098

SMU-01100
8. Please stand by while the audio or navigation
system registering is underway. NOTE:
When registering is completed, audio or navigation
system screen displays [COMPLETE] message.

149
 Registering the Audio Security (U.K Only)

10.Please stand by while the screen displays mes-

sage shown below, until screen returns to code
entry mode for teaching operation.

SMU-01101

11.After confirming that the audio and navigation

system is operating normally, quit the registration
operation.

150
 Learning and inspection mode related to AT

Learning and inspection mode

related to AT
Performing air bleeding and learning possible after
replacing automatic transmission ASSY, ATF and
TCM.
IMPORTANT:
The required learning or work according to the per-
formed work is shown in the following list.
The learning or work in the following list must be
performed, as otherwise shifting shocks and other SMU-00113
defects may be caused.
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
Required learning or 4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
Work item
work 5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
TCM replacement • AT learning start up the application.
ATF replacement • AT air bleeding 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Replacement or disassem- • AT learning Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
bly of the transmission • AT air bleeding
ASSY
Control valve body replace- • AT learning
ment • AT air bleeding
Execution of [Clear Memory • AT learning
2]

NOTE:
Depending on vehicle specification, AT air bleeding
may not be necessary. In such case, [AT air bleed-
ing mode] will not be displayed on the menu. SMU-00600

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

151
 Learning and inspection mode related to AT

7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Transmis- AT learning mode

sion Control System] and then press the Enter After completing this procedure, make sure to con-
key or left click with the mouse. firm if there is no malfunction, such as a shifting
shock, by actually driving the car. If you find any
malfunctions, execute the learning procedure
again.
In case that malfunctions are not solved after per-
forming the learning process again, check if there
are any problems with other parts.
IMPORTANT:
Always perform [AT learning Mode] at the time of
TCM replacement and transmission ASSY replace-
ment or disassembly.
1. Select [AT learning Mode] from the item selection
screen and press the [Enter] key or click the left
mouse button.

SMU-01043

8. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.
SMU-01046

2. Following the instructions that appear on the

screen, setup each switch and mode.
Click the [OK] button to go to the next screen.

SMU-01044

9. This displays the dialog box shown below. Select

[AT related learning_inspecting mode] and then
press the Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-01122

NOTE:
If following message is shown, warm up the engine
until ATF temperature becomes 60 to 80°C(140 to
176°F), or cool it down, according to the instructions
appeared on the screen. Once the ATF temperature
reaches 60 to 80 degC, the next procedure is exe-
cuted automatically.
SMU-01045
To cancel learning, click the [Cancel] button.

152
 Learning and inspection mode related to AT

SMU-01080

6. Follow the screen instructions and depress the

brake pedal all the way.

SMU-01123

NOTE:
Stop the engine when ATF is to be cooled down.
3. Lift up the vehicle following the screen instruc-
tions and pull the parking brake. SMU-01082
Click the [OK] button to go to the next screen.
NOTE:
Afterwards, leave the brake pedal depressed until
step 8.
7. Follow the screen instructions and set the select
lever to range D.

SMU-01078

IMPORTANT:
• When performing learning control, be sure to
keep the lower edge of the tires 30 cm (11.8 in) or
more above the ground as vehicle vibrates during
the work. SMU-01124
• When performing the transfer clutch learning, ful-
8. The following screen is displayed. Please wait.
ly apply the parking brake to avoid tires from ro-
tating.
• Move the Select lever to P range.
4. Follow the screen instructions and switch off the
ignition switch.

SMU-01084

NOTE:
• During the learning process, if above screen is
being shown for more than two minutes, release
the brake pedal and execute the learning proce-
SMU-01079
dure again.
5. Follow the screen instructions and start the en- • During the learning process, there are cases that
gine. hunting of the engine may occur and accordingly
learning may end abnormally. In such cases, ex-
ecute the learning procedure again with the head-
lights in the High beam condition.

153
 Learning and inspection mode related to AT

9. Follow the screen instructions and release the 14.The following screen is displayed. Please wait.
brake pedal.

SMU-01087
SMU-01085
15.Follow the screen instructions and set the select
10.The following screen is displayed. Please wait. lever to range N.

SMU-01086 SMU-01089

11.Follow the screen instructions and depress the 16.Follow the screen instructions and switch off the
brake pedal all the way. ignition switch.

SMU-01082 SMU-01079

NOTE: 17.The following screen is displayed. Please wait.

Afterwards, leave the brake pedal depressed until
step 19.
12.The following screen is displayed. Please wait.

SMU-01091

SMU-01087 18.Follow the screen instructions and start the en-

13.Follow the screen instructions and set the select gine.
lever to range R.

SMU-01080

SMU-01088

154
 Learning and inspection mode related to AT

19.The following screen is displayed when learning

has been completed correctly. Click the [OK] but- Detection of diagnostic
Remedies
ton. code(s)
• A diagnostic code After correcting the troubles
was detected during based on the diagnostic
the AT learning proc- codes, perform the [AT
ess. learning mode] again from
the beginning.
• Un-instructed opera- Execute the [AT learning
SMU-01092 tions were taken dur- mode] again from the be-
ing the AT learning ginning.
NOTE: process.
• The following screen may be displayed during the • Depressing the brake
work. In that case, confirm the display contents pedal is not enough
and then click the [OK] button. • Pulling the parking
brake lever is not
enough
• Abnormal Idle Up

• Depending on vehicle specification, some of

these displays may not appear at all. In such
SMU-01081 case, please follow the directions actually shown
on the screen.
Of the contents shown above, their main causes
and remedies are shown in the following chart. AT air bleeding mode
IMPORTANT:
Main causes of the
Remedies Always perform [AT air bleeding mode] at the time
contens shown
of control valve body, ATF replacement and trans-
• Detection of diagnos- After correcting the troubles mission ASSY replacement or disassembly.
tic codes based on the diagnostic
codes, perform the [AT NOTE:
learning mode] again from For the work procedure, refer to "AT Learning
the beginning. Mode" of the respective item and perform the work
following the screen instructions.

SMU-01093

Of the contents shown above, their main causes

and remedies are shown in the following chart.

155
 Learning, inspection, and registration mode related to diesel engines (Excluding North America)

Learning, inspection, and ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
registration mode related to PWR LED of the SDI lights.
diesel engines (Excluding
North America)
* This function is not supported in North America.

This item describes the learning functions, inspec-

tion functions, and registration functions related to
diesel engines.
IMPORTANT:
The work required for re-registration or learning
work etc. because of replaced items is shown in the
following list. SMU-00113

The work in the following list must be performed, as 3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
otherwise exhaust gas, abnormal noise, bad engine
performance, and other defects may be caused. 4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
Replacement start up the application.
Required work items
items 6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
ECM • Registering the Immobilizer select [Each System Check] and then press the
• Registering the Injector Code Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
• Fuel injector injection amount learn-
ing
• Fuel pump duty learning
• EGR valve opening angle learning
Fuel pump • Fuel pump duty learning
Injector • Registering the Injector Code
• Fuel injector injection amount learn-
ing
EGR valve • EGR valve opening angle learning

Diesel compulsory learning mode SMU-00600

Compulsory learning can be effected at the time of

replacement of fuel pump, injector, or EGR valve of
a vehicle with a diesel engine.

Getting Ready
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s

156
 Learning, inspection, and registration mode related to diesel engines (Excluding North America)

7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine Fuel pump duty learning
Control System] and then press the Enter key or
left click with the mouse. IMPORTANT:
At the time of fuel pump and ECM replacement, [Fu-
el pump duty learning] must be performed.
NOTE:
Perform the work with the engine started.
1. Select [Fuel pump duty learning] from the item
selection screen and press the [Enter] key or click
the left mouse button.

SMU-01049

2. When the dialog box shown below appears, click

SMU-00665
the [OK] button.
8. This displays a compliance verification message
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-01050

NOTE:
When the following screen is displayed, start the en-
SMU-01047
gine and click the [OK] button.
9. This displays the dialog box shown below. Select
[Compulsory learning mode] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-01051

SMU-01048

157
 Learning, inspection, and registration mode related to diesel engines (Excluding North America)

3. When the dialog box shown below appears, click Fuel injector injection amount learning
the [OK] button.
IMPORTANT:
At the time of injector and ECM replacement, al-
ways execute [Fuel injector injection amount learn-
ing] and [Registering the Injector Code].
NOTE:
• Refer to [Fuel pump duty learning] of this item for
SMU-01052 the work procedure and perform the work follow-
ing the screen instructions.
4. The learning execution screen is displayed.
• Perform the work with the engine started.
Please wait.
EGR valve opening angle learning
IMPORTANT:
At the time of EGR valve and ECM replacement,
[EGR valve opening angle learning] must be per-
formed.
NOTE:
• Refer to [Fuel pump duty learning] of this item for
the work procedure and perform the work follow-
ing the screen instructions.
• Perform the work with the engine started.

Registering the Injector Code

It is possible to register display, read, and save the
injector code for vehicles with a diesel engine.
SMU-01053
Getting Ready
5. The learning completion screen is displayed.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
Click the [OK] button.
and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.

SMU-01054

158
 Learning, inspection, and registration mode related to diesel engines (Excluding North America)

NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00665

8. This displays a compliance verification message

SMU-00113
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC. button.
4. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.
6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Each System Check] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse. SMU-01047

9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [In-

jector Code Registration Mode] and then press
the Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00600

7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine

Control System] and then press the Enter key or
left click with the mouse.

SMU-01055

159
 Learning, inspection, and registration mode related to diesel engines (Excluding North America)

Injector or Engine Replacement

IMPORTANT:
At the time of injector or engine replacement, [Injec-
tor or Engine Replacement] must be executed.
1. Select [Injector or Engine Replacement] from the
item selection screen and press the [Enter] key or
click the left mouse button.

SMU-01059

5. The injector code input screen is displayed. Enter

the injector code and click the [OK] button.
SMU-01056

2. This displays the dialog box shown below. Select

[Injector Code New Registration (SSM to ECM)]
and then press the Enter key or left-click with the
mouse.

SMU-01057

3. As instructed by the display message, turn on the

vehicle’s ignition switch (make sure that the en-
gine is currently not running). SMU-01060
Click the [OK] button to go to the next screen.
NOTE:
• Enter four digits into each input column (two digits
only for the input column at the right bottom) for a
total of 30 digits.
• The injector code is listed on the top of the injec-
tor.
SMU-01058

4. Select the injector for which setting is to be per-

formed from the displayed selection screen and
click the [OK] button.

SMU-01061

160
 Learning, inspection, and registration mode related to diesel engines (Excluding North America)

6. The screen for confirmation of the injector code At the time of ECM replacement
registration contents is displayed. Confirm the
registration contents and click the [OK] button. IMPORTANT:
At the time of ECM replacement, [Read Injector
Code (ECM to SSM)] and [Register the reading
code (SSM to ECM)] must be executed.
Read Injector Code
The presently registered injector code can be read
in and can be saved.
1. Select [ECM Replacement] from the selection
screen and press the [Enter] key or click the left
mouse button.

SMU-01062

7. When registration has been completed normally, SMU-01065

the registration completion screen is displayed.
To continue registration, click the [OK] button and 2. This displays the dialog box shown below. Select
perform the registration work of steps 4 to 6 [Read Injector Code (ECM to SSM)] and then
again. press the Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
To end registration, click [Cancel] and go to step
8.

SMU-01066

3. As instructed by the display message, turn on the

vehicle’s ignition switch (make sure that the en-
gine is currently not running).
Click the [OK] button to go to the next screen.

SMU-01063

8. When the dialog box shown below appears, click

the [OK] button.

SMU-01058

SMU-01064

161
 Learning, inspection, and registration mode related to diesel engines (Excluding North America)

4. The screen for confirmation of injector code read-

ing is displayed. Click the [OK] button.

SMU-01067

5. The injector code is displayed. Confirm the con-

tents to be saved and click the [OK] button.

SMU-01069

7. The following dialog box is displayed. Confirm the

screen instructions and click the [OK] button.

SMU-01070

Register the reading code

The saved injector code can be registered.
1. Select [ECM Replacement] from the item selec-
SMU-01068
tion screen and press the [Enter] key or click the
6. This causes the sampled data save dialog box to left mouse button.
appear. The name of the data file being saved is
generated automatically in accordance with the
current time and date. If you want to use the gen-
erated file name as-is, click the dialog box [Save]
button. If you want to change to a different file
name, type in the name you want.

SMU-01065

162
 Learning, inspection, and registration mode related to diesel engines (Excluding North America)

2. This displays the dialog box shown below. Select

[Register the reading code (SSM to ECM)] and
then press the Enter key or left-click with the
mouse.

SMU-01071

3. The dialog box with a list of saved data files is dis-

played.
After selecting “Files of type”, designate the file
you need, and press the Enter key or click the
[Open] button. SMU-01073

5. The screen shown below will appear if registra-

tion ends normally.Click the [OK] button.

SMU-01074
SMU-01072
Displaying the Injector Code
4. The injector code is displayed. Confirm the con- The presently registered injector code can be con-
tents to be registered and click the [OK] button. firmed.
1. Select [Injector Code Display] from the item se-
lections screen and press the [Enter] key or click
the left mouse button.

SMU-01075

163
 Learning, inspection, and registration mode related to diesel engines (Excluding North America)

2. As instructed by the display message, turn on the

vehicle’s ignition switch (make sure that the en-
gine is currently not running).
Click the [OK] button to go to the next screen.

SMU-01058

3. When the dialog box shown below appears, click

the [OK] button.

SMU-01090

4. The injector code is displayed. Confirm the con-

tents to be registered and click the [OK] button.

SMU-01102

164
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

Driving Recorder (SDR) 2. Insert the CF card into the CF1 card slot of the
SDI.
In cases when the trouble that is difficult to be repro-
duced is occurring, the driving recorder can be used 3. Connect the main connector of the diagnosis ca-
to sample vehicle data continuously and to save da- ble to the diagnosis communication connector of
ta. Pressing the trigger switch will save data starting the SDI.
from the point 10 minutes before the switch is 4. Connect the vehicle connector of the diagnosis
pressed, up to the point five seconds after the cable to the vehicle’s data link connector, and
switch is pressed. Saved data can be displayed for confirm that the PWR LED of the SDI lights.
analysis.
The following are the steps for sampling and analys- NOTE:
ing data. SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
1) Create a special SDR setting file. nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
2) Sample the vehicle data. LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
3) Save the sampled data. ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
4) Open and analyse the saved data. the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.
IMPORTANT:
When the driving recorder function is used for
measuring, driving is done with the diagnosis cable
connected to the data link connector, and care is re-
quired so that there is no obstacle for driving. Also,
the safety considerations for driving and measuring
the car with attached cable must be explained suffi-
ciently to the customer, and measuring shall be
done after approval by the customer.
NOTE:
• A CF card with the CF application installed is re- SMU-00113
quired in order to sample data using the driving
recorder. Prepare a CF card before starting a 5. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
driving recorder operation. 6. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
• Be sure to turn off SDI power before installing a
CF card into or removing a CF card from its card 7. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
slot. Inserting or removing a CF card while SDI start up the application.
power is turned on runs the risk of damaging CF 8. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
card contents. select [Each System Check] and then press the
• When using this function, always take measure- Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
ments after you have created a setting file for the
desired vehicle model. Measurement is not pos-
sible if the setting file stored in the CF card is for
another vehicle model.

Creating an SDR Setting File

Use the following procedure to create a setting file
which selected the items to be sampled on the CF
card.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, the USB cable,
a PC with the PC application installed, and a CF SMU-00600
card with the CF application installed.

165
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

9. On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine 12.On the Driving recorder menu, select {Mode Set-
Control System] and then press the Enter key or tings/Mode Transfer} and then press the Enter
left-click with the mouse. key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00477

13.This displays a measurement item selection

screen.
Boxes of recommended items for sampling are
checked as initial settings in the screen. If you
wish to add or delete some items, manipulate the
boxes of applicable items. After configuring all of
the settings, click the [Selection Completed] but-
SMU-00474 ton.
10.This displays a compliance verification message
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00475

11.From the list of fault diagnosis items, select

[Driving recorder] and then press the Enter key or
SMU-00478
left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00609

166
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

NOTE: NOTE:
If the message dialog box shown below appears If any message other than the one shown above ap-
while you are selecting data items, it means that the pears, perform the operation as instructed by the
limit on the number of selectable data items has message to create the setting file.
been reached. Selection of further data items is not
possible after this message appears. To select oth- Saving SDR Data to CF Card
er items, deselect the check boxes next to the cur- SDR data can be saved to the CF card by pressing
rently selected (checked) items, and then select the the [TRG] key while sampling is being performed or
new items. by pressing the trigger switch of the optional remote
box.
NOTE:
• Be sure to turn off SDI power before installing a
CF card into or removing a CF card from its card
slot. Inserting or removing a CF card while SDI
power is turned on runs the risk of damaging CF
card contents.
• Pressing the [TRG] key will save data starting
SMU-00154 from the point 10 minutes before the key is
14.After clicking the [Selection Completed] button, pressed, up to the point five seconds after the key
click the [Transfer] button. is pressed.
1. Insert the CF card that contains the SDR setting
file into the CF1 card slot of the SDI.
2. Connect the main connector of the diagnosis ca-
ble to the diagnosis communication connector of
the SDI.
3. Connect the vehicle connector of the diagnosis
cable to the vehicle’s data link connector, and
confirm that the PWR LED of the SDI lights.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
SMU-00479 ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
15.The message shown below will appear after the PWR LED of the SDI lights.
SDR setting file is created on the CF card in the
SDI.

SMU-00480

SMU-00113

167
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

4. After the SDI is turned on, sampling will start au- Saving SDR Data to PC
tomatically and the screen shown below will ap- Save SDR data stored in a CF card to hard disk of
pear on the SDI. your PC.
SDR data can be read from a CF card in the card
slot of the SDI or in the card slot of a PC.
NOTE:
Be sure to turn off SDI power before installing a CF
card into or removing a CF card from its card slot.
SMU-00548 Inserting or removing a CF card while SDI power is
turned on runs the risk of damaging CF card con-
NOTE: tents.
In case that the SDI operates as a driving recorder,
“SDR mode” is shown on the screen. To read data from the CF card slot of the
5. When sampling reaches the point you want to SDI
save, hold down the SDI [TRG] key or the trigger 1. Insert the CF card that contains the SDR data into
switch of the remote box for at least one second. the CF1 card slot of the SDI.
Pressing the [TRG] key or the trigger switch caus- 2. Connect the main connector of the diagnosis ca-
es SDR data to be saved on the CF card. The ble to the diagnosis communication connector of
message shown below appears on the SDI dis- the SDI.
play when SDR data is saved on the CF card. 3. Connect the vehicle connector of the diagnosis
cable to the vehicle’s data link connector, and
confirm that the PWR LED of the SDI lights.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
SMU-00549 LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
6. Sample restarts automatically after the SDR data the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
is saved to the CF card. PWR LED of the SDI lights.
If you want to stop sampling, disconnect the diag-
nosis cable from the vehicle’s data link connector,
or hold down both the [MENU] key and the
[DOWN] key of the SDI for at least two seconds
in order to turn off the SDI.
NOTE:
To sample engine start data without Remote Box,
turn the ignition switch to the ON position and keep
it for a while (The engine is turned off at this mo-
ment). When the message “Sampling” appears on
the SDI display, start the engine to sample the data. SMU-00113

4. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

5. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
6. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.

168
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

7. On the Main Menu that appears on the display, NOTE:

select [Convert/Save measurement data on driv- • Sample data files are saved in the Data folder
ing recorder] and then press the Enter key or left- where the PC application is installed. To change
click with the mouse. to another storage location, specify the location
you want in the Save in box of the save data dia-
log box.
• The Comment box of the Save As dialog box can
be used to save general comments associated
with the data or file.
10.This causes the message shown below to ap-
pear.
To continue using the current setting file for sam-
pling, click the [Yes] button.
To delete the current setting file and stop sam-
SMU-00610
pling, click the [No] button.
8. On the Convert/Save measurement data on driv-
ing recorder screen that appears, select {Read
SDR data from CF card inside SDI.} and then
press the [Enter] key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00486

To read data from a card slot of the PC

NOTE:
SMU-00485
You will need to purchase a PC card adapter if your
9. This causes the sampled data save dialog box to PC does not have built-in CF card slot.
appear. The name of the data file being saved is
generated automatically in accordance with the 1. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
current time and date. If you want to use the gen- start up the application.
erated file name as-is, click the dialog box [Save] 2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
button. If you want to change to a different file select [Convert/Save measurement data on driv-
name, type in the name you want. ing recorder] and then press the Enter key or left-
click with the mouse.

SMU-00610

SMU-00700

169
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

3. On the Convert/Save measurement data on driv- 7. This causes the sampled data save dialog box to
ing recorder screen that appears, select {Read appear. The name of the data file being saved is
SDR data from CF card inside computer.} and generated automatically in accordance with the
then press the [Enter] key or left-click with the current time and date. If you want to use the gen-
mouse. erated file name as-is, click the dialog box [Save]
button. If you want to change to a different file
name, type in the name you want.

SMU-00490

4. Insert the CF card that contains the SDR sample

data into the card slot of the PC. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00491
SMU-00700
5. When the dialog box shown below appears, click
the [OK] button. NOTE:
• Sample data files are saved in the Data folder
where the PC application is installed. To change
to another storage location, specify the location
you want in the Save in box of the save data dia-
log box.
• The Comment box of the Save As dialog box can
SMU-00492 be used to save general comments associated
with the data or file.
6. Select the drive where the CF card is located, and
then click the [OK] button. 8. This causes the message shown below to ap-
pear.
To continue using the current setting file for sam-
pling, click the [Yes] button.
To delete the current setting file and stop sam-
pling, click the [No] button.

SMU-00493
SMU-00486

170
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

Opening and analyzing saved data This recalls the data in the file and displays it on
the Digital Data Screen.
1. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
start up the application.
2. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Saved Data Display] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00596

SMU-00602 NOTE:
The operations for this screen are identical to those
3. This displays a dialog box with a list of saved files. described under “Saved Data Display”. See “Saved
After selecting “Driving recorder sampling data Data Display” for more information.
(*.sdr)” for “Files of type”, select the file you want,
and then press the [Enter] key or click the [Open] Trigger Function
button. It is possible to set a trigger in advance for a sam-
pling item, to detect the trigger automatically, and to
save the sampling data automatically.
Trigger setup is performed at the time of creation of
a setup file for a selected sampling item.
There is a trigger setting method: “Trigger of input
data”, where a trigger is set in advance to a sam-
pling item for ECM data.

SMU-00701

171
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

1. Display the sampling item selection screen, and 3. Specify the trigger source.
click the “Trigger” button after item selection. In the list, select the checkbox next to the item
whose setting you want to change, or double-
click the item.

SMU-00899
SMU-00897
4. This displays the Setup trigger of input data
2. The Setup Trigger screen is displayed. Select the screen. Configure the settings and then click the
“Trigger of input data” and click the [Next] button. [OK] button.

When a sampling item is not switch input

SMU-00898

SMU-00900

1) Level
This specifies the trigger level, the value that de-
tects triggers. You can input a value directly into
the box or you can use its up and down arrows to
change the setting. The setting value is limited to
values that can actually be obtained. If you type
in a value that cannot be obtained, the software
will automatically change it to the nearest allowa-
ble value.

172
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

2) Slope condition 3) Combinations

This setting specifies the condition for trigger de- When there are multiple triggers, these settings
tection when the sample data values reach the can be used to configure Combinations.
trigger level. When [Both] is selected, a trigger is
detected when either a Upward or Downward NOTE:
condition is first satisfied. If you set the trigger on multiple items, unify the se-
lection in either “OR” or “AND”.
3) Combinations
When there are multiple triggers, these settings 5. Checkboxes of the channels to which you set trig-
can be used to configure combinations. gers are checked.
If you want to configure multiple triggers, repeat
NOTE: steps 3 and 4.
If you set the trigger on multiple items, unify the se-
After configuring all of the triggers you want, click
lection in either “OR” or “AND”.
the [Exit] button.
When a sampling item is switch input

SMU-00902
SMU-00901

1) Level
This specifies the trigger level, the value that de-
tects triggers. The setting is configured by button
operation. This setting cannot be selected for cer-
tain sampling items.
2) Slope condition
This setting specifies the data condition for trigger
detection when the sample data values reach the
trigger level.
Selecting [Upward] detects a trigger at the
OFF→ON point.
Selecting [Downward] detects a trigger at the
ON→OFF point.
Selecting [Both] detects a trigger at either the
OFF→ON point or the ON→OFF point, whichev-
er occurs first.

173
 Driving Recorder (SDR)

NOTE: 7. The message shown below will appear after the

• To change a trigger setting, select the desired SDR setting file is created on the CF card in the
item and then click the [Edit] button to display the SDI.
Setup trigger of input data screen.
• To exclude the setting of an item that is currently
configured for a trigger, clear the check box of the
applicable item.
• If the message dialog box shown below appears
while you are configuring an item setting, it
means that the limit on the number of selectable SMU-00905
items has been reached. Selection of further data
items is not possible after this message appears. NOTE:
To select other items, uncheck the unnecessary If any message other than the one shown above ap-
checked items of sampling items (step 1) or setup pears, perform the operation as instructed by the
trigger items (step 3), and then select another message to create the setting file.
item to which you want to assign a trigger.

SMU-00903

6. Assigning an trigger to an item causes “T” to ap-

pear in item’s checkbox. After clicking the [Selec-
tion Completed] button, click the [Transfer]
button.

SMU-00904

174
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement (SDR)

ECM Analog Simultaneous 2. Insert the CF card into the CF1 card slot of the
SDI.
Measurement (SDR)
3. Connect the main connector of the diagnosis ca-
Also in driving recorder, analog data and ECM data
ble to the diagnosis communication connector of
can be sampled simultaneously using the Pulse/An-
the SDI.
alog Kit (option).
The following are the steps for sampling and analys- 4. Connect the vehicle connector of the diagnosis
ing data. cable to the vehicle's data link connector, and
confirm that the PWR LED of the SDI lights.
1) Create a special SDR setting file.
NOTE:
2) Sample the vehicle data.
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
3) Save the sampled data.
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
4) Open and analyse the saved data.
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle's
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
Basic procedure of ECM Analog Simultaneous
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
Measurement in driving recorder is the same as that
PWR LED of the SDI lights.
in driving recorder. Therefore, this section de-
scribes only “Creating a special SDR setting file”
and “Sampling the vehicle data”. For other proce-
dures, see the “Driving Recorder (SDR)”.
NOTE:
• This function cannot be used if the pulse/analog
cartridge is not installed.
• See “Analog Sampling” for handling precautions
about Pulse/Analog Kit, how to install the pulse/
analog cartridge in the SDI and how to upgrade
the SDI firmware.
SMU-00113
• A CF card with the CF application installed is re-
quired in order to sample data using this function. 5. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
Prepare a CF card before starting an operation.
• Be sure to turn off SDI power before installing a 6. Turn on the vehicle's ignition switch.
CF card into or removing a CF card from its card 7. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
slot. Inserting or removing a CF card while SDI start up the application.
power is turned on runs the risk of damaging CF 8. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
card contents. select [Each System Check] and then press the
• When using this function, always take measure- Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
ments after you have created a setting file for the
desired vehicle model. Measurement is not pos-
sible if the setting file stored in the CF card is for
another vehicle model.

Creating an SDR Setting File

Use the following procedure to create a setting file
which selected the items to be sampled on the CF
card.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, the USB cable,
a PC with the PC application installed, and a CF SMU-00600
card with the CF application installed.

175
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement (SDR)

9. On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine 12.On the Driving recorder menu, select {Mode Set-
Control System] and then press the Enter key or tings/Mode Transfer} and then press the Enter
left-click with the mouse. key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00477

13.This displays a measurement item selection

screen, click the [Analog] button.

SMU-00474

10.This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00831
SMU-00475
14.On the setup screen that appears, select “ECM
11.From the list of fault diagnosis items, select Analog Simultaneous Measurement” and click
[Driving recorder] and then press the Enter key or the [Next] button.
left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00816
SMU-00609

176
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement (SDR)

15.Select “Input Range” tab to configure the input 17.Select “Sampling Interval” tab to configure the
range of analog data. Configure the desired sampling interval of analog data. Select the de-
range. sired interval from drop-down menu.

SMU-00832 SMU-00834

NOTE: 18.After configuring the settings of all tabs, click the

For details about input range settings, see “Config- [Finish] button.
uring Analog Sampling Settings” under “Analog
Sampling”.
16.Select “Screen Range” tab to configure the
screen range of analog data. Configure the de-
sired range.

SMU-00835

NOTE:
• You can save the settings of Input Range, Screen
Range and Sampling Interval as a setup file, and
load the saved setup file. This can be performed
SMU-00833 using the same procedures as those described in
“Configuring Analog Sampling Settings” under
NOTE:
“Analog Sampling”. For this procedures, see the
For details about screen range settings, see “Con-
appropriate item.
figuring Analog Sampling Settings” under “Analog
• When loading a setup file, select the file which
Sampling”.
displays “ECM Analog Simultaneous Measure-
ment” in System field in dialog box.

177
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement (SDR)

19.This displays a measurement item selection

screen with analog sampling item. Boxes of rec-
ommended items for ECM data sampling are
checked as initial settings in the screen. If you
wish to add or delete some items, manipulate the
boxes of applicable items. Also, all analog sam-
pling items are selected. Take the check marks
off as required. After selecting the sampling
items, click the [Selection Completed] button.

SMU-00837

21.The message shown below will appear after the

SDR setting file is created on the CF card in the
SDI.

SMU-00836

NOTE: SMU-00480
If the message dialog box shown below appears
NOTE:
while you are selecting data items, it means that the
If any message other than the one shown above ap-
limit on the number of selectable ECM data items
pears, perform the operation as instructed by the
has been reached. (Not involved with the number of
message to create the setting file.
selected items for analog data) Selection of further
ECM data items is not possible after this message
appears. To select other items, deselect the check Saving SDR Data to CF Card
boxes next to the currently selected (checked) SDR data can be saved to the CF card by pressing
items of ECM data, and then select the new items. the [TRG] key while sampling is being performed or
by pressing the trigger switch of the optional remote
box.
NOTE:
• Be sure to turn off SDI power before installing a
CF card into or removing a CF card from its card
slot. Inserting or removing a CF card while SDI
SMU-00154 power is turned on runs the risk of damaging CF
card contents.
20.After clicking the [Selection Completed] button, • Pressing the [TRG] key will save data starting
click the [Transfer] button. from the point 10 minutes before the key is
pressed, up to the point five seconds after the key
is pressed.

178
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement (SDR)

1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable, a switch of the remote box for at least one second.
CF card with the SDR setting file is written, the Pressing the [TRG] key or the trigger switch caus-
pulse/analog box, and the pulse/analog probe. es SDR data to be saved on the CF card. The
2. Insert the CF card that contains the SDR setting message shown below appears on the SDI dis-
file into the CF1 card slot of the SDI. play when SDR data is saved on the CF card.

3. Connect the pulse/analog box to the SDI.

4. Connect the pulse/analog probe to the pulse/an-
alog box.
5. Connect the pulse/analog probe to the location
where you want to sample.
SMU-00549
6. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle. 9. Sample restarts automatically after the SDR data
is saved to the CF card.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag- If you want to stop sampling, disconnect the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR nosis cable from the vehicle's data link connector,
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle's or hold down both the [MENU] key and the
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press [DOWN] key of the SDI for at least two seconds
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the in order to turn off the SDI.
PWR LED of the SDI lights. NOTE:
To sample engine start data without Remote Box,
turn the ignition switch to the ON position and keep
it for a while (The engine is turned off at this mo-
ment). When the message “Analog sampling simul-
taneously” appears on the SDI display, start the
engine to sample the data.

Saving SDR Data to PC

The procedure to save the SDR data is the same as
that described in “Driving Recorder (SDR)”. See
SMU-00113 “Saving SDR Data to PC” under “Driving Recorder
(SDR)” for the procedure.
7. After the SDI is turned on, sampling will start au-
tomatically and the screen shown below will ap- Opening and analyzing saved data
pear on the SDI.
The procedure to open and analyze saved data is
the same as that described in “Driving Recorder
(SDR)”. See “Opening and analyzing saved data”
under “Driving Recorder (SDR)” for the procedure.

SMU-00838

NOTE:
In case that the SDI operates as a driving recorder,
“SDR mode” is shown on the screen.
8. When sampling reaches the point you want to
save, hold down the SDI [TRG] key or the trigger

179
 Remote Box

Remote Box Connecting to the SDI

Using the optional remote box allows you turn the 1. Disconnect the diagnosis cable and AC adaptor
SDI on, detect trigger signals and sample output from the SDI.
signals from the internal G sensor.
IMPORTANT:
NOTE: Completely disengage the power to the SDI.
The remote box is optional, and is not included in
2. Connect the remote box to the remote box con-
standard with the SSMΙΙΙ Kit.
nector of the SDI.
Handling Precautions Remote Box Functions
• When power is being supplied to the SDI by the
diagnosis cable or the AC adaptor, power is sup- Startup the SDI
plied to the remote box even if the SDI is off The SDI can be turned on without pressing the
(PWR LED not lit). For this reason, when con-
PWR key of the SDI by performing the following op-
necting or disconnecting the remote box, be sure
eration.
to completely disengage the power to SDI. Con- 1) Switch operation
necting or disconnecting the remote box with the
Pressing the POWER ON button (blue) on the re-
power still supplied to SDI can damage the SDI.
mote box turns the SDI on.
• Never try to disassemble the remote box.
• This device is not water resistant. Never allow it 2) Ignition signal detection
to be splashed with water, oil, grease, etc. If you connect the cigar plug of the remote box to
the vehicle, and set the ignition switch to accessory
Names of Parts (ACC), the ignition signal is detected to automatical-
ly turn the SDI on.

3) Acceleration detection
If you place the remote box in the door pocket or
F E other receptacle, and then open or close the door,
the output voltage of the X- or Y-axis of the G sen-
D sor built into the remote box is detected to automat-
ically turn the SDI on.
A B
NOTE:
C This function is important when the driving recorder
function is used to sample data at the engine is
started.
SMU-00702

A: Trigger switch Trigger Signal Output

B: POWER ON button A trigger can be applied in the same way as press-
C: Cigar plug ing the [TRG] key on the SDI by pressing the trigger
D: Probe switch on the remote box in the Driving Recorder
E: Bias adjustment hole Mode.
F: LED light
G Sensor Analog Output
The output voltage of the X- and Y-axis of the G
sensor built into the remote box can each be sam-
pled independently.

180
 Remote Box

Sampling of G Sensor Analog NOTE:

Output SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
1. Prepare the SDI, remote box, Pulse/Analog Kit, LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
and a PC with the PC application installed. ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
2. Firmly fix the remote box at a horizontal or vertical the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
position on the vehicle. PWR LED of the SDI lights.
NOTE:
For the direction of detection of G sensor accelera-
tion, the arrow direction on the X- and Y-axis indi-
cated on the remote box is output as the + (plus)
side.

A SMU-00113

X B 5. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

Y
6. Connect the pulse/analog box to the SDI.
7. Connect the red and blue probes of the remote
SMU-00703
box to the analog port of the pulse/analog box,
and the black probe to the COM port.
A: When acceleration is given to direction of the
NOTE:
arrow, analog output of X axial direction (the red
The red probe outputs the X-axis signal and the
probe) voltage rises.
blue probe the Y-axis signal. The probe is the GND.
B: When acceleration is given to direction of the
arrow, analog output of Y axial direction (the 8. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
blue probe) voltage rises. 9. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
3. Connect the remote box to the SDI. start up the application.
4. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the 10.On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
data link connector of the vehicle. select [Oscilloscope] and then press the [Enter]
key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00618

181
 Remote Box

11.As the Analog Sampling screen is displayed, set

the input range to [5 V]. For details about input
range settings, see "Configuring Analog Sam-
pling Settings" under "Analog Sampling"

SMU-00704

NOTE:
The output characteristics of this G sensor is 1.3V/
G. And, output voltage is 2.5V at 0G. Therefore, to
display G sensor output as physical values (Unit:
G), enter the numerical values below in Conversion
rate and Offset of analog sampling.
• Conversion rate = 0.769
• Offset = -1.923

SMU-00823

If it is shifting from zero (0G) when remote box is

horizontal after setting to physical display as above,
insert a Phillips head screwdriver into the bias ad-
justment hole, and turn the adjustment screw to ad-
just the waveform level. During this adjustment,
turning the screwdriver clockwise moves the wave-
form to the “-” (minus) direction.

182
 Guideline for reprogramming procedure for SSMΙΙΙ

Guideline for reprogramming 5) Even if some of the warning lights in the combina-
tion meter turn on during reprogramming or dis-
procedure for SSMΙΙΙ plays “ErrHC”, “ErrEG” or etc. in multi-information
The SSMΙΙΙ has a pass-thru reprogram function. part, these are not errors.
This section explains the procedure for reprogram-
ming with the SSMΙΙΙ. ECM reprogramming
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
Notes on doing ECM and a PC with the SSMΙΙΙ application installed.
reprogramming
2. Attach the test mode connector (green).
Before starting NOTE:
1) Do reprogramming more than 50 m (164 ft) away The jumper harness may need to be attached sep-
from high voltage wires. arately depending on the type of vehicle.
2) Do reprogramming more than 10 m (33 ft) away 3. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
from equipment that might emit high voltage. data link connector of the vehicle.
3) Do reprogramming more than 2 m (7 ft) away 4. Connect the SDI to the PC with the USB cable.
from equipment that emits electronic noise (such
5. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
as a vehicle having its ignition checked).
6. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
4) Do reprogramming more than 2 m (7 ft) away
start up the SSMΙΙΙ application. This causes the
from electronic devices that emit radio waves
Main Menu to appear.
(such as cellular phones or pagers).
7. Select [Reprogram] from the Main Menu to exe-
5) Before starting the reprogramming, turn off all the
electric equipment (such as the ignition system, cute it.
audio system, cigarette lighter, or power seats).
6) Reprogramming automatically turns off if the am-
bient temperature falls below 0°C (32°F).
7) Before reprogramming, be sure to set the PC
power management to “Always ON”. Failure to
set to “always ON” may cause communication er-
ror due to PC power down on the way of repro-
gramming resulting in reprogramming failure.
8) Before reprogramming, confirm DTC on all ECM
including the ECM for reprogramming. If you find SMU-00611
DTC, please restore the parts, which have prob-
lems. 8. This displays Serch FlashWrite screen. Select
“Select Database” from “Option” in menu.
During reprogramming
1) Do not touch any switches in the vehicle.
2) Do not touch the pedals, and do not open or close
the doors.
3) Stay near the car
4) Do not touch the cables or connectors, and do not
move the SDI.
SMU-00801

183
 Guideline for reprogramming procedure for SSMΙΙΙ

9. This displays the Select Database window. Se- NOTE:

lect the desired database file (.mdb file) and click • If no search results are displayed when Vehicle
the [Open] button. spec. is selected as a Search Condition, you can
clear the search items by pressing the [Clear Se-
lection] button to return the selected search items
to their initial status.
• The password request dialog box appears when
you execute reprogram on a computer on which
the first diagnostic software has been installed.

SMU-00802

10.Select “CountrySpec” in menu to select desired

destination. This causes search conditions of
PAK file to be refined for selected destination.

SMU-00407

12.Check the results of the search, then double

click the PAK file listed in the Pack Number col-
umn, or after clicking to make a selection click the
[Continue] button.

SMU-00803

11.In the Search FlashWrite screen, check the CID

check box, input the CID of the ECM that you are
going to reprogram, and then click the [Search]
button to find the PAK file. If you don’t know the
CID of the ECM, use the vehicle specifications to
find the PAK file.

SMU-00687

NOTE:
You can print out information of the selected items
in Search Result column and each of their detailed
information by clicking the [Print] button.

SMU-00686

184
 Guideline for reprogramming procedure for SSMΙΙΙ

13.Select the reprogramming device you are using NOTE:

(in this case, select SUBARU SELECT MONI- When the reprogram is performed using SSMΙΙΙ,
TOR ΙΙΙ), and then click the [Pass-thru] button to the information associated with reprogramming of
start reprogramming. the ECM will be stored in the hard disc of the PC.
This information is used in the future reprogram-
ming. Also, this information is overwritten every time
the ECM is reprogrammed. Therefore, reprogram-
ming becomes impossible when an error occurs but
reprogramming is done for another ECM before at-
tempting to re-reprogram the affected parts, since
the information stored in the hard disc has been
overwritten. To prevent this, whenever the commu-
SMU-00541
nication error occurs, be sure to re-reprogram the
affected ECM before the information associated
14.Perform reprogramming in accordance with the with the reprogramming in the hard disc is overwrit-
instructions that appear on the screen. For more ten. The information stored in the hard disc will not
information on reprogramming, see the Flash- be erased even if the PC power is OFF.
Write HELP file.
Reprogramming of main microcomputer
Action to be taken when communication and sub-microcomputer
error occurs during reprogramming When the ECM has a main microcomputer and a
The following dialog box will appear when commu- sub-microcomputer, NSM executes reprogramming
nication error occurs for some reasons such as PC twice. However, as SSMΙΙΙ permits consecutive re-
or SDI power OFF, or disconnection of diagnosis writing of main microcomputer and sub-microcom-
cable or USB cable during reprogramming. In this puter, both microcomputers can be rewritten
case, refer to the notes below and reprogram again through one reprogramming.
according to the instruction appeared on the
screen.
Basically, communication error during reprogram-
ming will not damage the ECM. However, be careful
that the erroneous action may cause damage to the
ECM when you take the countermeasure.

SMU-00773

185
 Setting Screen Font, Display Unit and Display Language

Setting Screen Font, Display Changing the Display Units

Unit and Display Language SSMΙΙΙ normally uses SI units to display values, but
non-SI units can be specified for speed, tempera-
Changing the Screen Font ture, pressure, and airflow. Click the [Tool] menu
and then click [Option].
The font face, size, and style of the screen font can
be changed as desired. Click the [Tool] menu, and
then click [Option] to display the font selection tab.

SMU-00597

On the unit selection tab, select the desired units

SMU-00597 and then click the [OK] button.
Click the [Font] box arrow button and then select a
font from the list of options that appears.
Click the [Size] box arrow button and then select a
size from the list of options that appears.
Click the [Style] box arrow button and then select
the style (standard or bold) from the list of options
that appears.
After configuring all of the settings, click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00102

Clicking the button on the Digital Data

Screen or Graph Screen Function Key Bar, or
pressing the F10 function key on the PC keyboard
will display the sampled data using the display units
selected above.

SMU-00684

SMU-00598

To return to the SI unit screen, click or

press the F10 function key on the PC keyboard.

186
 Setting Screen Font, Display Unit and Display Language

Changing the Display Language

Click the [Tool] menu, and then click [Option] to dis-
play the language selection tab.
Select the desired language from the selection box
that appears.
NOTE:
When you install the application, the language of
the PC operating system is selected automatically.

SMU-00685

187
 Analog Sampling

Analog Sampling Pulse/Analog Kit Contents

Analog data sampling can be performed using the
optional pulse/analog cartridge, the pulse/analog A
box, and pulse/analog probe.
COM PULSE ANALOG
C
NOTE: CR

CAM
CH1

CH2
CH3

CH4

• The pulse/analog cartridge, pulse/analog box,

and pulse/analog probe are options. They are not B
included in the standard SSMΙΙΙ Kit.
• In case of analog sampling, maximum 5,000 data
can be saved.
• Since this device is a differential input device, mi-
SMU-00612
nus (-) sampling is also supported. This device
can be inputted from four channels using four A: Pulse/analog cartridge
pulse/analog probes. On the other hand, a minus B: Pulse/analog box
input is shared and is one. C: Pulse/analog probe

Handling Precautions Getting Ready for Sampling

• Never try to disassemble the SDI, the pulse/ana-
log cartridge, the pulse/analog box, or the pulse/ To install the pulse/analog cartridge in
analog probe. the SDI
• Be sure to turn off SDI power (PWR LED not lit) 1. Prepare the SDI, pulse/analog cartridge, and a
before installing or removing the pulse/analog Phillips head screwdriver.
cartridge. Installing or removing the cartridge
2. Loosen the two screws that secure the cover on
while power is on can damage the SDI and the
the back of the SDI where the caution label is af-
pulse/analog cartridge.
fixed, and remove the cover.
• Be sure to attach the back cover of the SDI cor-
rectly. Incorrectly attaching the cover can cause
SDI power to disengage.
• Never touch the connectors of the SDI or the
pulse/analog cartridge without first discharging
your body of static electricity. Doing so can dam-
age the SDI and pulse/analog cartridge.
• This device is not water resistant. Never allow it
to be splashed with water, oil, grease, etc.
• The rated input voltage range of the COM port is
±30V. Never input a signal that exceeds the rated
voltage. Doing so can damage the device. SMU-00613

188
 Analog Sampling

3. Install the pulse/analog cartridge in the SDI. 7. Make sure that SDI power turns on normally to
Take care that the connectors of the pulse/analog complete this procedure.
cartridge and the SDI are aligned correctly when
you install the cartridge. Upgrading Your SDI Firmware
You need to update your SDI firmware version be-
fore performing analog sampling for the first time.
You will not be able to perform analog sampling us-
ing an old SDI firmware version.
A screen like the one shown below will be displayed
when you start analog sampling after installing the
pulse/analog cartridge. Follow the instructions on
the screen to update your firmware version. Please
wait until the version update process is complete
before trying to do anything else.
SMU-00614

4. Remove the blind plug attached to the cover. The

pulse/analog box connector will connect in at the
location where you remove the blind plug.
SMU-00617

Starting a Sampling Operation

1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable, a
PC with the PC application installed, the pulse/
analog box, and the pulse/analog probe.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
data link connector of the vehicle.
NOTE:
SMU-00615
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
5. Correctly attach the cover and then tighten the nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
two screws to secure it in place. LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
6. Connect the pulse/analog box at the location
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
where you removed the blind plug on the SDI
PWR LED of the SDI lights.
back cover.

COM PULSE ANALOG

CR CH1 CH3

CAM CH2 CH4

PWR TRG

ENT

MENU C

SMU-00616 SMU-00113

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

189
 Analog Sampling

4. Connect the pulse/analog box to the SDI. Selecting the Sampling Mode
5. Connect the pulse/analog probe to the pulse/an- You can select a sampling mode that continuously
alog box. takes samples without stopping automatically, or a
mode that stops sampling automatically after 5,000
6. Connect the pulse/analog probe the location
data samples are obtained.
where you want to sample.
1. While sampling is stopped, click the but-
7. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.
ton on the Function Key Bar or the F5 function
8. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to key on the PC keyboard.
start up the application.
9. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
select [Oscilloscope] and then press the [Enter]
key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00621

2. On the setup screen that appears, click the [Sam-

pling Mode] tab.
Select either [Continuous] or [Single] and then
click the [OK] button.
When [Continuous] is selected, sampling will con-
tinue without stopping automatically.
SMU-00618 With [Single], sampling will stop automatically af-
ter 5,000 data samples are obtained.
10.This displays the Graph 1 screen and automati-
cally starts sampling.

SMU-00622

NOTE:
The initial default setting for the sampling mode is
[Continuous]. Change the setting to [Single] as re-
quired.
SMU-00619
Setting the Screen Range
Configuring Analog Sampling The screen range specifies the display range on your
PC screen during sampling. There are two screen
Settings range settings available: “AUTO range settings”,
When performing analog sampling, you should con- which automatically adjusts the range in accordance
figure input range, screen range, and sampling with the input data range, and “User settings”, which
mode settings as required. You can save settings to lets you manually set the screen range you want.
a file for later load when you need them again.

190
 Analog Sampling

1. While sampling is stopped, click the but- 1) Item

ton on the Function Key Bar or the F5 function The input name appears on the measurement
key on the PC keyboard. screen under “Item”.
2) Conversion Rate
This is a per Volt conversion value. For information
about conversion rate values, see the user docu-
mentation that comes with the device you are using.
3) Offset
This is the offset of the converted value.
SMU-00621 4) Unit
This specifies the unit.
2. On the setup screen that appears, click the 5) Auto Range
[Screen Range] tab. Each channel can be individually configured with
Configure the settings and then click the [OK] but- the auto range setting or with user settings. The
ton. channels you checked can be drawn by the auto
range, based on the values calculated from conver-
AUTO range settings sion rates and the offsets.
6) Maximum
This specifies the maximum screen range setting.
7) Minimum
This specifies the minimum screen range setting.
NOTE:
After inputting values or other information for a set-
ting item, you can apply the setting by moving the
mouse cursor to another input box or by pressing
the [Enter] key on your PC keyboard. You can move
the mouse cursor to another input box either by
SMU-00623
clicking with the mouse or by pressing the [Tab] key
When “AUTO range settings” is selected, the on your PC keyboard.
screen range is adjusted automatically in accord-
ance with input data. Selecting the Input Range
You can select either 5V or 25V as the input range,
User settings depending on the range of your input data.
1. While Sampling is stopped, click the but-
ton on the Function Key Bar or the F5 function
key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00621
SMU-00624

With the “User settings”, you can specify desired

values for each channel for data display. You can
also specify a conversion rate to display data in
physical values instead of simple voltage values.

191
 Analog Sampling

2. This displays the setup screen. Select either 5V

or 25V and then click the [OK] button.

SMU-00625

2. This will display the setup data save dialog box.

SMU-00625
The name of the data file being saved is generat-
25V is the initial default setting. Change the set- ed automatically in accordance with the current
ting to 5V as required. Leaving the input range set time and date. If you want to use the generated
to 5V when the input data is greater than 5V will file name as-is, click the dialog box [Save] button.
cause a “Range Over” message like the one If you want to change to a different file name, type
shown below to appear. If this happens, change in the name you want.
the input range setting to 25V.

SMU-00626

NOTE:
The input range setting [5 V] has a higher resolution
setting than the input range [25 V]. When measuring
with an input within 5 V, measuring with higher ac-
curacy is possible by selecting the input range set-
ting [5 V].
SMU-00627
Saving a Setup NOTE:
You can save a setup (input range, screen range, Clicking the [Save] button saves the settings of all of
and sampling mode) for later load when you need it. the tabs, regardless of which tab is currently dis-
1. Display the analog sampling setup screen and played. Even if you click the [Save] button at the Input
then click the [Save Setting] button. Range tab screen, for example, settings of the Screen
Range and Sampling Range tab are also saved.

192
 Analog Sampling

Loading a Setup File example, settings of the Screen Range and Sam-
Use the following procedure to load a setup file and pling Range tab are also loaded.
apply its input range, screen range, and sampling
mode settings. Trigger Function
1. On the [Input Range], [Screen Range], or [Sam- The trigger feature lets you configure a trigger to be
pling Mode] tab of the setup screen, click the applied while sampling is in progress. The only type
[Load Settings] button. of trigger supported is “Trigger of input data”,
whereby you pre-configure trigger settings for a
sampling item for automatic trigger detection. “Man-
ual trigger” is not supported for analog sampling.
1. While sampling is stopped, click the but-
ton on the Function Key Bar or the F4 function
key on you PC keyboard.
2. This displays a trigger setup screen. Select “Trig-
ger of input data” and then click the [Next] button.

SMU-00625

2. This displays a dialog box with a list of saved set-

up files.
Select the desired file and then press the [Enter]
key or click [Open].

SMU-00630

NOTE:
To turn off a trigger, select “Without trigger” on the
above screen and then click the [Cancel] button.
3. Specify the trigger source.
In the list, select the checkbox next to the channel
you want to specify as the trigger source, or dou-
ble-click the channel.

SMU-00628

NOTE:
• When loading a setup file, select the file which
displays “Oscilloscope” in System field in dialog
box.
• Clicking the [Load Settings] button loads settings
to all of the tabs, regardless of which tab is cur-
rently displayed. Even if you click the [Load Set- SMU-00631
tings] button at the Input Range tab screen, for

193
 Analog Sampling

4. This displays the Setup trigger of input data NOTE:

screen. Configure the settings and then click the To change a setting, select the desired item and
[OK] button. then click the [Edit] button. On the Setup trigger of
input data screen that appears, change the setting
as desired.
6. This will display the trigger operation screen.
Configure the settings and then click the [Exit]
button.

SMU-00632

The following describes the trigger settings you

can configure.
1) Level
This specifies the trigger level, the value that de-
tects triggers. You can input a value directly into
the box or use its up and down arrows to change
SMU-00634
the setting. The setting value is limited to values
that can actually be obtained. If you type in a val- 1) Pre-trigger Time
ue that cannot be obtained, the software will au-
This setting specifies until how much before,
tomatically change it to the nearest allowable
starting from the point when the trigger was de-
value.
tected, you wish to save the data. All data previ-
2) Slope condition ous to the specified pre-trigger time is to be
This setting specifies the condition for trigger de- abandoned.
tection when the sample data values reach the 2) After-Trigger Time
trigger level. When [Both] is selected, a trigger is
This setting is the sampling time after the trigger
detected when either a Upward or Downward
is detected.
condition is first satisfied.
3) Trigger dot display in hold mode transit
5. Checkboxes of the channels to which you set trig-
gers are checked. This setting is the display location of the trigger
point when sampling is complete.
In the case of analog sampling, you can assign
the trigger to only one channel.
If you do not need to change the details of the set-
ting, click the [Next] button.

SMU-00633

194
 Analog Sampling

7. This will display the measurement screen and au- 1. While sampling is stopped, click the icon on
tomatically start sampling. If the trigger is detect- the Data List Toolbar or the button on the
ed during sampling, data is collected for the Function Key Bar. You could also press the F7
specified time and then sampling stops automat- function key on the PC keyboard.
ically.

SMU-00585

2. After the screen below appears, input a value to

specify the vertical axis range of the graph into
the range box.

SMU-00772

NOTE:
• Assigning a trigger to an item causes “T” to ap-
pear in item’s checkbox.
• On the graph, the trigger level is indicated as a SMU-00639

purple chain lines, while the trigger points are in- 3. To specify the graph horizontal (time) axis range,
dicated by vertical green chain lines. click the range selection box in the lower left cor-
• Trigger information is displayed on the left side of ner of the screen, and then select the desired
the Sampling Status Bar. Clicking the [Details] time setting.
button displays the Information of trigger of input
data screen, which you can use to view detailed
information about the currently assigned trigger.

SMU-00640

NOTE:
• Sampling cannot be performed with the time axis
range set to 1 msec/div or 2.5 msec/div. The set-
ting will change to 5 msec/div automatically if 1
SMU-00636
msec/div or 2.5 msec/div is selected. The 1 msec/
div and 2.5 msec/div settings are valid for analy-
Changing the Range while Using sis only.
Auto Range • A longer time axis range causes a corresponding-
You can use the following procedure to change the ly slower sampling cycle.
range manually, even if “AUTO range settings” is
selected as the screen range setting.

195
 Analog Sampling

4. After selecting the graph vertical axis and hori- Other Operations
zontal axis ranges, click the icon on the Data With analog sampling, the following tasks can be
List Toolbar or the button on the Function performed using the same procedures as those de-
Key Bar to apply the ranges. You can also apply scribed under “Each System Check”. For details
the range settings by pressing the [F11] function about procedures, see the section on this manual
key on the PC keyboard. that explains the particular item.
1. The following functions can are available using
the same procedures as described under “Cur-
rent Data Display and Save”
• Sampling start and stop
• Digital Data Screen
SMU-00586 • Graph 2 Screen
• Changing the Width of Screen Cells
To cancel the range change operation, click the • Changing the Item or Graph Sequence
icon on the Data List Toolbar or the • Initializing the Item or Graph Sequence
button on the Function Key Bar. You can also
• Data Select Screen
cancel the range change operation by pressing
• Returning to the All Data Screen
the F12 function key on the PC keyboard.
• Saving Sampled Data
• Printing Sampled Data
Initialize Item Settings • Previewing the Print Image
Clicking the icon on the Data List Toolbar re- • Setting Up the Printer
turns all item settings to the initial defaults as shown • Moving the Graph Cursor
below. • Changing the Graph Line Color
• Changing the Graph Line Thickness
• Marking Function
2. Two Cursor Analysis
3. Saved Data Display

SMU-00645
4. Setting Screen Font, Display Unit and Display
Language
• Input Range: 25V
• Screen Range: AUTO range settings
• Sampling Mode: Continuous
• Time Axis: 5msec/div
• Trigger: Without trigger

196
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement

ECM Analog Simultaneous 8. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to

start up the application.
Measurement
9. On the Main Menu that appears on the display,
Analog data and ECM data can be sampled simul-
select [Each System Check] and then press the
taneously using the Pulse/Analog Kit (option).
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.
NOTE:
• This function cannot be used if the pulse/analog
cartridge is not installed.
• See “Analog Sampling” for handling precautions
about Pulse/Analog Kit, how to install the pulse/
analog cartridge in the SDI and how to update the
SDI firmware.

Starting ECM Analog

Simultaneous Measurement
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable, a SMU-00600
PC with the PC application installed, the pulse/
10.On the System Selection Menu, select the de-
analog box, and the pulse/analog probe.
sired system and then press the Enter key or left-
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the click with the mouse. (As an example, “Engine” is
data link connector of the vehicle. selected.)
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

SMU-00665

11.This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.
SMU-00014

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Connect the pulse/analog box to the SDI.
5. Connect the pulse/analog probe to the pulse/an-
alog box.
6. Connect the pulse/analog probe to the location
where you want to sample.
SMU-00128
7. Turn on the vehicle’s ignition switch.

197
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement

12.From the list of fault diagnosis items, select [Cur- 15.Click the button on the Function Key
rent Data Display & Save] and then press the En- Bar, or press the F5 function key on the PC key-
ter key or left-click with the mouse. board.

SMU-00815

16.On the setup screen that appears, select “ECM

Analog Simultaneous Measurement” and click
the [Next] button.

SMU-00601

13.This displays the dialog box shown below. Se-

lect [Normal sampling] and then press the Enter
key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00816

17.Select “Input Range” tab to configure the input

range of analog data. Configure the desired
range.
SMU-00508

14.This displays the sampling screen and automat-

ically starts sampling. Stop this sampling.

SMU-00832

NOTE:
For details about input range settings, see “Config-
uring Analog Sampling Settings” under “Analog
Sampling”.
SMU-00813

198
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement

18.Select “Screen Range” tab to configure the NOTE:

screen range of analog data. Configure the de- • You can save the settings of Input Range, Screen
sired range. Range and Sampling Interval as a setup file, and
load the saved setup file. This can be performed
using the same procedures as those described in
“Configuring Analog Sampling Settings” under
“Analog Sampling”. For this procedures, see the
appropriate item.
• When loading a setup file, select the file which
displays “ECM Analog Simultaneous Measure-
ment” in System field in dialog box.

SMU-00833

NOTE:
For details about screen range settings, see “Con-
figuring Analog Sampling Settings” under “Analog
Sampling”.
19.Select “Sampling Interval” tab to configure the
sampling interval of analog data. Select the de-
sired interval from drop-down menu.

SMU-00819

21.Start sampling by clicking icon on the Data

List Tool bar or the button on the Func-
tion Key Bar, or pressing the F2 function key on
the PC keyboard.

SMU-00834

20.After configuring the settings of all tabs, click the

[Finish] button.

SMU-00820

SMU-00835

199
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement

Stopping ECM Analog Trigger setting

Simultaneous Measurement 1. While sampling is stopped, click the but-
1. Click the button on the Function Key Bar, ton on the Function Key Bar or the F4 function
or press the F5 function key on the PC keyboard. key on you PC keyboard.
2. This displays a trigger setup screen. Select “Trig-
ger of input data” and then click the [Next] button.

SMU-00815

2. On the setup screen that appears, select “No

ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement” and
click the [Finish] button.

SMU-00896

NOTE:
To turn off a trigger, select “Without trigger” on the
above screen and then click the [Cancel] button.
3. For the following trigger setting methods, refer to
the section “Trigger” of ECM data sampling for
SMU-00821
“Trigger of input data” and “Manual trigger”, and
refer to the section “Trigger Function” in “Ana-
Trigger Function logue sampling data” for “Analogue data trigger”.
The trigger feature lets you configure a trigger to be However, this function does not have the setting
applied while sampling is in progress. There are “Pre-trigger time” on the trigger function for ana-
three trigger setting methods: “Trigger of input da- logue sampling
ta”, where a trigger is set in advance to a sampling
item and trigger detection is performed automatical-
ly for ECM data, “Analogue data trigger” with auto-
matic trigger detection for analogue data, and
“Manual trigger” with manual trigger. When sam-
pling is performed using a trigger, data is stored
from the start of the sampling until the specified time
from trigger detection elapses.

200
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement

Data Select Screen NOTE:

The Data Select Screen can be used to select par- • Displaying selected data causes data sampled up
ticular data from all of the data sampled and view it. to that point to be deleted.
When there is no sampling operation being per- • Sampling is faster when specific data items are
formed, click the check box in front of the item you selected. (This applies only to engine and trans-
want to view. An item is selected for viewing when mission sampling.)
there is a check mark inside its check box. You can • If the message dialog box shown below appears
also select (check) the checkbox of the highlighted while you are selecting data items, it means that
item by pressing the space bar on the PC keyboard. the limit on the number of selectable ECM data
items has been reached. (Not involved with the
number of selected items for analog data) Selec-
tion of further ECM data items is not possible af-
ter this message appears.
To select other items, deselect the check boxes
next to the currently selected (checked) items of
ECM data, and then select the new items.

SMU-00822

NOTE:
SMU-00154
Be sure to put one check mark or more on the sam-
pling items of both ECM data and analog data. The
Select Screen cannot be displayed without check Setting All Clear Function
marks on both ECM data and analog data. Clicking the icon on the Data List Toolbar re-
turns all item settings to the initial defaults as shown
Click the icon on the Data List Toolbar or the below.
button on the Function Key Bar. This will • Item sequence: default setting on each models
display the selected items only. • Data Select Screen: all items not selected
You can also display the selected items by pressing • Horizontal axis range of Graph Screen: default
the F6 function key on the PC keyboard. setting on each item
• Vertical axis range of Graph Screen: 0.5 sec/div
• Graph line color of Graph Screen: all red
• Graph line thickness of Graph Screen: 1 point
• Trigger function: without trigger
• Two Cursor Analysis: end of Two Cursor Analysis
SMU-00575
• Input Range: 25V
• Screen Range: AUTO range settings

201
 ECM Analog Simultaneous Measurement

Other Operations
With ECM Analog simultaneous measurement, the
following tasks can be performed using the same
procedures as those described under “Each Sys-
tem Check” or “Analog Sampling”. For details about
procedures, see the section on this manual that ex-
plains the particular item.
1. The following functions available using the same
procedures as described under “Current Data
Display and Save”
• Sampling start and stop
• Digital Data Screen
• Graph Screen
• Changing the Width of Screen Cells
• Changing the Item or Graph Sequence
• Initializing the Item or Graph Sequence
• Returning to the All Data Screen
• Saving Sampled Data
• Printing Sampled Data
• Previewing the Print Image
• Setting Up the Printer
• Moving the Graph Cursor
• Changing the Graph Line Color
• Changing the Graph Line Thickness
• Marking Function
• Graph Range Setting of ECM Data
2. The following functions available using the same
procedures as described under “Analog Sam-
pling”
• Graph Range Setting of Analog Data
3. Two Cursor Analysis
4. Saved Data Display
5. Setting Screen Font, Display Unit and Display
Language

202
 Roughness Monitor

Roughness Monitor Sampling with Simple Roughness

Roughness monitor can be used to monitor com- Monitor
bustion condition of each cylinder. There are two NOTE:
types for this function. “Simple Roughness Monitor” cannot be used if
there is not “Roughness Monitor” in normal engine
1) Simple Roughness Monitor
Data Display.
Simple Roughness Monitor displays the engine
speed and count of misfire at each cylinder as 1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable,
well as normal SSMΙΙΙ data sampling. and a PC with the PC application installed.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the
2) High-Grade Roughness Monitor
data link connector of the vehicle.
High-Grade Roughness Monitor calculates
standard deviation, engine speed, etc. based on NOTE:
pulse data of crankshaft position sensor and SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
camshaft position sensor, and displays the value nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
and graph. LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
Though the display screen of High-Grade Rough- ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
ness Monitor is slightly different from normal one, the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
basic procedure is identical. Refer to appropriate PWR LED of the SDI lights.
items for procedure which is not described in this
section.
NOTE:
• Standard deviation is digitization of dispersion in
rotation of all cylinders or each one. If this value
is extremely higher than other cylinder, it deter-
mines that combustion condition is faulty. Be-
sides, this function also displays average value of
engine speed. If this value is extremely lower
than other cylinder, it also determines that com-
bustion condition is faulty. SMU-00014
• When you use the roughness monitor function,
install the pulse/analog cartridge to SDI in ad- 3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.
vance. “Roughness Monitor” is not displayed in 4. Start the Engine.
fault diagnosis items screen if pulse/analog car-
tridge is not installed. 5. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
• When taking out sensor signal, take out it from start up the application.
ECM connector portion. Taking out around sen-
sor may be affected by noise, leading to inaccu-
rate measurement.
• Refer to Service Manual for connector terminal
arrangement, wire color, etc. when taking out
sensor signal.
• Be careful not to short the signal lines of crank-
shaft position sensor and camshaft position sen-
sor.
• If the security software such as antivirus software
is used, sampling time may be long when sam-
pling with High-Grade Roughness Monitor. In this
case, quit the security software before sampling.

203
 Roughness Monitor

6. On the Main Menu that appears on the display, 9. From the list of fault diagnosis items, select
select [Each System Check] and then press the [Roughness Monitor] and then press the Enter
Enter key or left-click with the mouse. key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00600

7. On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine

Control System] and then press the Enter key or
SMU-00774
left-click with the mouse.
NOTE:
“Roughness Monitor” is not displayed if the pulse/
analog cartridge is not installed to SDI.
10.From the list of diagnosis items, select [Simple
Roughness Monitor] and then press the Enter key
or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00775

NOTE:
SMU-00665
“Simple Roughness Monitor” is not displayed if
there is not “Roughness Monitor” in normal engine
8. This displays a compliance verification message Data Display.
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00128

204
 Roughness Monitor

11.This displays the Graph Screen and automati-

cally starts sampling.

SMU-00014

3. Use the USB cable to connect the SDI to the PC.

4. Connect the pulse/analog box to the SDI.
SMU-00776 5. Connect the signal line (positive side) of crank-
shaft position sensor to CR terminal of pulse/an-
NOTE: alog box using pulse/analog probe.
You can start and stop sampling and perform other
operations using the same procedures as those de- NOTE:
scribed under “Current Data Display and Save”. For Take out sensor signal from ECM connector por-
details about these operations, see “Current Data tion. Taking out around sensor may be affected by
Display and Save”. noise, leading to inaccurate measurement.
6. Connect the signal line (positive side) of camshaft
Sampling with High-Grade position sensor to CAM terminal of pulse/analog
Roughness Monitor box using pulse/analog probe.
The High-Grade Roughness Monitor can perform
NOTE:
“Auto sampling” and “Manual sampling”. Normally,
Take out sensor signal from ECM connector por-
“Auto sampling” is used.
tion. Taking out around sensor may be affected by
Auto Sampling noise, leading to inaccurate measurement.
1. Prepare the SDI, diagnosis cable, USB cable, a 7. Connect the ground lines (negative side) of ECM
PC with the PC application installed, the pulse/ to COM terminal of pulse/analog box using pulse/
analog box, and the pulse/analog probe. analog probe.
2. Use the diagnosis cable to connect the SDI to the 8. Start the Engine.
data link connector of the vehicle. 9. Double-click the SSMΙΙΙ icon on the PC screen to
NOTE: start up the application.
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the
PWR LED of the SDI lights.

205
 Roughness Monitor

10.On the Main Menu that appears on the display, 13.From the list of fault diagnosis items, select
select [Each System Check] and then press the [Roughness Monitor] and then press the Enter
Enter key or left-click with the mouse. key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00600

11.On the System Selection Menu, select [Engine

Control System] and then press the Enter key or
SMU-00774
left-click with the mouse.
NOTE:
“Roughness Monitor” is not displayed if the pulse/
analog cartridge is not installed.
14.From the list of diagnosis items, select [High-
Grade Roughness Monitor] and then press the
Enter key or left-click with the mouse.

SMU-00777

15.This displays the High-Grade Roughness Moni-

SMU-00665
tor screen. Click icon on the Data List Tool bar
or the button on the Function Key Bar, or
12.This displays a compliance verification message press the F2 function key on the PC keyboard.
for the system being diagnosed. Click the [OK] You can also start sampling by selecting “Auto
button. Sampling” from “Sampling” in menu.

SMU-00128

SMU-00778

206
 Roughness Monitor

16.This displays a verification message for the cam- 19.This displays the graph screen.
shaft position sensor signal to be taken out. Con-
firm the signal to be taken out and then click the
[OK] button.

SMU-00779

17.Stand by as sampling is started automatically. SMU-00782

To cancel sampling, click the [Cancel] button. NOTE:

You can stop sampling also by clicking icon Even if combustion condition is normal, extremely
on the Data List Tool bar or the button on large standard deviation of all cylinders may occur
the Function Key Bar, or pressing the F2 function due to variation in engine operation condition such
key on the PC keyboard. as switching ON/OFF of radiator fan or A/C. In this
case, perform sampling again.
20.If you want to quit Roughness Monitor, select
“Quit Roughness Monitor” from “File” in menu,
click icon on the Data List Tool bar or
button on the Function Key Bar, or press the F12
function key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00851

NOTE:
After dialog box above disappears, next dialog box
may not appear immediately. Wait until it appears.
18.After sampling ends, a dialog box below will ap-
pear. Click the [OK] button.

SMU-00784

SMU-00866
Manual Sampling
Roughness Monitor can perform sampling for nor-
mal engine speed range automatically. If you want
to sample other engine speed range, use Manual
Sampling.
NOTE:
Perform Manual Sampling when minimum engine
speed is below 400 rpm at Auto Sampling.

207
 Roughness Monitor

1. Display the High-Grade Roughness Monitor sam- 4. This displays a verification message for the cam-
pling screen. shaft position sensor signal to be taken out. Con-
firm the signal to be taken out and then click the
[OK] button.

SMU-00779

5. Stand by as sampling is started automatically. To

SMU-00785 cancel sampling, click the [Cancel] button. You
2. Select “Manual Sampling” from “Sampling” in can stop sampling also by clicking icon on the
menu. Data List Tool bar or the button on the
Function Key Bar, or pressing the F2 function key
on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00786

3. This displays Set up Sampling Engine Speed SMU-00851

Range screen. Operate the arrow button to con-
figure the engine speed range and then click the NOTE:
[OK] button. After dialog box above disappears, next dialog box
may not appear immediately. Wait until it appears.
6. After sampling ends, a dialog box below will ap-
pear. Click the [OK] button.

SMU-00787
SMU-00866
NOTE:
Set up the “Sampled Minimum Engine Speed” to
100 rpm less than minimum engine speed at Auto
Sampling.

208
 Roughness Monitor

7. This displays the graph screen. 3. Select desired range and then click the [OK] but-
ton to apply the setting.
To cancel to change the range, click the [Cancel]
button.

SMU-00792

Saving Sampled Data

This explains how to save the sampled data with
SMU-00782 High-Grade Roughness Monitor.
NOTE:
Changing Graph Range You can save the data at Simple Roughness Moni-
High-Grade Roughness Monitor sets the vertical tor using the same procedures as those described
axis range of the graph automatically after sam- under “Current Data Display and Save”. See the de-
pling, however you can configure the range manu- scription.
ally.
1. Select “Save as” from “File” in menu. You can
NOTE: also save by clicking icon on the Data List
You can change the range at Simple Roughness Tool bar or the button on the Function
Monitor using the same procedures as those de- Key Bar, or pressing the F9 function key on the
scribed under “Current Data Display and Save”. PC keyboard.
See the description.
1. Select “Set up Graph Range” from “View” in
menu. You can also select by clicking icon on
the Data List Tool bar or the button on
the Function Key Bar, or pressing the F7 function
key on the PC keyboard.

SMU-00790 SMU-00795

2. Click the arrow displayed in graph range setting

screen.

SMU-00791

209
 Roughness Monitor

2. This causes the sampled data save dialog box to

appear.
The name of the data file being saved is generat-
ed automatically in accordance with the current
time and date. If you want to use the generated
file name as-is, click the dialog box [Save] button.
If you want to change to a different file name, type
in the name you want.

SMU-00602

2. This displays the “Open file” dialog box. Click

“File type” and select {Roughness monitor sam-
pling data (*.cym)}.

SMU-00796

NOTE:
Sample data files are saved in the Data folder
where the PC application is installed.
To change to another storage location, specify the
location you want in the Save in box of the save
data dialog box.

Saved Data Display SMU-00797

You can view the saved data by opening from Main
3. Select the desired file in list of files and click the
Menu or from High-Grade Roughness Monitor.
[Open] button.
NOTE:
To view the saved data at Simple Roughness Mon-
itor, see “Saved Data Display”.

Opening from Main Menu

1. From the Main Menu, select [Saved Data Display]
and then press the Enter key or left-click with the
mouse.

SMU-00798

210
 Roughness Monitor

Opening from High-Grade Roughness

Monitor screen
1. Display the High-Grade Roughness Monitor
screen, and select “Open” from “File” in menu or
click icon on the Data List Tool bar.

SMU-00799

2. This displays the “Open” dialog box. Select the

desired file in list of files and click the [Open] but-
ton.

SMU-00800

211
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis 5. The software version screen will appear on the
display, and then it will be replaced by the Initial
The SDI can be used for fault diagnosis in a stand-
Menu screen.
alone configuration without connecting to a PC.
You need to insert a CF card with the CF application Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the de-
installed on it into the card slot of the SDI in order to sired item, and then press the [ENT] key.
perform stand-alone diagnosis.
NOTE:
Be sure to turn off SDI power (the PWR LED of the
SDI goes out) before installing a CF card into or re-
moving a CF card from its card slot. Inserting or re-
moving a CF card while SDI power is turned on runs SMU-00513
the risk of damaging CF card contents.
NOTE:
Getting Ready (Starting Up the SDI SDI power may turn off automatically (indicated when
in Stand-alone Mode) the PWR LED of the SDI goes out) if no SDI operation
is performed for a preset period. If this happens, press
1. Insert a CF card that has the CF application in- the [PWR] key to turn the SDI back on.
stalled into the CF1 card slot of the SDI.
To quit the stand-alone mode, select {Exit} on the
2. Connect the main connector of the diagnosis ca-
Initial Menu screen and then press [ENT] key.
ble to the diagnosis communication connector of
the SDI.
3. Connect the vehicle connector of the diagnosis
cable to the vehicle’s data link connector, and
confirm that the PWR LED of the SDI lights.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag- SMU-00516

nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR

LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s All Systems Diagnosis
ignition switch or start the engine, and then press Selecting this item displays the fault detect status of
the SDI [PWR] key and check again to see if the all control system control modules for which SSMΙΙΙ
PWR LED of the SDI lights. diagnosis is supported, and memorized diagnostic
codes.
When a particular control system cannot be identi-
fied as the causes of a vehicle’s problem, perform
this diagnosis and use the displayed diagnostic
codes to perform diagnosis.
NOTE:
• For a vehicle equipped with a cruise control sys-
tem, turn on the cruise control switch before per-
forming inspection.
• This inspection mode may not function in the
SMU-00113 case of certain vehicle models and vehicle spec-
ifications.
4. Hold down the SDI [MENU] key and [C] key at the
same time for at least two seconds.

212
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and

[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and
then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00444

5. The display shows the fault codes that are re-

membered by each ECM.
SMU-00513
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to scroll screen
2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap- contents.
pear. To exit the fault code display, press the [C] key.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {DTC
check}, and then press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C]
key or select {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00445

Diagnostic Codes Check on Each

System
SMU-00760
Getting Ready
3. The SDI displays the screen shown below when
This type of inspection allows selection of a particu-
the control system and communication system
lar system from among the control system for which
are started up.
SSMΙΙΙ diagnosis is supported. Then memorized di-
To terminate the diagnosis operation, press the agnostic codes and other data can be viewed on the
[C] key. SDI display.
1. Press the both [MENU] key and [C] key on the
SDI at the same time more than two seconds.
2. The software version screen will appear on the
display, and then it will be replaced by the Initial
Menu screen.
SMU-00420
On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP]
and[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle},
4. The screen shown below will appear. For a vehi- and then press the [ENT] key.
cle equipped with a cruise control system, turn on
the cruise control main switch and then press the
[ENT] key. For a vehicle that does not have cruise
control, simply press the [C] key.
This screen may not be displayed in the case of
certain vehicle specifications.
SMU-00513

213
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

3. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap- 6. This causes the Fault Diagnosis Menu screen to
pear. appear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {System Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {DTC
Check}, and then press the [ENT] key. To return check}, and then press the [ENT] key.
to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C] key or se- Press [C] key to return to the System Selection
lect {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key. screen.

SMU-00735 SMU-01032

4. This causes the System Selection screen to ap-

pear.
Data Display
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {En- This system allows sampling of control module in-
gine}, and then press the [ENT] key. (For this ex- put/output data of control systems for which SSMΙΙΙ
ample,“Engine” is selected.) diagnosis is supported, and sampling of control da-
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the ta.
[C] key. 1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and
then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00447

5. This displays a compliance verification message SMU-00513

for the system being diagnosed. Press the [ENT]
key. 2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-
pear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {System
Check}, and then press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C]
key or select {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00448

SMU-00735

214
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

3. This causes the System Selection screen to ap-

pear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {En-
gine}, and then press the [ENT] key. (For this ex-
ample, “Engine” is selected.)
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the SMU-00737
[C] key.
Data Select Screen
The Data Select Screen can be used to select par-
ticular data from all of the data sampled and view it.

1. Select the sampled items you want to view, and

SMU-00447
press [TRG] key. This causes asterisk (*) to ap-
pear on the selected items.
4. This displays a compliance verification message
for the system being diagnosed. Press the [ENT]
key.

SMU-00738

2. After selecting the sampled items you want to

SMU-00448
view, press the [ENT] key. This causes only sam-
pled items with asterisk to appear.
5. This causes the Fault Diagnosis Menu screen to
appear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {Data
Display}, and then press the [ENT] key.
Press [C] key to return to the System Selection
screen.
SMU-00739

To return to the All Data Screen, press the [ENT]

key again.
NOTE:
The selected sampled items (with asterisk) are
SMU-00736
saved even if the SDI power is turned off. At the
next starting up, the items will remain selected.
6. This displays the current data.
Press [C] key to return to the Fault Diagnosis
Menu screen.

215
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

Saving Sampled Data Save data stored in a CF card to a

You can save sampled data on stand-alone diagno- PC.
sis as well. You can save sampled data, which is This explains how to save sampled data stored in a
stored in CF card, to hard disk of your PC in order CF card to hard disk of your PC.
to analyze. Sampled data can be read from a CF card in the
card slot of the SDI or in the card slot of a PC.
NOTE:
• Sampled data saved in a CF card cannot be ana- NOTE:
lyzed. For analysis, the data needs to be saved in Be sure to turn off SDI power before installing a CF
a PC. card into or removing a CF card from its card slot.
• Cannot save sampling data if free space on a CF Inserting or removing a CF card while SDI power is
card is less than 10MB. If so, delete unnecessary turned on runs the risk of damaging CF card con-
data in the CF card or replace it with another CF tents.
card, which has enough space.
To read data from a card slot of the SDI
How to save in a CF card 1. On the Main Menu, select the {Read CF applica-
1. Display the current data. (Engine is taken as an tion measurement data}.
example.)

SMU-00737

2. Hold down the [MENU] key of the SDI for at least

two seconds.
3. Stand by as the message below will appear on
the SDI screen.
SMU-00841

2. On the Read CF application measurement data

screen, select the {Read out CF application
measurement data from the CF card inside SDI}.

SMU-00839

4. In response to the save confirmation screen that

appears, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00842

SMU-00840

216
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

3. On the Read out CF application measurement

data from the CF card inside SDI screen, select
the {Read CF application measurement data all
together} or {Read CF application measurement
data separately}.

SMU-00845

<If you selected “Read CF application measure-

ment data separately” in Step 3.>
4. This causes the sampled data save dialog box to
SMU-00843
appear. The name of the data file being saved is
generated automatically in accordance with the
<If you selected “Read CF application measure- time and date of saving in CF card. If you want to
ment data all together” in Step 3.> use the generated file name as-is, click the dialog
4. Select the directory to save sampled data, which box [Save] button. If you want to change to a dif-
was read out from the CF card. Select the desired ferent file name, type in the name you want.
directory, and then click the [OK] button.

SMU-00846

SMU-00844
NOTE:
NOTE: • Sample data files are saved in the Data folder
• On the initial setting, sample data files are saved where the PC application is installed. To change
in the Data folder where the PC application is in- to another storage location, specify the location
stalled. you want in the Save in box of the save data dia-
• The name of the data file being saved is generat- log box.
ed automatically in accordance with the time and • The Comment box of the Save As dialog box can
date of saving in CF card. be used to save general comments associated
• After the sampled data is saved in a PC, that in with the data or file.
CF card will be deleted automatically. • After the sampled data is saved in a PC, that in
CF card will be deleted automatically.
5. After all of the sampled data in the CF card are
saved, a screen below will appear. Click the [OK]
button.

217
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

5. After all of the sampled data in the CF card are 3. Insert the CF card that contains the sampling
saved, a screen below will appear. Click the [OK] data into the card slot of the PC. Click the [OK]
button. button.

SMU-00845 SMU-00848

To read data from a card slot of the PC NOTE:

If the PC has no CF card slot, make use of a card
1. On the Main Menu, select the {Read CF applica-
reader etc. to setup the CF card on the PC.
tion measurement data}.
4. When the dialog box shown below appears, click
the [OK] button.

SMU-00849

5. Select the drive where the CF card is located, and

then click the [OK] button.

SMU-00841

2. On the Read CF application measurement data

screen, select the {Read out CF application
measurement data from the CF card inside the
computer}.

SMU-00850

NOTE:
SMU-00847
If the drive which contains a CF card is not dis-
played at this time, restart the PC application and
repeat the procedure from step 1.

218
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

6. On the Read out CF application measurement 8. After all of the sampled data in the CF card are
data from the CF card inside the computer saved, a screen below will appear. Click the [OK]
screen, select the {Read CF application meas- button.
urement data all together} or {Read CF applica-
tion measurement data separately}.

SMU-00845

SMU-00852
<If you selected “Read CF application measure-
ment data separately” in Step 6.>
<If you selected “Read CF application measure- 7. This causes the sampled data save dialog box to
ment data all together” in Step 6.> appear. The name of the data file being saved is
7. Select the directory to save sampled data, which generated automatically in accordance with the
was read out from the CF card. Select the desired time and date of saving in CF card. If you want to
directory, and then click the [OK] button. use the generated file name as-is, click the dialog
box [Save] button. If you want to change to a dif-
ferent file name, type in the name you want.

SMU-00844

NOTE: SMU-00846
• On the initial setting, sample data files are saved
in the Data folder where the PC application is in- NOTE:
stalled. • Sample data files are saved in the Data folder
• The name of the data file being saved is generat- where the PC application is installed. To change
ed automatically in accordance with the time and to another storage location, specify the location
date of saving in CF card. you want in the Save in box of the save data dia-
• After the sampled data is saved in a PC, that in log box.
CF card will be deleted automatically. • The Comment box of the Save As dialog box can
be used to save general comments associated
with the data or file.
• After the sampled data is saved in a PC, that in
CF card will be deleted automatically.

219
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

8. After all of the sampled data in the CF card are

saved, a screen below will appear. Click the [OK]
button.

SMU-00447

4. This displays a compliance verification message

for the system being diagnosed. Press the [ENT]
SMU-00845
key.

Clearing Memory
Use the following procedure to delete the diagnostic
codes memorized by the control modules of each
system after correcting the fault.
1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and SMU-00448
then press the [ENT] key.
5. This causes the Fault Diagnosis Menu screen to
appear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {Clear
Memory}, and then press the [ENT] key.
Press [C] key to return to the System Selection
screen.
SMU-00513

2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-

pear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {System
Check}, and then press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C] SMU-00464
key or select {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.
6. This causes a memory clear confirmation mes-
sage to appear, and then press the [ENT] key.
To cancel the memory clear operation, press the
[C] key.

SMU-00735

3. This causes the System Selection screen to ap-

pear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {En- SMU-00450
gine}, and then press the [ENT] key. (For this ex-
ample, “Engine” is selected.)
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the
[C] key.

220
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

7. Executing the memory clear operation causes the

screen shown below to appear. In accordance
with the instructions on the screen, turn off the ig-
nition switch and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00513

2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-

pear.
SMU-00451
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {System
Check}, and then press the [ENT] key.
NOTE: To return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C]
There are some systems that do not have a memory key or select {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.
clear item on the fault diagnosis menu. With such a
system, the diagnostic code will disappear from the
display when you turn off the vehicle’s ignition
switch.

Transmission System Memory Clear 2

On the fault diagnosis screen for the transmission SMU-00735
system, [Clear Memory] and [Clear Memory 2]
items may be displayed. 3. This causes the System Selection screen to ap-
Selecting the [Clear Memory 2] item deletes diag- pear.
nostic codes and learning control values remem- Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {Integ.
bered by the transmission control module. unit}, and then press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the
Airbag System Memory Clear [C] key.
To execute the memory clear operation in the air-
bag system, you must first completely service all
problems. If there is even one problem remaining,
the memory clear operation cannot be executed.

Body Integrated Module Function

Setting (ECM Customizing) SMU-00740
The following procedure can be used to configure
operational details, operation time, and other set- 4. This displays a compliance verification message
tings for the actuators controlled by the body inte- for the system being diagnosed. Press the [ENT]
grated module. key.

IMPORTANT:
Make sure you perform setting operations in ac-
cordance with the Service Manual when using the
unit customization function. Configuring the wrong
settings can cause abnormal system operation and
other problems. SMU-00741

1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and

[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and
then press the [ENT] key.

221
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

5. This causes the Fault Diagnosis Menu screen to

appear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {Cus-
tomizing}, and then press the [ENT] key.
Press [C] key to return to the System Selection
screen. SMU-00745

Impact Sensor
Impact Sensor sensitivity adjustment on the securi-
ty system can be done by this function.
It is necessary to refer to service manuals when you
do this adjustment.
SMU-00742
1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
6. On the screen that appears, use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and
[DOWN] keys to select the setting(s) to be config- then press the [ENT] key.
ured, and then press the [ENT] key.
Press [C] key to return to the Fault Diagnosis
Menu screen.

SMU-00513

2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-

pear.
SMU-00743
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {System
NOTE: Check}, and then press the [ENT] key.
Please follow the instructions on the destination To return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C]
confirmation screen if it is appeared. (Expt. North key or select {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.
America, the United Kingdom, Australia and some
other countries.)
7. This displays a customized setting screen for the
selected item(s). Use the [RIGHT] and [LEFT]
keys to select the desired setting(s), and then
press the [ENT] key.
SMU-00735

SMU-00744

8. This causes a message to appear indicating that

setting configuration is complete. Press the [ENT]
key.

222
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

3. This causes the System Selection screen to ap- 7. Sensitivity Adjustment confirmation screen ap-
pear. pears. In response to this confirmation screen,
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {Impact press the [ENT] key.
Sensor}, and then press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the
[C] key.

SMU-01037

Registering the Tire Pressure

SMU-01033 Monitoring System Transmitter (ID)
4. This displays a compliance verification message The procedure below can be used to register the tire
for the system being diagnosed. Press the [ENT] pressure monitoring system transmitter (ID). Regis-
key. tration of the transmitter (ID) is required after per-
forming any one of the following repair work
procedures.
• Transmitter replacement
• Tire rotation (causing change of transmitter posi-
tion)
• Tire pressure monitoring control module replace-
SMU-01034 ment

5. This displays the Sensitivity Adjustment Mode ex- NOTE:

ecution confirmation screen. Press the [ENT] key. Be sure to perform transmitter (ID) registration work
To cancel the Sensitivity Adjustment Mode exe- in accordance with the Service Manual.
cution, press the [C] key.
Getting Ready
Adjust the air pressure of all of the tires so they are
at the standard value.
1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select [SUBARU Vehicle], and
then press the [ENT] key.
SMU-01035

6. This displays a Sensitivity Adjustment screen.

Use the [UP] key for increasing sensitivity and the
[DOWN] key for decreasing sensitivity.
Press the [ENT] key after completing the adjust-
ment.
SMU-00513
To stop the adjustment, press the [MENU] key.

SMU-01036

223
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to appear. ID registration

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select [System 1. On the screen shown, use the [UP] or [DOWN] keys
Check], and then press the [ENT] key. to select [ID regist], and press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C] Press [C] key to return to the Fault Diagnosis Menu
key or select [Exit] and then press the [ENT] key. screen.

SMU-00735
SMU-01114

3. This causes the System Selection screen to ap- 2. The confirmation screen asking if you want to delete
pear. the registered transmitter ID will appear. Then press
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select [Tire the [ENT] key.
pressure], and then press the [ENT] key. If you do not wish to delete the ID, press the [C] key.
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the
[C] key.

SMU-01115

SMU-01111 3. Once ID deletion is carried out, following screen

will appear. Press the [ENT] key.
4. This displays a compliance verification message for
the system being diagnosed. Press the [ENT] key.

SMU-01116

SMU-01112 4. Wheel ID registration process is shown on the

screen.
5. This causes the Fault Diagnosis Menu screen to Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to scroll screen
appear. contents.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select [ID The message “complete” appears when each
regst&cnfrm], and then press the [ENT] key. wheel ID registration is complete.
Press [C] key to return to the System Selection
screen.

SMU-01117

SMU-01113

224
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

5. The screen shown below will appear if registra- • When wireless radios or car telephones are in-
tion ends normally. Press the [ENT] key. stalled, they must be installed so that the immobi-
lizer system is not influenced by electric waves.
• Do not operate cell phones or wireless radios or
the like when either trouble diagnosis or immobi-
lizer registration is in progress.
• During immobilizer registration, do not bring a key
with a different ID close to the ignition switch.
SMU-01118 When the key is on a keychain, remove it from the
chain before start of diagnosis. When there are
NOTE: several keys on one keychain, remove them from
Registering a transmitter ID causes the previously the keychain and use them individually for the
registered ID to be deleted. work.
• When the engine cannot be started with a regis-
Transmitter ID Data Monitor tered key, pull the ignition key from the ignition
On the selection screen shown below, use the [UP] switch, wait approximately one second until the
or [DOWN] keys to select [ID data view]. This ena- immobilizer warning lamp starts flashing, and
bles you to confirm the registered ID data, and the then turn the ignition key slowly to start the en-
ID data sent from the transmitter to Tire pressure gine.
monitoring control module. 1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and
then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-01119

Transmitter ID Data Screen

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to scroll screen con- SMU-00513
tents.
2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-
To exit the transmitter ID display, press the [C] key.
pear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {IMM
regist.}, and then press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C]
key or select {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-01120

Registering the Immobilizer (Not

Equipped with Keyless Access
with Push Button Start System.)
SMU-00746
WARNING:
• The security ID and registration command must
be handled as confidential information and shall
not be announced to outsiders.

225
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

3. Press the [ENT] key if the system selection 6. In response to the compliance verification screen
screen is displayed. that appears, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00949 SMU-00880

NOTE: 7. Input the teaching operation code, and then press

Audio System is the specification only for the U.K. the [ENT] key.
4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless Press [C] key to return to the Menu Selection
access with push button start system. Press the screen.
[C] key. NOTE:
The [UP] and [DOWN] keys allow to input numbers.
The [RIGHT] and [LEFT] keys allow to move over
digits of number.

SMU-00947

NOTE:
• The term [smart system] that appears on this
screen is synonymous with the term [keyless ac- SMU-00748
cess with push button start system] used in this
text. 8. In response to the registration mode confirmation
• The keyless access with push button start system screen that appears, press the [ENT] key.
is not equipped with some vehicles, depending Press [C] key to return to the command input
on the specifications, for North America, Austral- screen.
ia, and some other areas.
5. Press [ENT] after confirming if the ignition switch
is ON, as following screen will be displayed.

SMU-00749

SMU-00948

226
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

9. Input the security ID and then press the [ENT]

key.
NOTE:
The [UP] and [DOWN] keys allow to input numbers.
The [RIGHT] and [LEFT] keys allow to move over
digits of number. SMU-00754

14.Turn off the ignition switch, and then change the

key to one to be registered.
NOTE:
You need to change key within about 30 seconds.

SMU-00750

10.Stand by as the security ID is being collated.

SMU-00755

15.Turn off the ignition switch and the screen shown

below will appear. Insert the key you want to reg-
SMU-00751
ister into the key cylinder, and turn on the ignition
11.In response to the key registration confirmation switch.
screen that appears, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00756

SMU-00752
16.In response to the key registration confirmation
12.Stand by as the key is registered. screen that appears, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00753 SMU-00752

13.The screen shown below will appear if registra- 17.Stand by as the key is registered.
tion ends normally.
If you have another key to be registered, press
the [ENT] key. If you do not have any more keys
to be registered, press the [C] key and advance
to step 22.
SMU-00753

227
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

18.The screen shown below will appear if registra- Registering the Immobilizer
tion ends normally. (Equipped with the Keyless Access
If you have another key to be registered, press with Push Button Start System)
the [ENT] key. If you do not have any more keys
to be registered, press the [C] key and advance WARNING:
to step 22. • The security ID and registration command must
be handled as confidential information and shall
not be announced to outsiders.
• When you install wireless radios or car phones,
make sure that mobile keys (access keys) are not
influenced by their electric waves.
• Do not operate cell phones or wireless radios or
SMU-00757
the like when either trouble diagnosis or mobile
key (access key) registration is in progress.
19.Repeat steps 14 through 17. • The work of "Registering the Smart Immobilizer",
20.The screen shown below will appear if registra- "Registering the Smart ECM" and "Delete the Mo-
tion ends normally. bile Key (AccessKey) ID" includes the operation
of holding up the mobile key (AccessKey) to the
If you have another key to be registered, press push engine switch (push-button ignition switch).
the [ENT] key. If you do not have any more keys Pay attention to the following when performing
to be registered, press the [C] key and advance this operation.
to step 22. 1) Confirm that the battery voltage is 11 V or
more and execute each mode.
2) When holding up the mobile key (AccessKey)
to the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch), do not hold two or more mobile keys
(AccessKey) at the same time, but use only
one each time. (When the mobile key (Access-
SMU-00758 Key) is on a keychain, remove it from the key-
21.Repeat steps 14 through 17. chain before the work.)
3) When holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up
22.The screen shown below will appear if registra- to the push engine switch (push-button ignition
tion ends normally. switch), bring the mobile key (AccessKey)
Press the [ENT] key. close to the push engine switch (push-button
ignition switch) as shown below.

SMU-00759

23.After confirming that the immobilizer system is

operating normally, quit the registration opera-
tion.
SMU-01094

(1) Let the mechanical key insertion opening

of the mobile key (AccessKey) face down.

228
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

(2) Hold the Subaru ornament side to the push switch (push-button ignition switch) once with the
engine switch (push-button ignition switch) clutch pedal depressed.
side. • When performing either one of the operations
(3) Bring it close until it touches the push en- shown below, perform also the "registration of the
gine switch (push-button ignition switch). remote control engine starter".
When replacing the parts for vehicles with key- 1) Installing remote control engine starter
less access with push button start system, always 2) Replacing remote control engine starter
use new parts for "mobile key (AccessKey)", "col- 3) Replacing collation ECM of a vehicle equipped
lation ECM", "ID code box", "steering lock ECM", with remote control engine starter
and "body integrated module", and never replace • At the time of replacement of the body integrated
by used parts. module and the combination meter, perform
• If the engine cannot get started with a registered "Registering the Smart Immobilizer".
mobile key (access key), wait approximately one • When a mobile key (AccessKey) has been lost,
second until the immobilizer warning lamp starts perform "Delete the Mobile Key (AccessKey) ID".
flashing. Then try to start the engine again with When all mobile keys (AccessKey) have been
the registered mobile key (access key). lost, refer to "Keyless access with push button
• Do not place a PC within 10cm around mobile start system: Correspondence table at the time of
keys (access keys) and receiver antennas to parts failure".
avoid any malfunctions of the keyless access with • There is a possibility that registry fails due to poor
push button start system. connector coupling of cabin antenna. In such
case, please repair electrical contacts of keyless
NOTE: access indoor antenna (front) before performing
• The keyless access with push button start system immobilizer registry. Keyless access indoor an-
is not equipped with some vehicles, depending tenna (front) is the only antenna used in immobi-
on the specifications, for North America, Austral- lizer registry.
ia, and some other areas.
• Carry out the "Registering the Smart Immobilizer’
procedure in case you replace a mobile key (ac-
Registering the Smart Immobilizer
cess key), collation ECM, body integrated module You can get the immobilizer registered for vehicles
or a combination meter. equipped with keyless access with push button start
• In case of replacing a steering lock ECM, execute system.
the "Registering the Smart ECM" procedure. 1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
• When replacing the ID code box, "Registering the [DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and
Engine ECM" and "Registering the Smart ECM" then press the [ENT] key.
must be performed in this order.
• In case of replacing an engine ECM, execute the
"Registering the Engine ECM" procedure.
• Immobilizer registration is NOT necessary when
a power supply ECM or a gateway ECM is re-
placed.
• When turning the ignition on, press the push en- SMU-00513
gine switch (push-button ignition switch) twice
without stepping on the brake pedal. Power sup-
ply status changes to ACC-ON, IG-ON, OFF,
ACC-ON accordingly, as pressing the push en-
gine switch (push-button ignition switch) once.
• At the time of engine start, press the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch) once with the
brake pedal depressed in case of an AT vehicle.
In case of an MT vehicle, press the push engine

229
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-

pear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {IMM
regist.}, and then press the [ENT] key. To return
to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C] key or se-
lect {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.
SMU-00950

6. The registration mode selection screen appears.

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {Smrt
Immobi Reg}, and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00746

3. Press the [ENT] key if the system selection

screen is displayed.

SMU-00951

7. In response to the registration mode confirmation

screen that appears, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00949

NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless SMU-00952
access with push button start system. Press the
[ENT] key. 8. Input the security ID and then press the [ENT]
key.

SMU-00947
SMU-00953
NOTE:
The term [Smart system] that appears on this 9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated.
screen is synonymous with the term [keyless ac-
cess with push button start system] used in this text.
5. Input the teaching operation code, and then press
the [ENT] key. Press [C] key to return to the Menu
Selection screen.
NOTE: SMU-00954
The [UP] and [DOWN] keys allow to input numbers.
The [RIGHT] and [LEFT] keys allow to move over
digits of number.

230
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

10.Wait until the smart immobilizer is then being

registered.

SMU-00957

NOTE:
SMU-00955
• When the buzzer has sounded twice, the work of
11.The dialog box to confirm already registered mo- holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up has been
bile keys (access keys) appears. Hold one of completed, but for 10 seconds after the work, the
those mobile keys (access keys) over the push mobile key (AccessKey) should be kept inside the
engine switch (push-button ignition switch). vehicle (near the select lever).
After the buzzer sounds once, move the mobile • For registration of the next mobile key (Access-
key (AccessKey) away from the push engine Key), the previously registered mobile key (Ac-
switch (push-button ignition switch) and go to the cessKey) should be removed from the vehicle.
next step. • Do not press the [C] key until you finish register-
ing all of the mobile keys (access keys).
• The procedure to hold a mobile key (access key)
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) has to be done within 30 seconds after
the screen above appears.
13.Stand by as the mobile key (access key) is being
SMU-00956 registered.
NOTE:
• When holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up to
the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch), bring the mobile key (AccessKey) close
to the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) as shown below.
SMU-00955
1) Let the mechanical key insertion opening of
the mobile key (AccessKey) face down. 14.Once the registration ends normally, the [Regis-
2) Hold the Subaru ornament side to the push en- tered No.] increases by one as you can see on
gine switch (push-button ignition switch) side. the screen below.
3) Bring it close until it touches the push engine If you have another mobile key (access key) to be
switch (push-button ignition switch). registered, repeat steps 12 through 13. If you do
• The procedure to hold a mobile key (access key) not have any more mobile keys (access keys) to
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition be registered, press the [C] key and advance to
switch) has to be done within 30 seconds after step 15.
the screen above appears.
12.When screen displays mobile key (access key)
registration mode shown below, hold one mobile
key (access key) you wish to register additionally
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch).
SMU-00958

231
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

15.Once following screen appears, turn the push Registering the Smart ECM
engine switch (push-button ignition switch) off. You can get smart-related ECM registered in the
Then open or close the vehicle's door, depending keyless access with push button start system.
on its status.
1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and
then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00959

16.Then following screen appears. Turn the ignition

on. SMU-00513

2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-

pear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {IMM
regist.}, and then press the [ENT] key. To return
to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C] key or se-
lect {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.
SMU-00960

17.Stand by as the registration to the engine ECM

is being completed.

SMU-00746

3. Press the [ENT] key if the system selection

screen is displayed.
SMU-00961

18.The screen shown below will appear if registra-

tion ends normally. Press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00949

NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
SMU-00962

19.After confirming that the keyless access with

push button start system is operating normally,
quit the registration operation.
NOTE:
Depending on the replacement part, a different
screen from the screen shown in this item may be
displayed. In such a case, perform the work follow-
ing the on-screen instructions.

232
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless

access with push button start system. Press the
[ENT] key.

SMU-00964

8. Input the security ID and then press the [ENT]

key.
SMU-00947

NOTE:
The term [Smart system] that appears on this
screen is synonymous with the term [keyless ac-
cess with push button start system] used in this text.
5. Input the teaching operation code, and then press SMU-00953
the [ENT] key. Press [C] key to return to the Menu
Selection screen. 9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated.
NOTE:
The [UP] and [DOWN] keys allow to input numbers.
The [RIGHT] and [LEFT] keys allow to move over
digits of number.

SMU-00954

10.Wait until the smart ECM is then being regis-

tered.

SMU-00950

6. The registration mode selection screen appears.

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {Smrt
ECM Reg}, and then press the [ENT] key.
SMU-00955

SMU-00963

7. In response to the registration mode confirmation

screen that appears, press the [ENT] key.

233
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

11.The dialog box to confirm already registered mo- Registering the Engine ECM
bile keys (access keys) appears. Hold one of You can get engine ECM registered in the keyless
those mobile keys (access keys) over the push access with push button start system.
engine switch (push-button ignition switch).
After the buzzer sounds once, move the mobile 1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
key (AccessKey) away from the push engine [DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and
switch (push-button ignition switch) and go to the then press the [ENT] key.
next step.

SMU-00513

SMU-00956
2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-
NOTE: pear. Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select
• When holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up to {IMM regist.}, and then press the [ENT] key. To
the push engine switch (push-button ignition return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C] key
switch), bring the mobile key (AccessKey) close or select {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.
to the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) as shown below.
1) Let the mechanical key insertion opening of
the mobile key (AccessKey) face down.
2) Hold the Subaru ornament side to the push en-
gine switch (push-button ignition switch) side.
3) Bring it close until it touches the push engine SMU-00746
switch (push-button ignition switch).
3. Press the [ENT] key if the system selection
• The procedure to hold a mobile key (access key)
screen is displayed.
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) has to be done within 30 seconds after
the screen above appears.
12.Smart ECM registration is then automatically ex-
ecuted. When the registration ends normally, the
following screen appears. Press the [ENT] key.
SMU-00949

NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
access with push button start system. Press the
SMU-00965 [ENT] key.
13.After confirming that the keyless access with
push button start system is operating normally,
quit the registration operation.

SMU-00947

234
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

NOTE: 9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated.

The term [Smart system] that appears on this
screen is synonymous with the term [keyless ac-
cess with push button start system] used in this text.
5. Input the teaching operation code, and then press
the [ENT] key. Press [C] key to return to the Menu
Selection screen.
SMU-00954
NOTE:
The [UP] and [DOWN] keys allow to input numbers. 10.Wait until the engine ECM is then being regis-
The [RIGHT] and [LEFT] keys allow to move over tered.
digits of number.

SMU-00968

SMU-00950 11.The screen shown below will appear if registra-

tion ends normally. Press the [ENT] key.
6. The registration mode selection screen appears.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {E/G
ECM Reg}, and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00962

12.After the screen shown below appears, wait until

SMU-00966 the Initial Menu screen shows up again.
7. In response to the registration mode confirmation
screen that appears, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00969

13.After confirming that the keyless access with

SMU-00967 push button start system is operating normally,
quit the registration operation.
8. Input the security ID and then press the [ENT]
key.

SMU-00953

235
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

Readout the Number of Mobile Key

(Access Key) Registration
The number of mobile keys (access keys) currently
registered on the vehicle can be read.
1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and SMU-00947
then press the [ENT] key.
NOTE:
The term [Smart system] that appears on this
screen is synonymous with the term [keyless ac-
cess with push button start system] used in this text.
5. Input the teaching operation code, and then press
the [ENT] key. Press [C] key to return to the Menu
SMU-00513 Selection screen.
2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap- NOTE:
pear. The [UP] and [DOWN] keys allow to input numbers.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {IMM The [RIGHT] and [LEFT] keys allow to move over
regist.}, and then press the [ENT] key. To return digits of number.
to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C] key or se-
lect {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00950

SMU-00746 6. The registration mode selection screen appears.

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {R/O
3. Press the [ENT] key if the system selection No. Key Reg}, and then press the [ENT] key.
screen is displayed.

SMU-00970
SMU-00949
7. On the mobile key (access key) registration
NOTE: number display mode confirmation screen that
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K. appears, press the [ENT] key.
4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
access with push button start system. Press the
[ENT] key.

SMU-00971

236
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

8. The number of mobile keys (access keys) cur- 3. Press the [ENT] key if the system selection
rently registered will be displayed. After pressing screen is displayed.
the [ENT] key, the screen will return to the Initial
Menu screen.

SMU-00949

SMU-00972
NOTE:
Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
Delete the Mobile Key (Access 4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
Key) ID access with push button start system. Press the
Unnecessary mobile key (access key) ID registered [ENT] key.
on the keyless access with push button start system
can be deleted. In this procedure, the necessary ID
will not be deleted.
NOTE:
You cannot delete all of mobile key (access key) ID
by this function. The ID of a mobile key (access key) SMU-00947
placed over the push engine switch (push-button ig-
nition switch) will not be deleted. NOTE:
1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and The term [Smart system] that appears on this
[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and screen is synonymous with the term [keyless ac-
then press the [ENT] key. cess with push button start system] used in this text.
5. Input the teaching operation code, and then press
the [ENT] key. Press [C] key to return to the Menu
Selection screen.
NOTE:
The [UP] and [DOWN] keys allow to input numbers.
The [RIGHT] and [LEFT] keys allow to move over
SMU-00513
digits of number.
2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-
pear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {IMM
regist.}, and then press the [ENT] key. To return
to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C] key or se-
lect {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.
SMU-00950

SMU-00746

237
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

6. The registration mode selection screen appears. 11.As the number of registered mobile keys (access
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {Delete keys) confirmation screen will be displayed, place
key ID}, and then press the [ENT] key. one of the registered mobile keys (access keys),
the key, which you do not want to delete the ID,
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch).
After the buzzer sounds once, move the mobile
key (AccessKey) away from the push engine
switch (push-button ignition switch) and go to the
SMU-00973 next step.

7. On the mobile key (access key) ID deletion mode

confirmation screen that appears, press the
[ENT] key.

SMU-00977

NOTE:
• The ID of a mobile key (access key) placed over
SMU-00974 the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) will only be left.
8. Input the security ID and then press the [ENT] • When holding the mobile key (AccessKey) up to
key. the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch), bring the mobile key (AccessKey) close
to the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) as shown below.
1) Let the mechanical key insertion opening of
the mobile key (AccessKey) face down.
2) Hold the Subaru ornament side to the push en-
SMU-00953 gine switch (push-button ignition switch) side.
3) Bring it close until it touches the push engine
9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated. switch (push-button ignition switch).
• The procedure to hold a mobile key (access key)
over the push engine switch (push-button ignition
switch) has to be done within 30 seconds after
the screen above appears.
12.The screen shown below will appear if mobile
SMU-00975 key (access key) ID deletion ends normally.
Press the [ENT] key.
10.Wait until the mobile key (access key) ID is then
being deleted.

SMU-00978

SMU-00976

238
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

13.Complete this procedure after confirming if the NOTE:

keyless access with push button start system Audio System is the specification only for the U.K.
works properly by using a mobile key (access
4. On the next screen, confirm the system is keyless
key), which has the ID not deleted.
access with push button start system. Press the
[ENT] key.
Registering the Remote Control
Engine Starter
You can get remote control engine starter regis-
tered in the keyless access with push button start
system.
NOTE:
SMU-00947
Remote control engine starter is the specification
only for the Japan. NOTE:
1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and The term [Smart system] that appears on this
[DOWN] keys to select {SUBARU Vehicle}, and screen is synonymous with the term [keyless ac-
then press the [ENT] key. cess with push button start system] used in this text.
5. Input the teaching operation code, and then press
the [ENT] key. Press [C] key to return to the Menu
Selection screen.
NOTE:
The [UP] and [DOWN] keys allow to input numbers.
SMU-00513 The [RIGHT] and [LEFT] keys allow to move over
digits of number.
2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-
pear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {IMM
regist.}, and then press the [ENT] key. To return
to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C] key or se-
lect {Exit} and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00950

6. The registration mode selection screen appears.

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select {R/C E/
G ST Reg}, and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00746

3. Press the [ENT] key if the system selection

screen is displayed.

SMU-00979

SMU-00949

239
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

7. In response to the registration mode confirmation 12.After confirming that the keyless access with
screen that appears, press the [ENT] key. push button start system and remote control en-
gine starter is operating normally, quit the regis-
tration operation.

Configuring SDI Functions

1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select {Function Setup}, and
SMU-00980 then press the [ENT] key.
8. Input the security ID and then press the [ENT]
key.

SMU-00514

2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap-

SMU-00953 pear.
9. Stand by as the security ID is being collated. Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the de-
sired item, and then press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C]
key.

SMU-00954

10.Wait until the remote control engine starter is

then being registered.
SMU-00452

1) Setting the Date and Time

This item provides a means for configuring the date
and time setting of the SDI built-in clock.
(1) On the Menu Selection screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select {Date and Time}, and
SMU-00955
then press the [ENT] key.
11.The screen shown below will appear if remote
control engine starter registration ends normally.
Press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00452

SMU-00981

240
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

(2) This displays the DATE AND TIME screen. The NOTE:
following setting items are displayed from left to The display language is set to English regardless of
right: <Month>, <Day>, <Year>, <Hour>, the preset language when the SDI power is turned
<Minute>, <Second>. Use the [LEFT] and on with the [C] key of the SDI held down.
[RIGHT] keys to select the desired item, and
3) Selecting Measurement Units
then use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to change
This item specifies the numeric unit for values dis-
the selected setting.
played on SDI screens.
After configuring the settings, press the [ENT]
key. (1) On the Menu Selection screen, use the [UP] and
To cancel the setting procedure, press the [DOWN] keys to select {Unit Selection}, and
[MENU] key. then press the [ENT] key.

NOTE:
The day of the week setting is configured automati-
cally in accordance with the date that set.

SMU-00467

(2) This causes the Unit Selection screen to appear.

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the de-
sired measurement item, and then use the
SMU-00352 [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to change its meas-
urement unit. Finally press the [ENT] key.
2) Selecting a User Language
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press
This item can be used to select the display lan-
the [C] key.
guage for SDI screens.
(1) On the Menu Selection screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select {User Language}, and
then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00454

4) Adjusting Display Contrast

The contrast of the LCD can be adjusted to make its
SMU-00466 contents easier to view.
(2) This causes the Language Selection screen to (1) On the Menu Selection screen, use the [UP] and
appear. Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to se- [DOWN] keys to select {LCD Contrast}, and then
lect the desired language, and then press the press the [ENT] key.
[ENT] key.
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press
the [C] key.

SMU-00468

SMU-00453

241
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

(2) This causes the LCD CONTRAST screen to ap- NOTE:

pear. • Selecting OFF turns off the LCD backlight.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to adjust display • Selecting FOREVER keeps the LCD backlight
contrast to the desired level, and then press the turned on.
[ENT] key.
6) Turning Key Press Beep On and Off
To cancel the setting or to return to the Menu This setting turns the SDI key operation confirma-
Selection screen, press the [MENU] key. tion buzzer on and off.
NOTE: (1) On the Menu Selection screen, use the [UP] and
You can check display contrast by pressing the [DOWN] keys to select {Key Press Beep}, and
[TRG] key on the keypad to turn off the LCD back- then press the [ENT] key.
light. To turn the LCD backlight back on, press the
[TRG] key again.

SMU-00470

(2) This causes the KEY-PRESS BEEP screen to

SMU-00355 appear.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select on or
5) Setting the Backlight Time
off for the key press beep, and then press the
The LCD backlight turns off automatically if no SDI
[ENT] key.
operation is performed for a preset period. This set-
ting specifies length of time of the preset period. To cancel the setting or to return to the Menu
Selection screen, press the [MENU] key.
(1) On the Menu Selection screen, use the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys to select {LCD Back Light}, and
then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00356

7) Setting the Self-Shutoff Time

SMU-00469 This item provides a means for configuring the SDI
(2) This displays the BACKLIGHT TIME screen. self-shutoff time setting.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to change the (1) On the Menu Selection screen, use the [UP] and
backlight time setting, and then press the [ENT] [DOWN] keys to select {Self Shut}, and then
key. press the [ENT] key.
To cancel the setting or to return to the Menu
Selection screen, press the [MENU] key.

SMU-00471

SMU-00354

242
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

(2) This displays the SELFSHUT TIME screen. NOTE:

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to change the Take the required corrective measures immediately
time setting to shut off SDI power automatically, if you discover an abnormality when using SDI self-
and then press the [ENT] key. diagnosis.
To cancel the setting or to return to the Menu
Selection screen, press the [MENU] key. LCD CHECK
The items on this screen can be used to check the
LCD dots, draw area, contrast, and backlight.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the desired
item, and then press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the
[C] key.
SMU-00353

NOTE:
Selecting OFF turns off the SDI self shutdown fea-
ture.
Note that turning off SDI self shutdown runs the risk
of running down the vehicle’s battery. SMU-00456

1.LCD DOT CHECK

Performing SDI Self-diagnosis This item checks LCD dots. Press any key on the
1. On the Initial Menu screen, use the [UP] and key pad.
[DOWN] keys to select {Self Check}, and then
press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00521

This causes the black and white areas of the display

SMU-00515
to flash alternately, which makes it possible to
2. This causes the Menu Selection screen to ap- check whether LCD dots turn on and off normally.
pear. An LCD dot is defective if a black dot remains black
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the de- within a white area, or if a white dot remains white
sired item, and then press the [ENT] key. within a black area.
After checking LCD dots, press the [ENT] key.
To return to the Initial Menu screen, press the [C]
key.

SMU-00326

SMU-00455

243
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

2. LCD AREA CHECK MAIN LED CHECK

This item checks the LCD draw area. Press any key The items on this screen can be used to check if the
on the key pad. SIG LED of the SDI lights or flashes red or green in
accordance with the status of the SDI. This check
confirms the operational status of the SIG LED.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the desired
item on the Menu Selection screen, and then press
the [ENT] key.
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the
SMU-00522
[C] key.
Confirm that a black border appears on all four
sides of the display, and then press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00457

1. MAIN LED (Green) CHECK

SMU-00328
After confirming that the SIG LED repeats a pattern
3. LCD CONTRAST CHECK of four green flashes followed by 10 seconds of
This item checks whether LCD display contrast can steady green lighting, press the [ENT] key.
be adjusted. Pressing the [UP] key makes LCD con-
trast darker, while the [DOWN] key makes LCD con-
trast lighter.
After checking whether contrast can be adjusted,
press the [ENT] key.
NOTE: SMU-00332
You can check display contrast without backlighting
by pressing the [TRG] key on the keypad to turn off 2. MAIN LED (Red) CHECK
the LCD backlight. To turn the LCD backlight back After confirming that the SIG LED repeats a pattern
on, press the [TRG] key again. of four red flashes followed by 10 seconds of steady
red lighting, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00329 SMU-00333

4. LCD BACKLIGHT CHECK

After checking the LCD backlight, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00330

244
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

REMOTE LED CHECK KEY IN CHECK

The items on this screen can be used to check if the This item checks SDI keypad operation.
LED on the driving recorder remote box lights or Key names appear on the display in the following
flashes green or red. This check confirms the oper- sequence: UP → DOWN → RIGHT → LEFT → ENT
ational status of the SIG LED. → TRG → C → MENU.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the desired Key operation is normal if the next key operation
item on the Remote LED Check screen, and then prompt screen appears when you press a key other
press the [ENT] key. than [MENU].
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the If the check reveals an abnormality, press the
[C] key. [MENU] key to exit the check procedure.

SMU-00458 SMU-00337

1. REMOTE LED (Green) CHECK REMOTE SWITCH CHECK

After confirming that the LED repeats a pattern of
1. This item checks operation of the trigger (TRG)
four green flashes followed by 10 seconds of steady
green lighting, press the [ENT] key. switch, which is a driving recorder remote box.
To check operation of the trigger switch, press
the [ENT] key.

SMU-00335

2. REMOTE LED (Red) CHECK

SMU-00459
After confirming that the LED repeats a pattern of
four green flashes followed by 10 seconds of steady 2. Operate the trigger switch as instructed by the
green lighting, press the [ENT] key. messages that appear on the display. If “CHECK
OK!” or “CHECK NG!” appears, press the [ENT]
key.
To return to the SELF CHECK screen, press the
[MENU] key.

SMU-00336

SMU-00339

245
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

BEEP CHECK RAM CHECK

This item checks the frequency and the volume of This item executes a SDI self-check of the SDI built-
the SDI buzzer. Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to in RAM, and displays the result.
select the desired item on the beep check screen, When completion of the self-diagnosis is indicated
and then press the [ENT] key. by “CHECK OK!” or “CHECK NG” on the display,
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the press the [ENT] key.
[C] key.

SMU-00343
SMU-00460
ROM CHECK
1. BEEP FREQUENCY CHECK
This item executes an SDI self-check of the SDI
This item can be used to check buzzer operation
built-in ROM, and displays the result.
and the buzzer frequency.
Check the display after the self-check is complete.
Selecting it displays the current buzzer frequency
ROM is normal if the hexadecimal values that ap-
setting. Press the [UP] key to raise the buzzer fre-
pear under “WrSUM” and “CalSUM” on the display
quency, or the [DOWN] key to lower the buzzer fre-
are identical.
quency.
After checking ROM, press the [ENT] key.
After checking the buzzer frequency, press the
[ENT] key. NOTE:
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to scroll screen con-
tents.

SMU-00341

2. BEEP VOLUME CHECK

This item can be used to check buzzer operation SMU-00344
and adjust its volume.
Selecting this item displays the current buzzer vol- VERSION CHECK
ume level. Press the [UP] key to increase buzzer This item provides a means for checking the SDI
volume, or the [DOWN] key to decrease buzzer vol- software version. Make sure the version that ap-
ume. pears during data communication is the same as
After checking the buzzer volume, press the [ENT] the version shown on the version check screen.
key. After checking the version, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00342 SMU-00523

246
 SDI Stand-alone Diagnosis

CLOCK IC CHECK
This item provides a means to check whether the
date and time setting operation of the SDI built-in
clock is correct.
Check to make sure that the year, month, day, day
of the week, hour, minute, and second indicators at
the bottom of the display change to Jan/01/2000
(Sat) 00:00:00.
After checking the clock, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00350

NOW TIME CHECK

This item displays the current date and time setting
of the SDI built-in clock.
To return to the Menu Selection screen, press the
[ENT] key.

SMU-00347

247
 SDI System Menu

SDI System Menu 3. The software version screen will appear on the
display, and then it will be replaced by the system
The SDI System Menu can be used to perform diag-
MENU screen.
nosis of SDI LCD, LED, keypad, and buzzer opera-
tion, and self-diagnosis of SDI memory. This menu Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the de-
also can be used to configure the settings of the SDI sired item, and then press the [ENT] key.
built-in clock, the self-shutoff time, display bright- To quit the system mode, select [QUIT] on the
ness and contrast, and the key operation confirma- [MENU] screen.
tion buzzer.

Getting Ready (Starting Up the SDI

in the System Mode)
1. Plug the main connector of the diagnosis cable
into the SDI diagnosis communication connector,
SMU-00322
and secure it in place with the two screws.
NOTE:
SDI power may turn off automatically if no SDI op-
eration is performed for a preset period. This is indi-
cated when the PWR LED goes out.
If this happens, hold down the [MENU] key press
the [PWR] key while holding down the [MENU] key
to turn the SDI back on.

SELF CHECK (SDI Self-check)

Selecting {SELFCHECK} on the MENU screen
SMU-00113 causes the SELF CHECK MENU to appear on the
display. Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select
2. After pressing the SDI [MENU] key, plug the ve- the desired item, and then press the [ENT] key.
hicle connector of the diagnosis cable into the ve- To return to the system MENU screen, press the
hicle data link connector, and then check to make [MENU] key.
sure that the PWR LED of the SDI lights.
NOTE:
SDI power will turn on automatically when the diag-
nosis cable is connected to the vehicle. If the PWR
LED of the SDI does not light, turn on the vehicle’s
ignition switch or start the engine, and then check if
SMU-00323
the PWR LED lights when you press the SDI [PWR]
key while holding down the SDI [MENU] key. NOTE:
Take the required repair immediately, if you discov-
er an abnormality when using SDI self-diagnosis.

248
 SDI System Menu

LCD CHECK 2. LCD AREA CHECK

The LCD CHECK items provide tools for checking This item checks the LCD draw area. Press any key
the display for defective LCD dots, and the draw ar- on the key pad.
ea, contrast, and the backlight of the LCD.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the desired
item on the LCD CHECK screen, and then press the
[ENT] key.
To return to the SELF CHECK screen, press the
[MENU] key.
SMU-00522

Check to make sure that a black border appears

along the four edges of the display.
After checking the LCD draw area, press the [ENT]
key.
SMU-00324

1. LCD DOT CHECK

This item checks the display for defective LCD dots.
Press any key on the key pad.

SMU-00328

3. LCD CONT CHECK

This item adjusts the contrast of the LCD display.
Pressing the [UP] key makes LCD contrast darker,
while the [DOWN] key makes LCD contrast lighter.
SMU-00521
After checking the LCD contrast, press the [ENT]
This causes the black and white areas of the display key.
to flash alternately, which makes it possible to NOTE:
check whether LCD dots turn on and off normally. You can check display contrast by pressing the
An LCD dot is defective if a black dot remains black [TRG] key on the keypad to turn off the LCD back-
within a white area, or if a white dot remains white light. To turn the LCD backlight back on, press the
within a black area. [TRG] key again.
After checking the LCD dots, press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00326 SMU-00329

249
 SDI System Menu

4. LCD BACKLIGHT CHECK 2. LED RED CHECK

This item checks whether the LCD backlight is lit. This item checks whether the SIG LED repeats a
After checking the LCD backlight, press the [ENT] pattern of four red flashes followed by 10 seconds
key. of steady red lighting.
After checking the main LED (red), press the [ENT]
key.

SMU-00330

MAIN LED CHECK SMU-00333

This item checks if the SIG LED lights or flashes red
or green in accordance with the status of the SDI. REMO LED CHECK
This check confirms the operational status of the This item checks if the SIGNAL LED on the driving
SIG LED. recorder remote box lights, or flashes green or red.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the desired This check confirms the operational status of the
item on the MAIN LED CHECK screen, and then SIGNAL LED.
press the [ENT] key. Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the desired
To return to the SELF CHECK screen, press the item on the REMO LED CHECK screen, and then
[MENU] key. press the [ENT] key.
To return to the SELF CHECK screen, press the
[MENU] key.

SMU-00331

1. LED GREEN CHECK SMU-00334

This item checks whether the SIG LED repeats a
pattern of four green flashes followed by 10 sec- 1. LED GREEN CHECK
onds of steady green lighting. This item checks whether the SIGNAL LED repeats
After checking the main LED (green), press the a pattern of four green flashes followed by 10 sec-
[ENT] key. onds of steady green lighting.
After checking the remote control LED (green),
press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00332

SMU-00335

250
 SDI System Menu

2. LED RED CHECK To return to the [SELF CHECK] screen, press the
This item checks whether the SIGNAL LED repeats [MENU] key.
a pattern of four red flashes followed by 10 seconds
of steady red lighting.
After checking the remote control LED (green),
press the [ENT] key.

SMU-00339

BEEP CHECK
This item checks the frequency and the volume of
SMU-00336 the SDI buzzer.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select the desired
KEY IN CHECK item on the BEEP CHECK screen, and then press
This item checks for operational defects in the SDI the [ENT] key.
keypad keys. Key names appear on the display in To return to the SELF CHECK screen, press the
the following sequence: UP → DOWN → RIGHT → [MENU] key.
LEFT → ENT → TRG → C → MENU. Press the di-
rected key in order.
If pressing any key besides [MENU] does not switch
to the next keypad key operation screen, press the
[MENU] key to quit.

SMU-00340

1. BEEP FREQ CHECK

This item can be used to check buzzer operation
and adjust its frequency.
SMU-00337
Selecting it displays the current buzzer frequency
setting.
REMOTE SW CHECK Press the [UP] key to raise the buzzer frequency, or
the [DOWN] key to lower the buzzer frequency.
This item checks operation of the TRIGGER switch
After checking the buzzer frequency, press the
of the driving recorder remote box.
[ENT] key.
To check operation of the TRIGGER switch, press
the [ENT] key.

SMU-00341

SMU-00338

Operate the TRIGGER switch as instructed by the

messages that appear on the display.
The check is complete when “CHECK OK!” appears
on the display. Press the [ENT] key.

251
 SDI System Menu

2. BEEP VOL CHECK VERSION CHECK

This item can be used to check buzzer operation This item provides a means for checking the SDI
and adjust its volume. software version.
Selecting this item displays the current buzzer vol- Make sure that the version that appears during data
ume level. communication is the same as the version shown
Press the [UP] key to increase buzzer volume, or on the version check screen.
the [DOWN] key to decrease buzzer volume. After checking the version check, press the [ENT]
After checking the buzzer volume, press the [ENT] key.
key.

SMU-00523
SMU-00342
RTC TIMER CHECK
RAM CHECK This item provides a means to check whether the
This item executes a SDI self-check of the SDI built- date and time setting operation of the SDI built-in
in RAM, and displays the result. clock is normal.
When completion of the self-diagnosis is indicated Check to make sure that the year, month, day, day
by “CHECK OK!” or “CHECK NG” on the display, of the week, hour, minute, and second indicators in
press the [ENT] key. the figure below change to Jan/01/2000 (Sat)
00:00:00.
After checking the SDI built-in clock IC, press the
[ENT] key.

SMU-00343

ROM CHECK
This item executes a SDI self-check of the SDI built- SMU-00350
in ROM, and displays the result.
Check the display after the self-check is complete. NOW TIME CHECK
ROM is normal if the hexadecimal values that ap- This item displays the current date and time setting
pear under “WrSUM” and “CalSUM” on the display of the SDI built-in clock.
are identical. To return to the SELF CHECK screen, press the
After checking the ROM check, press the [ENT] key. [MENU] key.
NOTE:
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to scroll screen con-
tents.

SMU-00347

SMU-00344

252
 SDI System Menu

VERSION CHECK NOTE:

Selecting {VERSION CHECK} on the MENU screen The day of the week setting is configured automati-
causes the SDI software version screen to appear cally in accordance with the date that set.
on the display.
To return to the system MENU screen, press the
[ENT] key.

SMU-00352

SELFSHUT TIME
SMU-00523 This item provides a means for configuring the SDI
self-shutoff time setting.
FUNCTION SETUP (SDI Function While viewing the display screen “TIME” item, use
Setup) the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to configure the setting.
Selecting {FUNCTION SETUP} on the MENU
NOTE:
screen causes the FUNCTION SETUP screen to
Selecting OFF turns off the SDI self-shutoff feature.
appear on the display. Use the [UP] and [DOWN]
Note that turning off SDI self-shutoff runs the risk of
keys to select the desired item, and then press the
running down the vehicle’s battery.
[ENT] key.
To return to the system MENU screen, press the After configuring the settings, press the [ENT] key.
[MENU] key. To cancel the setting procedure, press the [MENU]
key.

SMU-00351
SMU-00353
DATE AND TIME
This item provides a means for configuring the date BACKLIGHT TIME
and time setting of the SDI built-in clock. The LCD backlight turns off automatically if no oper-
Use the [RIGHT] and [LEFT] keys to move to the ation of SDI keys is performed for a preset period.
desired setting, and then use the [UP] and [DOWN] This setting specifies length of time of the preset pe-
keys to configure the setting as desired. riod.
After configuring the settings, press the [ENT] key. While viewing the display screen “TIME” item, use
To cancel the setting procedure, press the [MENU] the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to configure the setting.
key.
NOTE:
• Selecting OFF keeps the LCD backlight turned
off.
• Selecting FOREVER keeps the LCD backlight
turned on.

253
 SDI System Menu

After configuring the settings, press the [ENT] key.

To cancel the setting procedure, press the [MENU]
key.

SMU-00354

LCD CONTRAST
The contrast of the LCD can be adjusted to make its
contents easier to view.
Pressing the [UP] key makes LCD contrast darker,
while the [DOWN] key makes LCD contrast lighter.
After configuring the contrast setting, press the
[ENT] key.
To cancel the setting procedure, press the [MENU]
key.
NOTE:
You can check display contrast by pressing the
[TRG] key on the keypad to turn off the LCD back-
light. To turn the LCD backlight back on, press the
[TRG] key again.

SMU-00355

KEY-PRESS BEEP
This setting turns the SDI key operation confirma-
tion buzzer on and off.
While viewing the display screen “BEEP” item, use
the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to configure buzzer ON/
OFF setting.
After configuring the settings, press the [ENT] key.
To cancel the setting procedure, press the [MENU]
key.

SMU-00356

254
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

List of Contents on Displayed Data

NOTE:
Items and contents of data displayed on the screen may differ from this list due to models, specifications and
upgrading of the SUBARU select monitor ΙΙΙ and/or vehicles.

Engine
No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks
1 Engine Load % Current air volume ratio if the fully
opened air volume in the present en-
gine speed is 100%.
2 Coolant Temp. °C Value calculated from the output val-
°F ue of the engine coolant temperature
sensor.
3 A/F Correction #1 % Main correction value for A/F feed-
back control (bank 1)
4 A/F Learning #1 % Main learning value for A/F feedback
control (bank 1)
5 A/F Correction #2 % Main correction value for A/F feed-
back control (bank 2)
6 A/F Learning #2 % Main learning value for A/F feedback
control (bank 2)
7 Mani. Absolute Pressure kPa Pressure value calculated from the
mmHg manifold absolute pressure sensor
inHg (absolute value)
psig
8 Engine Speed rpm Calculated from the crankshaft posi-
tion sensor signal.
9 Vehicle Speed km/h Value calculated from the output val-
MPH ue of the vehicle speed sensor.
10 Ignition Timing deg Ignition timing control value of the
engine ECM.
11 Intake Air Temp. °C Intake air temperature calculated
°F from the output value of the intake
air temperature sensor.
12 Mass Air Flow g/s Mass air flow calculated from the
lb/m output value of the air flow sensor.
13 Throttle Opening Angle % Throttle opening angle calculated
from the output value of the throttle
position sensor.
14 Front O2 Sensor #1 V Output value of the front O2 sensor
(bank 1). Input value to the engine
ECM.

255
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

15 Rear O2 Sensor V Output value to the rear O2 sensor.
Input value to the engine ECM.
16 Front O2 Sensor #2 V Output value of the front O2 sensor
(bank 2). Input value to the engine
ECM.
17 Battery Voltage V Battery voltage. Input value to the
engine ECM.
18 Air Flow Sensor Voltage V Output value of the air flow sensor.
Input value to the engine ECM.
19 Throttle Sensor Voltage V Output value of the throttle position
sensor. Input value to the engine
ECM.
20 Diff. Press. Sen. Vol. V Output value of the pressure differ- This item is applied
ence sensor detecting the difference only to twin turbo mod-
between primary and secondary el.
charging pressure.
21 Fuel Injection #1 Pulse ms Control value for the fuel injection
period from the engine ECM (bank
1).
22 Fuel Injection #2 Pulse ms Control value for the fuel injection
period from the engine ECM (bank
2).
23 Knocking Correction deg Retard amount when knocking has
occurred. Partial learned value of the
learned ignition timing.
24 Atmosphere Pressure kPa Atmospheric pressure calculated
mmHg from the output value of the atmos-
inHg pheric pressure sensor.
psig
25 Mani. Relative Pressure kPa Value of manifold absolute pressure
mmHg minus atmosphere pressure. [Mani-
inHg fold absolute pressure - Atmosphere
psig pressure]
26 Pressure Diff. Sensor kPa Pressure difference calculated by This item is applied
mmHg subtracting the pressure difference only to twin turbo mod-
inHg between primary and secondary el.
psig charging pressure from the detected
output value of the pressure differ-
ence sensor. Differential pressure =
(Secondary pressure) - (Primary
pressure)
27 Fuel Tank Pressure kPa Pressure in the fuel tank. Pressure This item is applied
mmHg calculated from the output value of only to North American
inHg the fuel tank pressure sensor. models.
psig

256
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

28 CO Adjustment V The front O2 sensor cannot be used
in areas using leaded gasoline. As
this causes open control, the correc-
tion value has been established to
provide central control as far as pos-
sible for the initial air-fuel ratio. Ad-
justment can be made while
confirming the CO value.
29 Learned Ignition Timinig deg Advance or retard amount when
knocking has occurred. (Learned ig-
nition timing)
30 Accel. Opening Angle % Accelerator pedal opening angle ra-
tio calculated from the output value
of the accelerator position sensor.
31 Fuel Temp. °C Fuel temperature calculated from This item is applied
°F the output value of the fuel tempera- only to North American
ture sensor. models.
32 Front O2 Heater #1 A Current value of the front O2 sensor
heater. Control value of the engine
ECM.
33 Rear O2 Heater Current A Current value of the rear O2 sensor
heater. Control value of the engine
ECM.
34 Front O2 Heater #2 A Current value of the front O2 sensor
heater. Control value of the engine
ECM.
35 Fuel Level V Output value of the fuel level sensor.
Engine ECM input value. Total value
of main and sub.
36 Radiator Fan Control % Radiator fan control duty ratio. Con- This item is applied
trol of the radiator fan control unit. only to H6 model.
Output value of the engine ECM.
37 Primary Control % Primary charging pressure control This item is applied
signal. Control duty ratio of the only to turbo model.
charging pressure control solenoid
valve. Output value of the engine
ECM.
38 Secondary Control % Secondary charging pressure con- This item is applied
trol signal. Control duty ratio of the only to turbo model.
charging pressure control solenoid
valve. Output value of the engine
ECM.
39 CPC Valve Duty Ratio % CPC valve control duty ratio. Output
value of the engine ECM.
40 TGV Position Sensor R V Output value of the TGV position
sensor RH. Engine ECM input value.

257
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

41 TGV Position Sensor L V Output value of the TGV position
sensor LH. Engine ECM input value.
42 ISC Valve Duty Ratio % ISC valve control duty ratio. Output
value of the engine ECM.
43 A/F Lean Correction % Sometimes the air-fuel ratio inten-
tionally is controlled offset from the
theoretical fuel-air ratio (lean burn
control etc.). Correction value at this
time.
44 A/F Heater Duty % Front O2 sensor heater control duty
ratio. Output value of the engine
ECM.
45 ISC Valve Step STEP ISC valve step number. Stepping
motor step number. Output value of
the engine ECM.
46 No. of EGR steps STEP EGR valve step number. Stepping
motor step number. Output value of
the engine ECM.
47 ALT Duty % Alternator control duty ratio. Output
value of the engine ECM.
48 Fuel Pump Duty % Fuel pump control duty ratio. The
duty ratios for control are 0%, 33%,
66%, and 100%. Output value of the
engine ECM.
49 VVT Adv. Ang. Amount R deg Intake VVT advance amount (bank
1)
50 VVT Adv. Ang. Amount L deg Intake VVT advance amount (bank
2)
51 OCV Duty R % OCV control duty ratio (bank 1). Out-
put value of the engine ECM.
52 OCV Duty L % OCV control duty ratio (bank 2). Out-
put value of the engine ECM.
53 OCV Current R mA OCV actual current value (bank 1).
Engine ECM input value.
54 OCV Current L mA OCV actual current value (bank 2).
Engine ECM input value.
55 A/F Sensor #1 Current mA Output current value of the front A/F
sensor (bank 1). Engine ECM input
value.
56 A/F Sensor #2 Current mA Output current value of the front A/F
sensor (bank 2). Engine ECM input
value.

258
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

57 A/F Sensor #1 Resistance ohm Resistance value of the front A/F
sensor calculated from the output
value of the front A/F sensor (bank
1)
58 A/F Sensor #2 Resistance ohm Resistance value of the front A/F
sensor calculated from the output
value of the front A/F sensor (bank
2)
59 A/F Sensor #1 — Actual lambda value calculated from
the output value of the front A/F sen-
sor (bank 1)
60 A/F Sensor #2 — Actual lambda value calculated from
the output value of the front A/F sen-
sor (bank 2)
61 A/F Correction #3 % Sub-correction value for the A/F
feedback control.
62 A/F Learning #3 % Sub-learned value for the A/F feed-
back control.
63 Rear O2 Heater Voltage V Voltage value of the rear O2 sensor
heater. Output value of the engine
ECM.
64 A/F Adjust Voltage V Value for detecting a front A/F sen-
sor variation. Engine ECM input val-
ue.
65 Gear Position st Present gear position. Input value
from the transmission ECM.
66 A/F Heater Current 1 A Current value of the front A/F sensor
heater (bank 1). Engine ECM input
value.
67 A/F Heater Current 2 A Current value of the front A/F sensor
heater (bank 2). Engine ECM input
value.
68 SUBARU Intelligent Drive I/S/S# Indication of the present “SUBARU
mode Intelligent Drive” setting.
69 Throttle sensor closed V V Voltage value for the fully closed po-
sition of the main throttle position
sensor. Fully closed position learn-
ing.
70 Throttle Motor Duty % Throttle motor control duty ratio.
Output value of the engine ECM.
71 Throttle Motor Voltage V Throttle motor power supply voltage.
Engine ECM input value.

259
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

72 Sub-Throttle Sensor V Voltage value of the sub-throttle po-
sition sensor. Engine ECM input val-
ue.
73 Main-Throttle Sensor V Voltage value of the main throttle po-
sition sensor. Engine ECM input val-
ue.
74 Sub-Accelerator Sensor V Voltage value of the sub accelerator
pedal position sensor. Engine ECM
input value.
75 Main-Accelerator Sensor V Voltage value of the main accelera-
tor pedal position sensor. Engine
ECM input value.
76 Fuel Pressure kPa Fuel pressure. Control value of the
engine ECM.
77 Exhaust Gas Temperature °C Exhaust gas temperature calculated
°F from the output value of the exhaust
temperature sensor.
78 Exhaust Gas Temp. 2 °C Not used
°F
79 Sec. Air Piping Pressure kPa Secondary air piping pressure. En-
mmHg gine ECM input value.
inHg
psig
80 Sec. Air Flow g/s Secondary mass air flow calculated
lb/m from the secondary air piping pres-
sure.
81 Memorized Cruise Speed km/h Target vehicle speed of the cruise
MPH control system (set vehicle speed).
82 A/F Correction #4 % Sub-correction value for A/F feed-
back control (bank 2).
83 A/F Learning #4 % Sub-learned value for A/F feedback
control (bank 2).
84 Fuel level resistance ohm Resistance value of the fuel level
sensor. Engine ECM input value.
85 Odometer km Estimated odometer
86 Fuel tank air presser MPa Used for evaporative system diagno- This item is applied
sis. Measuring of the pressure in the only to North American
fuel tank. models.
87 Oil Temperature °C Oil temperature of the VVL system.
°F Value calculated from the output val-
ue of the oil temperature sensor.
88 OSV Duty R % OSV control duty ratio (bank 1). Out-
put value of the engine ECM.

260
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

89 OSV Duty L % OSV control duty ratio (bank 2). Out-
put value of the engine ECM.
90 OSV Current R mA OSV target current value (bank 1).
Output value of the engine ECM.
91 OSV Current L mA OSV target current value (bank 2).
Output value of the engine ECM.
92 Exh. VVT Retard Ang. R deg Exhaust VVT retard amount (bank
1).
93 Exh. VVT Retard Ang. L deg Exhaust VVT retard amount (bank
2).
94 Exh. OCV Duty R % Exhaust OCV control duty ratio
(bank 1). Output value of the engine
ECM.
95 Exh. OCV Duty L % Exhaust OCV control duty ratio
(bank 2). Output value of the engine
ECM.
96 Exh. OCV Current R mA Exhaust OCV current value (bank 1).
Output value of the engine ECM.
97 Exh. OCV Current L mA Exhaust OCV current value (bank 2).
Output value of the engine ECM.
98 VVL Lift Mode — Display of the VVL control mode.
99 Roughness Monitor #1 — Count value of roughness monitor
#1.
100 Roughness Monitor #2 — Count value of roughness monitor
#2.
101 Roughness Monitor #3 — Count value of roughness monitor
#3.
102 Roughness Monitor #4 — Count value of roughness monitor
#4.
103 Roughness Monitor #5 — Count value of roughness monitor
#5.
104 Roughness Monitor #6 — Count value of roughness monitor
#6.
105 Learned IGN Time Correct deg Value of only the whole learning val-
ue in the ignition timing learning val-
ue.
106 Main Injection Period °CA Controlled value of the main injec- This item is applied
tion period by engine ECM. only to Diesel models.
107 Final Injection Amount mm3/st Total injection amount of multiple in- This item is applied
jections. only to Diesel models.

261
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

108 Number of Times Injected — Number of times injected which cor- This item is applied
responds to running conditions. (this only to Diesel models.
excludes “After-injection” and “Post-
injection”)
109 Target Intake Manifold kPa Target intake manifold pressure of This item is applied
Pressure engine ECM. only to Diesel models.
110 Target Intake Air Amount mg/cyl Target intake air amount of engine This item is applied
ECM. only to Diesel models.
111 Mass Air Flow mg/cyl Intake air amount calculated from This item is applied
the output value of air flow sensor. only to Diesel models.
112 Target EGR Valve Open- % Target EGR valve opening angle of This item is applied
ing Angle engine ECM. only to Diesel models.
113 EGR Valve Opening Angle % EGR valve opening angle calculated This item is applied
from the output of EGR valve open- only to Diesel models.
ing angle sensor.
114 EGR Duty % EGR valve control duty ratio. Output This item is applied
value of engine ECM. only to Diesel models.
115 Target Common Rail Pres- MPa Target common rail pressure of en- This item is applied
sure gine ECM. only to Diesel models.
116 Common rail pressure MPa Pressure within common rail calcu- This item is applied
lated from the output value of com- only to Diesel models.
mon rail pressure sensor.
117 Intake Air Temperature °C Intake air temperature calculated This item is applied
°F from the output value of airflow and only to Diesel models.
intake air temperature sensor.
118 Target engine speed rpm Target engine speed of engine ECM. This item is applied
only to Diesel models.
119 Boost Pressure Feedback % Opening angle corrected in re- This item is applied
sponse to feedback from boost con- only to Diesel models.
trol valve.
120 Electric Power Steering A Current value of electric power This item is applied
Current Value steering. Input value from power only to Diesel models.
steering ECM to engine ECM.
121 Target Fuel Pump Current mA Target current value of suction con- This item is applied
trol valve. Value calculated by en- only to Diesel models.
gine ECM.
122 Actual Fuel Pump Current mA Actual current value of suction con- This item is applied
trol valve. Input value to engine only to Diesel models.
ECM.
123 Mileage after Injector km Mileage after performing injection This item is applied
Learning mile amount learning for fuel injector. only to Diesel models.

262
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

124 Mileage after Injector km Mileage after replacing fuel injectors This item is applied
Learning mile and performing injection amount only to Diesel models.
learning with SSMIII for the new in-
jector.
125 Interior heater Step Number of active PTC heaters This item is applied
0 = all heaters OFF, 1 = 1 heater only to Diesel models.
ON, 2 = 2 heaters ON
126 Cylinder #1 quantity cor- ms Amount of injection corrected for cyl- This item is applied
rection value inder #1 to stabilize idling. only to Diesel models.
127 Cylinder #2 quantity cor- ms Amount of injection corrected for cyl- This item is applied
rection value inder #2 to stabilize idling. only to Diesel models.
128 Cylinder #3 quantity cor- ms Amount of injection corrected for cyl- This item is applied
rection value inder #3 to stabilize idling. only to Diesel models.
129 Cylinder #4 quantity cor- ms Amount of injection corrected for cyl- This item is applied
rection value inder #4 to stabilize idling. only to Diesel models.
130 AT Vehicle ID Signal ON/OFF Signal for identification of the trans-
mission type (AT or MT). “ON” at the
time of AT.
131 Test Mode Signal ON/OFF Display of the connection status of
the test mode connector. “ON” at the
time of connection.
132 Read Memory Signal ON/OFF Display of the connection status of
the read memory connector. “ON”
when connected.
133 D-check Require Flag ON/OFF Turns into ON if it is requested to op-
erate solenoid compulsory drive and
compulsory adjustment function for
engine speed and A/F.
134 Delivery Mode Connector ON/OFF Display of the connection status of
(Test Mode Connector) the delivery mode connector (test
mode connector). ON with connect-
ed status. Engine ECM input value.
135 Clear Memory Terminal ON/OFF Display of the connection status of
the clear memory connector. “ON”
with connected status. Engine ECM
input value.
136 Neutral Position Switch ON/OFF Neutral position switch signal. Be-
comes ON when MT is in neutral or
when AT is in “P” range or “N” range.
Engine ECM input value.
137 Idle Switch Signal ON/OFF Idling signal. Becomes ON at the
time of idling.

263
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

138 Int'cool auto washer SW ON/OFF Intercooler water spray auto switch
signal. Becomes ON when the auto
switch is ON. Engine ECM input val-
ue.
139 Ignition Switch ON/OFF Ignition switch signal. Becomes ON
when the ignition switch is ON.
140 P/S Switch ON/OFF Power steering switch signal. Be-
comes ON at the time of steering op-
eration. Engine ECM input value.
141 A/C Switch ON/OFF A/C switch signal. Becomes ON
when the A/C switch on the heater
control is ON. Engine ECM input val-
ue.
142 Handle Switch Low Input/High Steering wheel switch signal. As the
Input accelerator pedal stroke is different
left and right in case of ETC, this has
been provided so that the engine
ECM can identify whether the steer-
ing wheel is on the left or the right.
“Low Input” in case of RH drive.
143 Starter Switch ON/OFF Starter switch signal. Becomes ON
when the starter is ON. Engine ECM
input value.
144 Front O2 #1 Rich Signal ON/OFF Front O2 sensor output monitor
(bank 1). Becomes ON at the time of
rich.
145 Rear O2 Rich Signal ON/OFF Rear O2 sensor output monitor. Be-
comes ON at the time of rich.
146 Front O2 #2 Rich Signal ON/OFF Front O2 sensor output monitor
(bank 2). Becomes ON at the time of
rich.
147 Knocking Signal ON/OFF Judgment of knocking occurrence
from the knocking sensor output sig-
nal. “ON” at the time of knocking oc-
currence.
148 Knocking #2 Signal ON/OFF Judgment of knocking occurrence
from the knocking sensor output sig-
nal. “ON” at the time of knocking oc-
currence. (bank 2)
149 Electric Load Signal ON/OFF Electric load signal. “ON” when there
was an electric load. Engine ECM in-
put value.
150 Crankshaft Position Sig. ON/OFF Output signal of the crankshaft posi-
tion sensor. Turns into “ON” while
the engine is running. Engine ECM
input signal.

264
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

151 Camshaft Position Sig. ON/OFF Output signal of the camshaft posi-
tion sensor. Turns into “ON” while
the engine is running. Engine ECM
input signal.
152 Rear Defogger SW ON/OFF Rear defogger switch input signal.
Becomes ON when the switch is ON.
Engine ECM input value.
153 Blower Fan SW ON/OFF Blower fan switch input signal. Be-
comes ON when the switch is ON.
Engine ECM input value.
154 Light Switch ON/OFF Light switch input signal. Becomes
ON when the switch is ON. Engine
ECM input value.
155 Wiper Switch ON/OFF Wiper switch input signal. Becomes
ON when the switch is ON. Engine
ECM input value.
156 A/C Lock Signal ON/OFF A/C compressor lock fault signal.
Becomes ON in case of a compres-
sor lock fault. Engine ECM input val-
ue.
157 A/C Mid Pressure Switch ON/OFF A/C mid-pressure switch signal. Be-
comes ON when the switch is ON.
Engine ECM input value.
158 A/C Compressor Signal ON/OFF A/C compressor drive signal. Be-
comes ON at the time of drive signal
output. Output value of the engine
ECM.
159 Radiator Fan Relay #3 ON/OFF Not used
160 Radiator Fan Relay #1 ON/OFF Radiator fan relay drive signal. Be-
comes ON at the time of drive signal
output. Output value of the engine
ECM.
161 Radiator Fan Relay #2 ON/OFF Radiator fan relay drive signal. Be-
comes ON at the time of drive signal
output. Output value of the engine
ECM.
162 Fuel Pump Relay ON/OFF Fuel pump relay drive signal. Be-
comes ON at the time of drive signal
output. Output value of the engine
ECM.
163 Int'cool auto washer relay ON/OFF Intercooler water spray relay drive
signal. Becomes ON at the time of
drive signal output. Output value of
the engine ECM.

265
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

164 CPC Solenoid Valve ON/OFF Purge control solenoid valve drive
signal. Becomes ON at the time of
drive signal output. Output value of
the engine ECM.
165 Blow-by leak Connector ON/OFF Detection of disconnection of blow- This item is applied
by hoses. only to turbo model for
North America.
166 PCV Solenoid Valve ON/OFF Pressure control solenoid valve This item is applied
drive signal. Becomes ON at the only to North American
time of drive signal output. Output models.
value of the engine ECM.
167 TGV Output ON/OFF Drive signal to the TGV motor. Be-
comes ON at the time of TGV opera-
tion (When duty output is above 0%).
Output value of the engine ECM.
168 TGV Drive Open/Close Display of the TGV drive status. Be-
comes “Open” at the time of TGV
open status. Engine ECM control
status.
169 Variable Intake Air Sol. ON/OFF Drive signal to the variable intake air
solenoid. Becomes ON at the time of
drive signal output. Output value of
the engine ECM.
170 Pressure Sources Change ON/OFF Solenoid used for atmosphere pres-
sure detection with the absolute
pressure sensor. When ON, the ab-
solute pressure sensor detects at-
mosphere pressure.
171 Vent. Solenoid Valve ON/OFF Drive signal to the drain valve. Be- This item is applied
comes ON at the time of valve drive. only to North American
Output value of the engine ECM. models.
Atmosphere open
when the valve is OFF.
172 P/S Solenoid Valve ON/OFF Drive signal to the solenoid used
when the intake air mass is in-
creased at the time of power steer-
ing ON. Intake air mass increase
when power steering is ON.
173 Assist Air Sol. Valve ON/OFF Drive signal to the air assist injector This item is applied
solenoid valve. Becomes ON at the only to North American
time of valve drive. Output value of models.
the engine ECM.
174 Tank Sensor Cntl Valve ON/OFF Drive signal to the tank sensor con-
trol valve. Becomes ON at the time
of solenoid valve drive. Output value
of the engine ECM.

266
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

175 Relief Valve Solenoid 1 ON/OFF Drive signal to the relief valve sole- This item is applied
noid valve 1 for twin turbocharger only to twin turbo mod-
system control. Becomes ON at the el.
time of solenoid valve drive. Output
value of the engine ECM.
176 Relief Valve Solenoid 2 ON/OFF Drive signal to the relief valve sole- This item is applied
noid valve 2 for twin turbocharger only to twin turbo mod-
system control. Becomes ON at the el.
time of solenoid valve drive. Output
value of the engine ECM.
177 TCS Relief Valve Sol. ON/OFF Drive signal to the charging pressure
solenoid valve at the time of VDC
operation. Becomes ON at the time
of solenoid valve drive. Output value
of the engine ECM.
178 Ex. Gas Pos. Pressure ON/OFF Drive signal to the exhaust gas posi- This item is applied
tive pressure valve for twin turbo- only to twin turbo mod-
charger system control. Becomes el.
ON at the time of solenoid valve
drive. Output value of the engine
ECM.
179 Ex. Gas Neg. Pressure ON/OFF Drive signal to the exhaust gas neg- This item is applied
ative pressure valve for twin turbo- only to twin turbo mod-
charger system control. Becomes el.
ON at the time of solenoid valve
drive. Output value of the engine
ECM.
180 Intake Air Solenoid ON/OFF Drive signal to the intake air solenoid This item is applied
valve for twin turbocharger system only to twin turbo mod-
control. Becomes ON at the time of el.
solenoid valve drive. Output value of
the engine ECM.
181 Muffler control ON/OFF Signal for variable muffler control.
Becomes ON at the time of muffler
open mode. Output value of the en-
gine ECM.
182 Exhaust By-pass valve ON/OFF Not used
183 Eng. Oil Press. SW 1 ON/OFF Drive signal to the VVL oil pressure
switch RH for diagnosis. Becomes
ON when the pressure switch is ON.
Output value of the engine ECM.
184 Eng. Oil Press. SW 2 ON/OFF Drive signal to the VVL oil pressure
switch LH for diagnosis. Becomes
ON when the pressure switch is ON.
Output value of the engine ECM.

267
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

185 CPC Solenoid 2 ON/OFF Purge control solenoid valve 2 drive
signal. Becomes ON at the time of
drive signal output. Output value of
the engine ECM.
186 Retard Signal from AT ON/OFF Signal requesting the retard trans-
mitted from the transmission ECM.
Becomes ON when the request sig-
nal has been transmitted. Engine
ECM input value.
187 Fuel Cut signal from AT ON/OFF Signal requesting fuel cut transmit-
ted from the transmission ECM. Be-
comes ON when the request signal
has been transmitted. Engine ECM
input value.
188 Ban of Torque Down ON/OFF Signal notifying torque-down prohi-
bition in regard to the VDC ECM. Be-
comes ON at the time of prohibition
signal output. Output value of the en-
gine ECM.
189 Request Torque Down ON/OFF Signal requesting torque-down
VDC transmitted from the VDC ECM. Be-
comes ON when the request signal
has been transmitted. Engine ECM
input value.
190 Torque Control Signal #1 ON/OFF Ignition timing retard and fuel cut
control is performed by combination
of #1 and #2, and torque-down is ex-
ecuted
191 Torque Control Signal #2 ON/OFF Same as # 1
192 Torque Permission Signal ON/OFF Signal notifying torque-down per-
mission in regard to the transmission
ECM. Becomes ON at the time of al-
lowance signal output. Output value
of the engine ECM.
193 EAM Signal Low/High Signal notifying torque-down per-
mission in regard to the transmission
control system ECM. Becomes
“Low” at the time of prohibition signal
output. Output value of the engine
ECM.
194 AT coop. Lock up sig. ON/OFF Display of the AT lock-up status. Be-
comes ON with lock-up status.
195 AT coop. Lean burn sig. ON/OFF Becomes ON at the time of lean burn
control execution for a lean burn
model. Output value of the engine
ECM.

268
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

196 AT coop. Rich spike sig. ON/OFF Becomes ON at the time of rich
spike output for a lean burn model.
Output value of the engine ECM.
197 AET Signal Low/High Torque-down request signal from
the transmission ECM. Becomes
“Low” at the time of request signal in-
put.
198 Kick Down Switch ON/OFF Input value from the kick-down
switch. At present, these data are
not used.
199 Economy Switch ON/OFF Input value from the economy This item is applied
switch. Becomes ON when the only to Japanese mod-
economy switch is ON. (However, els.
CAN input)
200 Idle Switch ON/OFF Idling signal. ON at the time of idling.
201 ETC Motor Relay ON/OFF Drive signal to the ETC motor relay.
Becomes ON at the time of drive sig-
nal output. Output value of the en-
gine ECM.
202 Injector Driver Relay ON/OFF Drive signal to the injector driver re- This item is applied
lay. Becomes ON at the time of drive only to CNG model.
signal output. Output value of the en-
gine ECM.
203 Clutch Switch ON/OFF Clutch switch signal. Becomes ON
when the clutch pedal is depressed.
Engine ECM input value.
204 Stop Light Switch ON/OFF Stop light switch signal. Becomes
ON when the stop light lights. Engine
ECM input value.
205 SET/COAST Switch ON/OFF SET/COAST switch signal of the
cruise control system. Becomes ON
at the time of switch operation. En-
gine ECM input value.
206 RESUME/ACCEL Switch ON/OFF RESUME/ACCEL switch signal of
the cruise control system. Becomes
ON at the time of switch operation.
Engine ECM input value.
207 Brake Switch ON/OFF Brake switch signal. Becomes ON
when the brake pedal is depressed.
Engine ECM input value.
208 Inhibitor Switch ON/OFF Inhibitor switch signal. Becomes ON
at the time of “P” range or “N” range.
Engine ECM input value.

269
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

209 Main Switch ON/OFF Main switch signal of the cruise con-
trol system. Becomes ON at the time
of switch operation. Engine ECM in-
put value.
210 Body Int. Unit Data OFF/ON Status of CAN data reception from
the body integrated unit. Display
whether received any data.
211 Body Int. Unit Count OFF/ON Update status for the CAN data from
the body integrated unit. Display
whether the counters being transmit-
ted are updated sequentially or not.
212 Sec. Air Combi V Relay 2 ON/OFF Secondary air combination valve re-
lay 2 drive signal. Becomes ON at
the time of drive signal output. Out-
put value of the engine ECM.
213 Sec. Air Pump Relay ON/OFF Secondary air pump relay drive sig-
nal. Becomes ON at the time of drive
signal output. Output value of the en-
gine ECM.
214 Sec. Air Combi V Relay 1 ON/OFF Secondary air combination valve re-
lay 1 drive signal. Becomes ON at
the time of drive signal output. Out-
put value of the engine ECM.
215 distance change SW ON/OFF Display of the ON/OFF status of the This item is applied
vehicle distance setting switch used only to Japanese mod-
by the ADA cruise control. els.
216 CC Cancel SW ON/OFF Signal of the cruise control cancel
switch of the cruise control system.
Becomes ON at the time of switch
operation. Engine ECM input value.
217 MIL On Flag ON/OFF Lighting indication of the malfunction
indicator light.
218 Boost Pressure Control Feedback/Open Mode to control boost pressure. This item is applied
Mode Turn to “Feedback” during feedback only to Diesel models.
control.
219 EGR Control Mode Feedback/Open Mode to control EGR. Turn to “Feed- This item is applied
back” during feedback control. only to Diesel models.
220 Glow Relay ON/OFF Operating signal of glow relay. It be- This item is applied
comes ON when glow relay is in op- only to Diesel models.
eration. Output value of engine
ECM.
221 Sub Fuel Pump Relay ON/OFF Operating signal of sub fuel pump. It This item is applied
becomes ON when sub fuel pump is only to Diesel models.
in operation. Output value of engine
ECM.

270
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

222 Fuel Pump Learning incomplete/com- Process of fuel pump leaning This item is applied
pleted only to Diesel models.
223 Injector Learning incomplete/com- Process of injection amount learning This item is applied
pleted for fuel injector. only to Diesel models.
224 EGR Learning incomplete/com- Process of EGR learning. This item is applied
pleted only to Diesel models.
225 Fuel Cut Request With Request/ Fuel cut request calculated by en- This item is applied
Without Reqest gine ECM. only to Diesel models.
226 Fuel Pump Mode Feedback/Open Mode to control fuel pump. Turn to This item is applied
“Feedback” during feedback control. only to Diesel models.
227 Clutch Switch for Smart ON/OFF Clutch switch for starting vehicles
equipped with Keyless Access with
Push Button Start. It becomes ON
once clutch pedal is depressed. In-
put value to engine ECM.

Transmission
No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks
1 Engine Speed rpm Engine speed signal transmitted
from the engine ECM. Calculated
from the crankshaft position sensor
signal. Transmission ECM input val-
ue.
2 Battery Voltage V Battery voltage. Transmission ECM
input value.
3 Air Flow Sensor Voltage V Mass air flow sensor output value
transmitted from the engine ECM.
Transmission ECM input value.
4 Throttle Sensor Voltage V Output value of the throttle position
sensor. Transmission ECM input
value.
5 Accel. Opening Angle % Accelerator pedal opening angle ra-
tio transmitted from the engine ECM.
Value calculated from the accelera-
tor pedal position sensor. Transmis-
sion ECM input value.
6 Front Wheel Speed km/h Front wheel speed calculated from
MPH the front vehicle speed sensor.
7 ATF Temp. °C Value calculated from the ATF tem-
°F perature sensor. ATF temperature of
the oil pan part.

271
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

8 Gear Position st Current gear position. Indication of
the gear position before shifting at
the time of shifting and the current
gear position when not shifting.
9 Line Pressure Duty Ratio % Line pressure solenoid control duty
ratio. Transmission ECM output val-
ue.
10 Lock Up Duty Ratio % Lock-up duty solenoid control duty
ratio. Transmission ECM output val-
ue.
11 Transfer Duty Ratio % Transfer duty solenoid control duty
ratio. Transmission ECM output val-
ue.
12 Throttle Sensor Power V Throttle position sensor power sup-
ply voltage. Transmission ECM out-
put value.
13 Turbine Revolution Speed rpm In case of 4AT:
Input shaft speed calculated from
the torque converter turbine speed
sensor signal.
In case of 5AT:
Input shaft speed calculated from
the signals of torque converter tur-
bine speed sensor 1 and torque con-
verter turbine speed sensor 2.
14 Brake Clutch Duty Ratio % 2-4 Brake duty solenoid control duty
ratio. Transmission ECM output val-
ue.
15 Rear Wheel Speed km/h Rear wheel speed calculated from
MPH the rear vehicle speed sensor.
16 Mani.Pressure Voltage V Manifold absolute pressure sensor
output value transmitted from the en-
gine ECM. Transmission ECM input
value.
17 Lateral G Sensor V Output value of lateral G sensor or
yaw rate & lateral G sensor. Trans-
mission ECM input value.
18 Low Clutch Duty % Low clutch duty solenoid control duty
ratio. Transmission ECM output val-
ue.
19 High Clutch Duty % High clutch duty solenoid control
duty ratio. Transmission ECM output
value.
20 L&R B Duty % Low & reverse duty solenoid control
duty ratio. Transmission ECM output
value.

272
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

21 ATF Temperature 2 °C Value calculated from the ATF tem-
°F perature sensor 2 output. ATF tem-
perature at the torque converter
outlet.
22 Voltage C-diff. SW V Output value of the DCCD volume. This item is applied
The output value changes according only to vehicle
to the dial position. DCCD ECM in- equipped with DCCD.
put value.
23 AT Turbine Speed 1 rpm Value calculated from the signal of
torque converter turbine speed sen-
sor 1. Indication of the front sun gear
speed.
24 AT Turbine Speed 2 rpm Value calculated from the signal of
torque converter turbine speed sen-
sor 2. Indication of the front plane-
tary carrier speed.
25 C-Diff. Real Current A Actual current value of the transfer This item is applied
coil performing LSD torque control. only to vehicle
DCCD ECM output value. equipped with DCCD.
26 C-Diff. Indicate Current A Indicated current value of the trans- This item is applied
fer coil performing LSD torque con- only to vehicle
trol, alculated by the DCCD ECM. equipped with DCCD.
27 SUBARU Intelligent Drive I / S/ S# Indication of the present "SUBARU
Mode Intelligent Drive” setting.
28 Sub-Accelerator Sensor V Sub accelerator pedal position sen-
sor output value transmitted from the
engine ECM. Transmission ECM in-
put value.
29 H&LR/C Solenoid Current A High & low reverse clutch solenoid
actual current value. Transmission
ECM output value.
30 D/C Solenoid Current A Direct clutch solenoid actual current
value. Transmission ECM output
value.
31 F/B Solenoid Current A Front brake solenoid actual current
value. Transmission ECM output
value.
32 I/C Solenoid Current A Input clutch solenoid actual current
value. Transmission ECM output
value.
33 P/L Solenoid Current A Line pressure solenoid actual cur-
rent value. Transmission ECM out-
put value.
34 L/U Solenoid Current A Lock-up solenoid actual current val-
ue. Transmission ECM output value.

273
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

35 AWD Sol. Current A Transfer solenoid actual current val-
ue. Transmission ECM output value.
36 Yaw rate sensor voltage V Yaw rate sensor voltage value put
out from the yaw rate & lateral G
sensor. Transmission ECM input
value.
37 H&LR/C Solenoid Pres- kPa Target oil pressure calculated by the
sure transmission ECM for control of high
& low reverse clutch pressure. This
value decides the indicator current
value.
38 D/C Solenoid Pressure kPa Target oil pressure calculated by the
transmission ECM for control of the
direct clutch pressure. This value de-
cides the indicator current value.
39 F/B Solenoid Pressure kPa Target oil pressure calculated by the
transmission ECM for control of the
front brake pressure. This value de-
cides the indicator current value.
40 I/C Solenoid Pressure kPa Target oil pressure calculated by the
transmission ECM for control of the
input clutch pressure. This value de-
cides the indicator current value.
41 P/L Solenoid Pressure kPa Target oil pressure calculated by the
transmission ECM for control of the
line pressure. This value decides the
indicator current value.
42 L/U Solenoid Pressure kPa Target oil pressure calculated by the
transmission ECM for control of the
lock-up clutch pressure. This value
decides the indicator current value.
43 AWD Solenoid Pressure kPa Target oil pressure calculated by the
transmission ECM for control of the
transfer clutch pressure. This value
decides the indicator current value.
44 Yaw rate & G sensor ref. V V Yaw rate sensor reference voltage This item is applied
value put out from the yaw rate & lat- only to vehicle
eral G sensor. At the time of battery equipped with DCCD.
voltage fluctuations, the yaw rate
sensor uses this value for correction
of the output value. DCCD ECM in-
put value.
45 FR Wheel Speed km/h Value calculated from the front ABS
MPH wheel speed sensor RH signal trans-
mitted from VDC or ABS ECM.
Transmission ECM input value.

274
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

46 FL Wheel Speed km/h Value calculated from the front ABS
MPH wheel speed sensor LH signal trans-
mitted from VDC or ABS ECM.
Transmission ECM input value.
47 RR Wheel Speed km/h Value calculated from the rear ABS
MPH wheel speed sensor RH signal trans-
mitted from VDC or ABS ECM.
Transmission ECM input value.
48 RL Wheel Speed km/h Value calculated from the rear ABS
MPH wheel speed sensor LH signal trans-
mitted from VDC or ABS ECM.
Transmission ECM input value.
49 Steering Angle Sensor deg Steering angle of the steering wheel This item is applied
transmitted from the steering angle only to vehicle
sensor. DCCD ECM input value. equipped with DCCD.
50 Fwd/B solenoid current A Actual current value of the forward
brake solenoid. Transmission ECM
output value.
51 Fwd/B solenoid pressure kPa Target oil pressure calculated by the
transmission ECM for control of the
forward brake pressure. This value
decides the indicator current value.
52 Yaw Rate deg/s Yaw rate of the vehicle body calcu- This item is applied
lated from the output of the yaw rate only to vehicle
& lateral G sensor. DCCD ECM out- equipped with DCCD.
put value.
53 Lateral G m/s2 Lateral Acceleration of the vehicle This item is applied
body calculated from the output of only to vehicle
the yaw rate & lateral G sensor. equipped with DCCD.
DCCD ECM output value.
54 DCCD Torque Distribution 0-6 Display of the initial LSD torque set This item is applied
value at the time of DCCD manual only to vehicle
mode. At the time of auto mode: equipped with DCCD.
0,Initial LSD torque "FREE" = 1,Ini-
tial LSD torque "Very small" = 2,Ini-
tial LSD torque "Small" = 3,Initial
LSD torque "Medium" = 4,Initial LSD
torque "Large" = 5,Initial LSD torque
"LOCK" = 6
55 DCCD Mode 0-3 Display of the mode setting status at This item is applied
the time of DCCD auto mode. only to vehicle
equipped with DCCD.
56 Neutral Position Switch ON/OFF “ON” is indicated in case of N range
or P range, and “OFF” is indicated
for other ranges.

275
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

57 Ignition Switch ON/OFF Ignition switch signal. Becomes ON
when the ignition switch is ON.
58 Tiptronic Mode Switch ON/OFF Manual mode switch signal. Be-
comes ON when the select lever is
moved into the manual ga
te. Transmission ECM input value.
59 Cruise Control Signal ON/OFF Cruise control operation signal. Be-
comes ON when driving with cruise
control.
60 ABS Signal ON/OFF ABS operation signal. Becomes ON
at the time of ABS operation.
61 Down Switch ON/OFF Down switch signal. Becomes ON
when the select lever is moved to the
“- (minus)” side of the manual gate.
Transmission ECM input value.
62 Stop Light Switch ON/OFF Stop light switch signal. Becomes
ON when the brake pedal is de-
pressed. Transmission ECM input
value.
63 Up Switch ON/OFF Up switch signal. Becomes ON
when the select lever is moved to the
“+ (plus)” side of the manual gate.
Transmission ECM input value.
64 Kick Down Switch ON/OFF Kickdown judgment signal transmit-
ted from the engine ECM. Becomes
ON when kickdown is judged from
change of the accelerator opening
angle. Transmission ECM input val-
ue.
65 FWD Switch ON/OFF FWD switch signal. Becomes ON
when a fuse is inserted into the FWD
fuse holder. Transmission ECM in-
put value.
66 Power Mode Switch ON/OFF Power mode switch signal. Becomes
ON when the switch is ON. Trans-
mission ECM input value.
67 Hold Mode Switch ON/OFF Snow hold mode switch signal. Be-
comes ON when the switch is ON.
Transmission ECM input value.
68 1st Range Signal ON/OFF Inhibitor switch signal. Becomes ON
when the select lever is in range 1.
Transmission ECM input value.
69 2nd Range Signal ON/OFF Inhibitor switch signal. Becomes ON
when the select lever is in range 2.
Transmission ECM input value.

276
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

70 3rd Range Signal ON/OFF Inhibitor switch signal. Becomes ON
when the select lever is in range 3.
Transmission ECM input value.
71 D Range Signal ON/OFF Inhibitor switch signal. Becomes ON
when the select lever is in range D.
Transmission ECM input value.
72 R Range Signal ON/OFF Inhibitor switch signal. Becomes ON
when the select lever is in range R.
Transmission ECM input value.
73 N/P Range Signal ON/OFF Inhibitor switch signal. Becomes ON
when the select lever is in range N or
P. Transmission ECM input value.
74 4th Range Signal ON/OFF Inhibitor switch signal. Becomes ON
when the select lever is in range 4.
Transmission ECM input value.
75 Tiptronic Solenoid ON/OFF Sport shift solenoid drive signal. Be-
comes ON at the time of manual
mode gear 1. Engine brake is ap-
plied when ON. Transmission ECM
output value.
76 Torque Control Signal 1 ON/OFF Torque-down request signal trans-
mitted to the engine ECM. The en-
gine ECM performs ignition timing
retard and fuel cut control by combi-
nation of #1 and #2 and executes
torque-down. Transmission ECM
output value.
77 Torque Control Signal 2 ON/OFF Same as “Torque Control Signal 1”
78 2-4 Brake Timing Sol. ON/OFF 2-4 Brake timing solenoid drive sig-
nal. Becomes “ON” at the time of
drive signal output. Transmission
ECM output value.
79 Low Clutch Timing Sol. ON/OFF Low clutch timing solenoid drive sig-
nal. Becomes “ON” at the time of
drive signal output. Transmission
ECM output value.
80 Shift Solenoid #2 ON/OFF Shift solenoid 2 drive signal. Be-
comes “ON” at the time of drive sig-
nal output. Transmission ECM
output value.
81 Shift Solenoid #1 ON/OFF Shift solenoid 1 drive signal. Be-
comes “ON” at the time of drive sig-
nal output. Transmission ECM
output value.

277
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

82 Shift Output 4 ON/OFF Signal for the sport shift indicator
light. Becomes ON in manual mode
when shift-up or shift-down is possi-
ble. Transmission ECM output val-
ue.
83 Shift Output 3 ON/OFF Signal for the sport shift indicator
light. Becomes ON at the time of
manual mode when the gear posi-
tion is gear 4. Transmission ECM
output value.
84 Shift Output 2 ON/OFF Signal for the sport shift indicator
light. Becomes ON at the time of
manual mode when the gear posi-
tion is gear 2 or gear 3. Transmis-
sion ECM output value.
85 Shift Output 1 ON/OFF Signal for the sport shift indicator
light. Becomes ON at the time of
manual mode when the gear posi-
tion is gear 1 or gear 3. Transmis-
sion ECM output value.
86 Diagnosis Lamp ON/OFF AT warning light lighting signal. Be-
comes ON when the warning light
lights. Transmission ECM output val-
ue.
87 RR Diff. Oil Temp SW ON/OFF Rear differential temperature switch This item is applied
signal. Becomes OFF when the tem- only to vehicle
perature rises and the contact be- equipped with DCCD.
comes OFF. Normally ON. DCCD
ECM input value.
88 ATF Temperature Lamp ON/OFF AT temperature warning light lighting
signal. Becomes ON when the warn-
ing light lights.
89 Shift Lock Solenoid ON/OFF Shift lock solenoid drive signal put
out from the transmission ECM or
BIU. Becomes ON at the time of shift
lock release.
90 Economy Switch ON/OFF Economy switch signal. Becomes
ON when the economy switch is
switched ON. Transmission ECM in-
put value.
91 Power Mode Lamp ON/OFF Power indicator light lighting signal.
Becomes ON when the power mode
switch is ON. Transmission ECM in-
put value.
92 P Range ON/OFF Becomes ON when the select lever
is in range P. Transmission ECM in-
put value.

278
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

93 Torque Control Cut Sig. ON/OFF Signal transmitted from the engine
ECM prohibits torque reduction. Be-
comes ON when the prohibition sig-
nal is received. Transmission ECM
input value.
94 P/N Signal ON/OFF Starter motor drive permission signal
to the engine ECM. Becomes ON
when the select lever is in range N or
P. Transmission ECM output value.
95 TCS Switch ON/OFF TCS switch signal. Becomes ON
when the TCS switch is ON. Trans-
mission ECM output value.
96 Hold Lamp ON/OFF Snow hold indicator light lighting sig-
nal. Becomes ON when the snow
hold switch is ON. Transmission
ECM input value.
97 N Range ON/OFF Becomes ON when the select lever
is in range N. Transmission ECM in-
put value.
98 Judgement of AWD ON/OFF Signal for drive type identification.
Becomes ON for a vehicle with
AWD. Transmission ECM output val-
ue.
99 Inhibitor SW 1 HIGH/LOW Inhibitor switch signal. The transmis-
sion ECM judges the current range
position from the combination of #1,
2, 3, and 4. Transmission ECM input
value.
100 Inhibitor SW 2 HIGH/LOW Same as “Inhibitor SW1”
101 Inhibitor SW 3 HIGH/LOW Same as “Inhibitor SW1”
102 Inhibitor SW 4 HIGH/LOW Same as “Inhibitor SW1”
103 Inhibitor SW 3 Monitor HIGH/LOW Open circuit diagnostic signal for the
inhibitor switch 3 input circuit. Trans-
mission ECM input value.
104 Back Lamp Relay ON/OFF Back-up light relay drive signal. Be-
comes ON at the time of drive signal
output. Transmission ECM output
value.
105 AT Power Relay ON/OFF PV ignition relay drive signal. Be-
comes ON with reverse connection
of the battery terminals. Relay for
ECM protection. Transmission ECM
output value.

279
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

106 H&LR/C Fluid Pressure ON/OFF High & low reverse clutch oil pres-
sure switch signal. Becomes ON
when the contact point is ON be-
cause of the oil pressure. Transmis-
sion ECM input value.
107 D/C Fluid Pressure ON/OFF Direct clutch oil pressure switch sig-
nal. Becomes ON when the contact
point is ON because of the oil pres-
sure. Transmission ECM input val-
ue.
108 F/B Fluid Pressure ON/OFF Front brake oil pressure switch sig-
nal. Becomes ON when the contact
point is ON because of the oil pres-
sure. Transmission ECM input val-
ue.
109 I/C Fluid Pressure ON/OFF Input clutch oil pressure switch. Be-
comes ON when the contact point is
ON because of the oil pressure.
Transmission ECM input value.
110 LC/B Fluid Pressure ON/OFF Low coast brake oil pressure switch
signal. Becomes ON when the con-
tact point is ON because of the oil
pressure. Transmission ECM input
value.
111 Signal of identified ECM ON/OFF Signal for identifying the DCCD ECM This item is applied
unit type (AUTO mode Yes or No). It only to vehicle
shows ON if AUTO mode is Yes. equipped with DCCD.
DCCD ECM output value.
112 LC/B Solenoid ON/OFF Low coast brake solenoid drive sig-
nal. Becomes ON at the time of drive
signal output. Transmission ECM
output value.
113 LU&FWD/B Solenoid ON/OFF Lock-up & forward brake solenoid
drive signal. Becomes ON at the
time of drive signal output. Trans-
mission ECM output value.
114 Center Diff. Lamp1 ON/OFF DCCD indicator light lighting signal. This item is applied
Becomes ON when the initial LSD only to vehicle
torque setting is “LOCK”. DCCD equipped with DCCD.
ECM output value.
115 Center Diff. Lamp2 ON/OFF DCCD indicator light lighting signal. This item is applied
Becomes ON when the initial LSD only to vehicle
torque setting is “Large”. DCCD equipped with DCCD.
ECM output value.

280
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items Unit of measure Contents Remarks

116 Center Diff. Lamp3 ON/OFF DCCD indicator light lighting signal. This item is applied
Becomes ON when the initial LSD only to vehicle
torque setting is “Medium”. DCCD equipped with DCCD.
ECM output value.
117 Center Diff. Lamp4 ON/OFF DCCD indicator light lighting signal. This item is applied
Becomes ON when the initial LSD only to vehicle
torque setting is “Small”. DCCD equipped with DCCD.
ECM output value.
118 Center Diff. Lamp5 ON/OFF DCCD indicator light lighting signal. This item is applied
Becomes ON when the initial LSD only to vehicle
torque setting is “Very small”. DCCD equipped with DCCD.
ECM output value.
119 Center Diff. Lamp6 ON/OFF DCCD indicator light lighting signal. This item is applied
Becomes ON when the initial LSD only to vehicle
torque setting is “FREE”. DCCD equipped with DCCD.
ECM output value.
120 Parking Position Switch ON/OFF Parking brake switch signal. Be- This item is applied
comes ON when the parking brake only to vehicle
switch is ON. DCCD ECM input val- equipped with DCCD.
ue.
121 Center Diff. Relay ON/OFF DCCD relay drive signal. Becomes This item is applied
ON in auto mode and in manual only to vehicle
mode when the initial LSD torque is equipped with DCCD.
other than “FREE”. DCCD ECM out-
put value.
122 AUTO/MANUAL Mode ON/OFF DCCD manual mode switch signal. This item is applied
Switch Becomes ON when the DCCD man- only to vehicle
ual mode switch is ON. DCCD ECM equipped with DCCD.
input value.
123 AUTO Mode Lamp ON/OFF DCCD AUTO indicator light lighting This item is applied
signal. Becomes ON when the only to vehicle
DCCD is in auto mode. DCCD ECM equipped with DCCD.
output value.
124 Fwd/B hydraulic pressure ON/OFF Forward brake oil pressure switch
SW signal. Becomes ON when the con-
tact point is ON because of the oil
pressure. Transmission ECM input
value.

Body Integrated Unit

NOTE:
If you change the setup of Unit Customizing function, please be sure to follow service manuals when you work
on this. If you set it incorrectly, it would be a cause of failures such as system troubles and etc.

281
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

1 BATT voltage (control) 10 — 15 V Battery continuity power supply. In-
put value to the BIU.
2 BATT voltage (BACKUP) 10 — 15 V Battery continuity power supply. In-
put value to the BIU.
3 ABS_CM Power Voltage 10 — 15 V Ignition system circuit voltage. Input
value to the BIU.
4 ACC voltage 10 — 15 V ACC system circuit voltage. Input
value to the BIU.
5 Illumination VR Voltage 0—5V Input value from the illumination con-
trol dial.
6 Illumi. output d-ratio 0 — 100% Duty ratio for illumination control out-
put from BIU. (Frequency:250Hz)
7 Ambient temp sensor V 0—5V Input value from the ambient tem-
perature sensor.
8 Ambient Temperature -40 — 87.5°C Temperature is converted from input
voltage to BIU.
9 Fuel level voltage 0—8V Voltage value of fuel level sensors.
Input value from the fuel level sen-
sors to the BIU.
10 Fuel level resistance 0 — 102.3 ohm Resistance value of fuel level sen-
sors. Input value from the fuel level
sensors to the BIU.
11 key-lock solenoid V 6 — 12 V Output value to the key-lock sole-
noid. (The key lock functions that the
key cannot be removed when the se-
lector lever position is except for the
P-range.)
12 number of regist. 0 — 4Num. Number of registered keys for key-
less entry system.
13 Front Wheel Speed km/h Average speed of the front wheels. CAN data
Received from VDC/ABS ECM.
14 VDC/ABS latest f-code DTC display Most recent trouble codes of the CAN data
VDC/ABS system. Received from
VDC/ABS ECM. As the items shown
here are provisional codes, the DTC
displayed by the VDC/ABS system
shall be confirmed.
15 Blower fan steps 0—2 Blower fan control mode. Received CAN data
from the A/C ECM.
0 = OFF, 1 = Low, 2 = More than 2
levels
16 Fuel level resistance 2 0 — 102.3 ohm Fuel level sensor resistance value. CAN data
Output value from the BIU to the
combination meter.

282
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

17 Fuel consumption cc/s Momentary injection quantity every CAN data
50 msec, converted to the injection
quantity per second. Received from
Engine ECM.
18 Coolant Temp. -40 — 130°C Engine coolant temperature. Re- CAN data
ceived from Engine ECM.
19 Vehicle longitudinal G m/s 2 Acceleration/deceleration rate in the CAN data
longitudinal direction. Received from
VDC/ABS ECM.
20 SPORT Shift Stages 0 — 7 Step Manual mode operation information. CAN data
Received from Transmission ECM.
0 = light OFF, 1 — 5 = gear position,
6 = fail, 7 = ATF temperature High/
Low
21 Shift Position 0—7 P-range = 7, R-range = 6, N-range = CAN data
5, D-range = 4, Manual = 8 (no in-
put).
With switching to manual mode, no
input (8) is reached and the “SPORT
shift stages” is changed. Received
from Transmission ECM.
22 VDC/ABS condition 0—4 Operating condition of VDC/ABS. CAN data
Received from VDC/ABS ECM. 0 =
ABS, 1 = TCS, 2 = VDC O (overs-
teering), 3 = VDC U (understeering),
4 = VDC OFF
23 Destination Code 0 — 16 Vehicle specification classification. CAN data
Received from the combination me-
ter. 1 = Japan (normal), 2 = Japan
(black face), 3 = Japan (with ADA), 4
= General (LH), 5 = Europe (LH), 6 =
Saudi Arabia, 7 = Europe (RH), 8 =
Australia, 9 = US, 10 = Canada
24 Touch SW 0 — 64 By set value input from the center CAN data
display to BIU, change is caused by
pressing the button on the touch
panel. However, change is limited to
the following procedure. Touch the
‘INFO’ button → Touch ‘SET’ →
Touch ‘Keyless entry’ or ‘Various
settings’ (But no correspondence to
RESET).
25 key-lock warning SW ON/OFF Input value from the key-lock warn-
ing switch. Becomes ON when the
ignition key is inserted into the key
cylinder.

283
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

26 Stop Light Switch ON/OFF Input value from the brake switch.
Becomes ON when the brake pedal
is depressed.
27 Front fog lamp SW input ON/OFF Input value from the front fog light
switch. Becomes ON when the front
fog light switch is turn ON.
28 Rear fog lamp SW input ON/OFF Input value from the rear fog light
switch. Becomes ON when the rear
fog light switch is turn ON.
29 TPMS input ON/OFF Display of the TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System) registration sta-
tus. Becomes ON when TPMS regis-
tration has been completed.
30 lighting SW input ON/OFF Input value from the combination
switch. Becomes ON when the
headlights are set to ON.
31 Door key-lock SW input ON/OFF Input value from the switch for the
door key cylinder part. Becomes ON
when the key is turned to the LOCK
side.
32 Door unlock SW input ON/OFF Input value from the switch for the
door key cylinder part. Becomes ON
when the key is turned to the UN-
LOCK side.
33 Driver’s door SW input ON/OFF Input value from the driver’s door
switch. Becomes ON when the door
is opened.
34 P-door SW input ON/OFF Input value from the passenger’s
door switch. Becomes ON when the
door is opened.
35 Rear right door SW input ON/OFF Input value from the rear right door
switch. Becomes ON when the door
is opened.
36 Rear left door SW input ON/OFF Input value from the rear left door
switch. Becomes ON when the door
is opened.
37 R Gate SW input ON/OFF Input value from the rear gate switch
or the trunk lid switch. Becomes ON
when the rear gate or the trunk is
opened.
38 Manual lock SW input ON/OFF Input value from the manual lock
switch for the power window main
switch part. Becomes ON when the
manual lock switch is locked.

284
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

39 Manual unlock SW input ON/OFF Input value from the manual lock
switch for the power window main
switch part. Becomes ON when the
manual lock switch is unlocked.
40 Lock SW ON/OFF Input value from the door status
switch of the latch part of the door on
the driver’s side. Becomes ON when
the lock status of the door on the
driver’s side is locked.
41 Bright SW input ON/OFF Input value from the bright switch.
Becomes ON when the bright switch
is set to ON.
The bright switch is the function for
switching the illumination of instru-
ment panel, monitor, heater control
panel, and audio to bright when the
position light is ON.
42 Shift Button SW Input ON/OFF Input value from the shift lock cancel
button of the shift lever. Becomes
ON when the shift lock cancel button
is pressed.
43 Economy Switch ON/OFF Input value from the economy
switch. Becomes ON when the
economy switch is turn on.
44 Tiptronic Mode Switch ON/OFF Input value from the tiptronic mode
switch (manual mode switch). Be-
comes ON in manual mode.
45 TIP UP SW input ON/OFF Becomes ON with shifting up in
manual mode.
46 TIP DOWN SW input ON/OFF Becomes ON with shifting down in
manual mode.
47 P SW ON/OFF Input value from the P-range switch.
Becomes ON only in the P-range.
48 MT Reverse Switch ON/OFF Input value from the MT back -up
light SW. Becomes ON when the
shift lever is in the R range and the
back-up light SW is set to ON.
49 Kick Down Switch ON/OFF Input value from the kick down
switch. This data is not being used
now.
50 R wiper ON SW input ON/OFF ON switch input value of the rear
wiper switch. Becomes ON when the
rear wiper switch is set to the ON po-
sition.

285
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

51 R wiper INT SW input ON/OFF INT switch input value of the rear
wiper switch. Becomes ON when the
rear wiper switch is set to the INT po-
sition.
52 R washer SW input ON/OFF Input value from the rear washer
switch. Becomes ON when the rear
washer switch turn on.
53 Wiper deicer SW input ON/OFF Input value from the wiper deicer
switch. Becomes ON when the wiper
deicer switch turn on.
54 Rear Defogger SW ON/OFF Input value from the rear defogger
switch. Becomes ON when the rear
defogger switch turn on.
55 Driver’s Seat SW input ON/OFF Input value from driver’s seat buckle
switch. Becomes ON when the seat
belt is fastened.
56 P seatbelt SW input ON/OFF Normally ON when no load acts onto
the passenger seat.
When a load acts onto the passen-
ger seat, it becomes ON when the
seat belt has been fastened and
OFF when the seat belt has not been
fastened.
57 Fr wiper input ON/OFF Input value from the front wiper
switch. Becomes ON when the front
wiper is operated.
58 Parking Brake Switch In- ON/OFF Input value from the parking brake
put SW. Becomes ON when the parking
brake is pulled and the parking brake
SW is set to ON.
59 Registration SW input ON/OFF Input value from the registration
switch. Becomes ON when the reg-
istration connector of keyless entry
system is connected.
60 Identification SW input ON/OFF Identification of wagon or sedan. ON
= Wagon, OFF = Sedan. Initial set-
ting of the keyless entry system cir-
cuit.
61 Driver's seat lock status ON/OFF Input value from the driver's seat
SW input lock status switch. Becomes ON
when doors are locked.
62 Passenger's seat lock sta- ON/OFF Input value from the passenger's
tus SW input seat lock status switch. Becomes
ON when doors are locked.

286
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

63 R gate lock status SW in- ON/OFF Input value from the rear gate lock
put status switch. Becomes ON when a
rear gate is locked.
64 Smart wake-up input ON/OFF Input value of the smart wake-up sig-
nal from the collated ECM. Becomes
ON when the signal is input.
65 Rr defogger output ON/OFF Output value to the rear defogger re-
lay.Becomes ON when the rear de-
fogger is operated.
66 lock actuat. LOCK output ON/OFF Output value to the door lock actua-
tor. Becomes ON when the lock sig-
nal is output.
67 All seat UNLOCK output ON/OFF Output value to the door lock actua-
tors of all seats. Becomes ON with
output of the unlock signal.
68 D-seat UNLOCK output ON/OFF Output value to the driver’s door lock
actuator. Becomes ON when the un-
lock signal is output.
69 R gate/trunk UNLK output ON/OFF Output value to the rear gate/trunk
lid lock actuator. Becomes ON when
the unlock signal is output.
70 Double lock output ON/OFF Output value to the door lock actua-
tors. Becomes ON when the double
lock signal is output.
71 R wiper output ON/OFF Output value to the rear wiper motor.
Becomes ON when the rear wiper is
operated.
72 Shift Lock Solenoid ON/OFF Output value to the shift lock sole-
noid. This solenoid becomes ON
when both P range switch and brake
switch are turn on.
73 Key locking output ON/OFF Output value to the key-lock sole-
noid. Becomes ON when the sole-
noid is operated. (The key lock
functions that the key cannot be re-
moved when the selector lever posi-
tion is except for the P-range.)
74 wiper deicer output ON/OFF Output value to the wiper deicer re-
lay. Becomes ON when the wiper
deicer relay is operated.
75 Starter cutting output ON/OFF Starter relay cut signal for the immo- Application only for
bilizer system. Becomes ON with op- LEGACY 04 MY, 05
eration of the starter cut relay. MY

287
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

76 Hazard Output ON/OFF Output value of keyless answer- Only when the keyless
back. Becomes ON with hazard out- registration connector
put. is not connected
77 Keyless Buzzer Output ON/OFF Output value to the keyless buzzer. Only when the keyless
Becomes ON at the time of buzzer registration connector
output. is not connected
78 Belt buzzer output ON/OFF Output value to the belt buzzer. Be-
comes ON at the time of output to
the belt buzzer.
79 Horn Output ON/OFF Horn output of the security system.
Becomes ON at the time of a system
alarm.
80 Siren Output ON/OFF Siren output of the security system.
Becomes ON at the time of a securi-
ty system alarm.
81 D-belt warning light O/P ON/OFF Output value of the driver’s seat belt
warning lamp. Becomes OFF when
the seat belt is fastened.
82 P-belt warning light O/P ON/OFF Output value of the passenger’s seat
belt warning lamp. Becomes ON
when a load is sensed for the front
passenger seat. Becomes OFF
when the seat belt is fastened.
83 Illumination lamp O/P ON/OFF Output value of illumination control
signal. Becomes ON when the posi-
tion light is turned on. However, the
ON time changes when the illumina-
tion brightness control dial is operat-
ed.
84 Room lamp output ON/OFF Output value to the room lamp. Be-
comes ON when the room lamp
lights. However, room lamp ON/OFF
interlocked with BIU occurs only at
the DOOR position.
85 key illumi. lamp o/p ON/OFF Output value to the key illumination
light. Becomes ON when the key illu-
mination light is operated.
86 R fog lamp output ON/OFF Output value to the rear fog light re-
lay. Becomes ON when the rear fog
light is operated.
87 R fog lamp monitor ON/OFF The rear fog light monitoring circuit is
installed in the BIU.
Becomes ON when the rear fog light
is operated.

288
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

88 Immobilizer lamp output ON/OFF Output value to the immobilizer pilot
light in the combination meter. Be-
comes ON when the immobilizer pi-
lot light is turned on.
89 Keyless operation 1 Regist./Normal Keyless mode judgement. Becomes
“Registration” with registration
mode.
“Registration mode” is made when
the registration connector is con-
nected and the door lock switch is
set to UNLOCK.
90 Keyless operation 2 Deletion/Normal Keyless mode judgement. Becomes
“Deletion” with delete mode. Con-
nect the keyless registration connec-
tor and perform key warning switch
ON/OFF ten times within ten sec-
onds while keeping the door lock
switch to ON.
91 EK alarm output ON/OFF The door opening status is put out to
the alarm unit. Becomes ON when
any door is open.
92 TL alarm output ON/OFF Alarm output of the door alarm func-
tion. Becomes ON when a door is
opened illegally while the door is in
locked condition.
93 CC Main Lamp ON/OFF Becomes ON when the cruise con- CAN data
trol main switch is set to ON. Re-
ceived from the Engine ECM and
transmitted to the combination me-
ter.
94 CC Set Lamp ON/OFF Becomes ON when the cruise con- CAN data
trol set switch is set to ON. Received
from the Engine ECM and transmit-
ted to the combination meter.
95 SPORT Lamp ON/OFF Becomes ON with shifting into sports CAN data
mode. Received from the Transmis-
sion ECM and transmitted to the
combination meter.
96 SPORT Blink Blink/OFF Brinks at the time of an AT fault. Re- CAN data
ceived from the Transmission ECM
and transmitted to the combination
meter.
97 ATF Temperature Lamp ON/OFF Becomes ON when the ATF temper- CAN data
ature is abnormally high. Received
from the Transmission ECM and
transmitted to the combination me-
ter.

289
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

98 ATF Blink Blink/OFF Brinks at the time of an AT fault. Re- CAN data
ceived from the Transmission ECM
and transmitted to the combination
meter.
99 ECO Lamp (AT) ON/OFF Becomes ON when the economy CAN data
lamp lighting signal is ON. Received
from Transmission ECM.
100 ECO Lamp (MT) ON/OFF Becomes ON when the economy CAN data
lamp lighting signal is ON. Received
from Transmission ECM.
101 Tire diameter abnormal 1 ON/OFF Becomes ON when the FWD fuse is CAN data
connected (when set to FF). Re-
ceived from the Transmission ECM
and transmitted to the combination
meter.
102 Tire diameter abnormal 2 Blink/OFF Blinking at approximately the speed CAN data
difference when tires with one size
difference set on front and rear
wheels. Received from the Trans-
mission ECM and transmitted to the
combination meter.
103 Shift Up Indication UP/OFF Shift-up possible indication signal. Together with the arrow
Becomes UP when shift-up is possi- of the gear indication in
ble. the combination meter.
104 Shift Down Indication DOWN/OFF Shift-down possible indication sig- Together with the arrow
nal. Becomes DOWN when shift- of the gear indication in
down is possible. the combination meter.
105 SPORT Shift (buzzer 1) ON/OFF Shift down prohibition alarm. Be- CAN data
comes ON at the time of output to
the buzzer. Received from the
Transmission ECM and transmitted
to the combination meter.
106 SPORT Shift (buzzer 2) ON/OFF ATF abnormally high temperature CAN data
alarm. Becomes ON at the time of
output to the buzzer. Received from
the Transmission ECM and transmit-
ted to the combination meter.
107 ABS/VDC Judging ABS/VDC Vehicle identification information. CAN data
Received from VDC/ABS ECM.
108 ADA Existence Judging support / no sup- Vehicle identification information. CAN data
port Becomes “support” if ADA (Active
Driving Assist) is equipped.
109 Small Light SW ON/OFF Input value from the position light
switch. Becomes ON when the posi-
tion lights are set to ON.

290
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

110 Headlamp ON/OFF Input value from the headlight
switch. Becomes ON when the
headlights are turned on.
111 DRL ON/OFF Input value of the DRL (Daytime
Running Lights) output of the DRL
ECM. Becomes ON when the DRL
are ON.
112 High Beam ON/OFF Vehicle travelling information for
ADA. Becomes ON when the head-
lights are switched to high beam.
113 Lh Turn ON/OFF Vehicle travelling information for
ADA. Becomes ON when the left
turn signal becomes ON.
114 Rh Turn ON/OFF Vehicle travelling information for
ADA. Becomes ON when the right
turn signal becomes ON.
115 Rr Defogger SW ON/OFF Input value from the rear defogger
switch. Becomes ON when the rear
defogger switch is turned on.
116 Australia Judging Flag Australia/Others Output from the BIU to the Engine
ECM.
117 Large Diameter Tire Large Tire/ Tire identification information for the
Others combination meter of models with 18
inch wheels.
Correction of the error in the vehicle
speed indication because of the 18-
inch wheels. It is not become ‘Large
Tire’ even when 18-inch wheels are
mounted on a 17-inch vehicle.
118 Number of cylinders 4 Cylinder/ Discrimination information of vehicle CAN data
6 Cylinder
119 Cam shaft specification DOHC/SOHC Discrimination information of vehicle CAN data
120 Turbo no support / Discrimination information of vehicle CAN data
TURBO
121 E/G displacement (2.5L) 2.5 L/ OFF Discrimination information of vehicle CAN data
122 E/G displacement (3.0L) 3.0 L/ OFF Discrimination information of vehicle CAN data
123 AT Vehicle ID Signal ON/OFF Discrimination information of vehicle CAN data
124 Blower fan information ON/OFF Blower fan information. Becomes CAN data
ON when the blower fan is not OFF.
Received from Engine ECM.
125 Heater cock valve output ON/OFF Output value to the heater cock
valve. Becomes ON at the time of
heater cock valve operation.

291
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

126 Power Window (UP) ON/OFF Output value to the power window
ECM. Becomes ON at the time of
power window operation. The glass
on the driver’s side is raised when
the keyless LOCK button is pressed
continuously.
127 Power Window (Down) ON/OFF Output value to the power window
ECM. Becomes ON at the time of
power window operation. The glass
on the driver’s side is lowered when
the keyless UNLOCK button is
pressed continuously.
128 Keyless buzzer ON/OFF Output value to the keyless buzzer.
Becomes ON at the time of keyless
answer-back buzzer operation.
129 Bright Request ON/OFF Input value to BIU. Becomes ON
when a demand exists. Function for
increase the brightness of instru-
ment panel illumination, monitor, air
conditioner, and audio when the
lighting switch is ON.
130 P/W ECM Failure OK/NG Power window ECM fault informa- CAN data
tion. Becomes NG at the time of a
fault.
131 Keyless Hook SW ON/OFF Input value from the power window CAN data
ECM. Becomes ON when the key-
less hook switch is ON.
132 Door lock SW (Open) ON/OFF Input value from the power window CAN data
ECM. Becomes ON at the time of
unlocking operation of the door lock
switch (manual lock switch).
133 Door lock SW (Close) ON/OFF Input value from the power window CAN data
ECM. Becomes ON at the time of
locking operation of the door lock
switch (manual lock switch).
134 Door Key SW (Open) ON/OFF Input value from the door key switch
(switch of the door key cylinder part).
Becomes ON at the time of unlock-
ing operation.
135 Door Key SW (Close) ON/OFF Input value from the door key switch
(switch of the door key cylinder part).
Becomes ON at the time of locking
operation.
136 Under hook registration ON/OFF Becomes ON at the time of registra-
tion mode for the keyless hook func-
tion.

292
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

137 Hook registration end ON/OFF Becomes ON at the time of keyless
hook registration completion.
138 Unlock request ON/OFF Becomes ON when the door hook CAN data
code input is OK. Received from the
power window ECM.
139 Center display failure OK/NG Center display fault information. OK CAN data
means system is normal, NG means
system is abnormal. Received from
the center display.
140 NAVI Failure OK/NG Navigation system fault information. CAN data
OK means system is normal, NG
means system is abnormal. Re-
ceived from the center display.
141 IE Bus failure OK/NG IE bus fault information. At present,
these data are not used.
142 Auto A/C failure OK/NG Auto A/C ECM fault information. OK CAN data
means system is normal, NG means
system is abnormal. Received from
the auto A/C ECM.
143 EBD Warning Light ON/OFF Operating condition for the EBD CAN data
warning light. Becomes ON when
the warning lamp lights. Received
from VDC/ABS ECM.
144 ABS Warning Light ON/OFF Operating condition for the ABS CAN data
warning light. Becomes ON when
the warning lamp lights. Received
from VDC/ABS ECM.
145 VDC OFF flag ON/OFF VDC operation status. Becomes ON CAN data
by VDC OFF (becomes ON when
the VDC OFF switch becomes ON).
Received from VDC/ABS ECM.
146 VDC/ABS OK B OK/NG VDC/ABS system fault information. CAN data
OK means system is normal, NG
means system is abnormal. Re-
ceived from the VDC/ABS ECM.
147 Lighting I Switch Input ON/OFF Input value from the Combination
SW. Becomes ON when the lighting
SW is set to the Tail position.
148 Lighting II Switch Input ON/OFF Input value from the Combination
SW. Becomes ON when the lighting
SW is set to the Head position.
149 Dimmer Hi Switch Input ON/OFF Input value from the Combination
SW. Becomes ON when the Dimmer
& Passing SW is set to the "High
beam" position.

293
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

150 Dimmer Pass Switch Input ON/OFF Input value from the Combination
SW. Becomes ON when the Dimmer
& Passing SW is set to the "Passing"
position.
151 Lighting I Lamp Output ON/OFF Output value to the tail & illumination
relay. Becomes ON when the tail &
illumination relay is operated.
152 Lighting II Lamp Output ON/OFF Output value to the low beam relay.
Becomes ON when the low beam re-
lay is operated.
153 Lighting Hi Lamp Output ON/OFF Output value to the high beam relay. For North American
Becomes ON when the high beam models: Becomes ON
relay is operated. also at the time of DRL
lighting.
154 Front Fog Lamp Output ON/OFF Output value to the front fog light re-
lay. Becomes ON when the front fog
light relay is operated.
155 DRL Cancel Output ON/OFF Output value to the DRL (Daytime This item is applied
Running Lights) cancel circuit. Be- only to North American
comes ON when the Dimmer & models.
Passing switch is set to the "High
beam" position.
156 Power Supply Tr ON/OFF Output value to the transistor supply-
ing back-up voltage to the headlight.
Becomes ON in the following cases.
When the ignition SW is OFF and
the lighting SW is set to the "Tail" po-
sition. Becomes ON when the light-
ing SW is set to the "ACC" position
or to ON.
157 Foot Lamp Output ON/OFF Output value to foot lamp RH or LH.
Becomes ON when foot lamp RH or
foot lamp LH is switched on.
158 Off delay time OFF, Short, Nor- Set value for the delay time until the
mal, Long room lamp goes out.
159 Auto lock time 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 Set value for the auto locking time. This item is applied
sec only to models other
than for North America
and U.K.
160 Outside Temp. Offset °C(-2.0, -1.5, Offset value for discrepancy correc- BIU can be set in incre-
-1.0, -0.5, 0, 0.5, tion of outside air temperature and ments of 0.5°C but the
1.0, 1.5, 2.0) display value. display only shows in-
crements of 1°C.

294
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

161 Rr defogger op. mode Continue/Normal Set value for the rear defogger oper-
ation time.
Normal: Automatically stops 15 min-
utes after switch has been turned on.
Continue: Turns on for 15 minutes
and turns off for 2 minutes repeated-
ly until switch is turned off.
162 Wiper deicer op. mode Continue/Normal Set value for the wiper deicer opera-
tion time.
Normal: Automatically stops 15 min-
utes after switch has been turned on.
Continue: Turns on for 15 minutes
and turns off for 2 minutes repeated-
ly until switch is turned off.
163 Security Alarm Setup ON/OFF Set value for the alarm at the time of This item is applied
security system operation. only to models for Ja-
ON: The alarm (hazard, horn or si- pan and North Ameri-
ren) operates. ca.
OFF: The alarm does not operate.
164 Impact Sensor Setup ON/OFF Impact sensor operation set value. When set to “ON”, it be-
ON: The impact sensor operates. comes effective when
OFF: The impact sensor does not the “Impact sensor” is
operate. set to “ON”.
This item is applied
only to models for Ja-
pan and North Ameri-
ca.
165 Alarm delay setup ON/OFF Set value for the delay time of the se- This item is applied
curity system. only to models for Ja-
ON: The alarm monitoring function pan and North Ameri-
operates 30 sec after keyless lock- ca.
ing.
OFF: The alarm monitoring function
operates simultaneously with key-
less locking.
166 Lockout prevention ON/OFF Set value for the key lockout preven- This item is applied to
tion function. models other than U.K.
ON: The lockout prevention function
operates.
OFF: The lockout prevention func-
tion is stopped.

295
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

167 Impact sensor ON/OFF Set value of the impact sensor Must be set to “OFF” for
equipped or not equipped. vehicles not equipped
ON: Control in impact sensor in- with an impact sensor.
stalled mode. Warning (hazard, horn
OFF: Control in impact sensor not in- or siren) operates erro-
stalled mode. neously when set to
“ON”.
This item is applied
only to models for Ja-
pan and North Ameri-
ca.
168 Siren setting ON/OFF Set value of the siren equipped or Must be set to “OFF” for
not equipped. vehicles not equipped
ON: The siren operates at the time of with a siren. When set
alarm operation. to “ON”, the horn does
OFF: The horn operates at the time not operate at the time
of alarm operation. of alarm operation.
This item is applied
only to Japanese mod-
els.
169 Answer-back buzzer setup ON/OFF Answer-back buzzer operation set
value.
ON: The buzzer operates at the time
of keyless lock/unlock operation.
OFF: The buzzer does not operate
at the time of keyless lock/unlock op-
eration.
170 Hazard answer-back setup ON/OFF Hazard answer-back operation set
value.
ON: The hazard lamp operates at
the time of keyless lock/unlock oper-
ation.
OFF: The hazard lamp does not op-
erate at the time of keyless lock/un-
lock operation.
171 Automatic locking setup ON/OFF Auto lock operation set value. When set to “ON”, it be-
ON: Auto lock operates. comes effective when
OFF: Auto lock does not operate. “Auto locking” is set to
“ON”.
This item is applied to
models other than for
North America and
U.K..
172 Ans.-back Buzzer ON/OFF Set value of the answer-back buzzer Must be set to “OFF” for
equipped or not equipped. vehicles not equipped
ON: Control in answer-back buzzer with an answer-back
installed mode. buzzer.
OFF: Control in answer-back buzzer
not installed mode.

296
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

173 Auto locking ON/OFF Set value of the auto lock equipped Must be set to “OFF” for
or not equipped. vehicles not equipped
ON: Control in auto locking installed with auto locking.
mode. This item is applied to
OFF: Control in auto locking not in- models other than for
stalled mode. North America and
U.K.
174 Initial Keyless Setting — Function for initializing the set values No.141:30 sec.,
related to the keyless entry system. No.150:OFF,
No.151:ON,
No.152:ON,
No.153:OFF
175 Initial button setting — Function for initializing the set values No.140:Normal,
for the various function settings. No.142:Normal,
No.143:Normal,
No.147:ON
176 Initial Security setting — Function for initializing the set values No.144:OFF,
related to the security system. No.145:OFF,
No.146:ON,
No.149:OFF
177 Select unlock switch Selection/ALL Set value for switching between se- This item is applied
lect unlock and all seats unlock. only to European mod-
Selection: Control in select unlock els.
mode.
ALL: Control in all seats unlock
mode.
178 Passive Alarm ON/OFF Passive alarm system ON/OFF set This item is applied
value. only to North American
ON: Control in passive alarm system models.
equipped mode.
OFF: Control in passive alarm sys-
tem not equipped mode.
179 Door open warning support / no sup- Set value for the door open warning
port function.
support: When door open condition
continues for 30 minutes or more,
the room lamp, the key ring illumina-
tion, and the door warning lamp in-
terlocked with doors will be turned
off to prevent battery failure.
no support : Room lamp, key ring il-
lumination, and door warning are lit
continuously.

297
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

180 Dome Light Alarm Setting ON/OFF Set value for room lamp lighting or This item is applied
not at the time of alarm by the secu- only to models for Ja-
rity system. pan and North Ameri-
ON: The room lamp is lit continuous- ca.
ly at the time of alarm.
OFF: At the time of an alarm, the
room lamp goes out after the set de-
lay time.
181 Map Light Setting ON/OFF Set value whether the map lamp is to
be light interlocked to the room lamp
or not at the time of door opening.
ON: The map lamp also light inter-
locked with the dome light.
OFF: The map lamp remains off and
does not light interlocked with the
dome light.
182 Belt Warning Switch ON/OFF Setting value that controls activation/
non-activation of the Seat Belt Warn-
ing System warning buzzer and
warning light.
183 Keyless P/W Switch ON/OFF Setting value that controls whether This item is applied
or not the power window will operate only to Japanese mod-
when the keyless lock/unlock button els.
is depressed and held down.
184 A/C ECM setting support / no sup- Set value of the auto A/C ECM When this item is not
port equipped or not equipped. set correctly, the illumi-
Set to “support” for vehicles nation control may not
equipped with the A/C ECM. function correctly.
185 P/W ECM setting support / no sup- Set value of the power window ECM
port equipped or not equipped.
Set to “support” for vehicles
equipped with power window ECM.
186 Center display setting support / no sup- Set value of the center display When this is set to “no
port equipped or not equipped. support” for vehicles
Set to “support” for vehicles equipped with a center
equipped with a center display. display, the center dis-
play information may
not be displayed cor-
rectly.
187 wiperdeicer support / no sup- Set value of the wiper deicer When this is set to “no
port equipped or not equipped. support” for vehicles
Set to “support” for vehicles equipped with a wiper
equipped with a wiper deicer. deicer, the wiper deicer
will not operate even
when the wiper deicer
switch is set to ON.

298
 List of Contents on Displayed Data

No. Items to be displayed Unit of measure Contents Remarks

188 Rear fog light setting support / no sup- Set value of the rear fog lamp When this is set to “no
port equipped or not equipped. support” for vehicles
Set to “support” for vehicles equipped with a rear
equipped with a rear fog lamp. fog lamp, the rear fog
lamp will not operate
when the rear fog lamp
switch is set to ON.
189 Illumination Control On/Off support/no sup- Illumination control function effec-
port tive/disabled setting. Set to "support"
for vehicles equipped with illumina-
tion control.
190 Sedan/Wagon Setting Wagon/Sedan Vehicle type set value. Set to "Wag-
on" for wagons and to "Sedan" for
sedans.
191 MT/AT Setting AT/MT Transmission type set value. Set to
"AT" for AT vehicles and to "MT" for
MT vehicles.
192 6MT Setting 6MT/Other than Transmission type set value. Set to
6MT "6MT" for 6MT vehicles.
193 Double Lock On/Off Set- support/no sup- Double lock. Function effective/disa-
ting port bled set value. Set to "support" for
vehicles equipped with double lock.
194 Factory or Market setting Factory/Market Factory mode set value. In case of setting to
This item must be set to “Market”. “Factory”, the set val-
ues for No. 163 to 166
all are set to “no sup-
port”, so that the corre-
sponding items must
be set again.
195 Security setup ON/OFF Set value of the security system This item applies only
equipped or not equipped. to models for U.K.
Set to “ON” for vehicles equipped
with a security system.

299
 Communication Error Code List

Communication Error Code List

Error Message
• Interface box is not connected.
• Communication error has occurred.
• Not enough memory to execute application.
• Communication port could not be opened.
• Write operation to the communication port failed.
• Read operation from the communication port failed.
• Error occurred while communicating with the interface box.
• Communication initialization failed.
• Interface box cannot be found.
• A valid interface box is not connected.
• System does not Support this Function.
• Printing cannot be executed with the selected printer. Select another printer, and execute the command
again.

Error Code Required Action

4007 Check the status of the USB cable connection.
4112 (There may be a break in the USB cable.)
4008 Data is not being sent from the control module of the system for which fault diagnosis is being per-
4015 formed. Confirm that the ignition switch is turned on. Also confirm that interface box power is turned on.
4112
4100 There is not enough PC memory. If there are other applications running on the PC, shut them down.
4108 There is a problem with the USB port that is currently being used. If the PC has more than one USB
4109 port, try using a different one. If the PC has only one USB port, it may be defective. Check the USB port.
4110
4112
4111 Digital noise may be getting into the USB cable and/or diagnosis cable, causing a problem with commu-
4112 nication. Eliminate the source of the digital noise.
4113
4114
4115
4116
4117
4118
4119 The USB device driver is not installed on the PC. Re-install the latest PC application.
4200
4201 The vehicle for which fault diagnosis is being performed does not support the SSMΙΙΙ. Also, there may
4202 be some abnormality with some of the PC application data. Re-install the latest PC application.
4208 Printing cannot be executed with the selected printer. Select another printer, and execute the command
again. Also, check the printer cable connection and printer settings.

300
 Communication Error Code List

Error Message
• Present software doesn’t support this System. Communication will be finished.

Error Code Required Action

None The vehicle for which fault diagnosis is being performed does not support the SSMΙΙΙ. Also, there may
be some abnormality with some of the PC application data. Re-install the latest PC application.

Error Message
• Communication Initialization Failed. Communication initialization will be finished.

Error Code Required Action

None • The selection on the menu for selecting a particular system may be for a system that is not equipped
on the vehicle for which fault diagnosis is performed.
• Perform the same action as that described for error code 4112.

301
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

ECM Reprogramming Error Code List (PC Display)
Pass Thru<SSMΙΙΙ>&Remote<NSM>

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
102 Cannot open file. If failed to open the PAK file. 1. Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
rect.
2. Close all applications opened.
3. Re-start Windows.
4. Re-install SSMΙΙΙ (PC applica-
tion)
103 Error occurred while reading file. If failed to read from the PAK. 1. Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
rect.
2. Close all applications opened.
3. Re-start Windows.
4. Re-install SSMΙΙΙ (PC applica-
tion)
104 Error occurred while writing file. If failed to write to the PAK file. 1. Make sure if there is enough
space in selected drive for its safe.
2. Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
rect.
3. Close all applications opened.
4. Re-start Windows.
5. Re-install SSMΙΙΙ (PC applica-
tion)
105 The file’s format is invalid. Specify If the PAK file format is invalid. 1. Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
a correct file. rect.
2. Close all applications opened.
3. Re-start Windows.
4. Re-install SSMΙΙΙ (PC applica-
tion)
107 Error occurred in the encryption. If failed to encrypt the PAK file. 1. Close all applications opened.
2. Re-start Windows.
3. Re-install SSMΙΙΙ (PC applica-
tion)
108 Error occurred in the decryption. If failed to create a complex file. 1. Confirm the complexed key
Check the decryption keyword. word.
2. Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
rect.
1000 Memory allocation error occurred. If the PC memory does not have 1. Close all applications opened.
enough space. 2. Re-start Windows.
1001 The file’s format is invalid or not If thePAK file format is invalid. Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
supported. rect.

302
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Pass Thru<SSMΙΙΙ>
Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4000 Cannot make a thread. It might be a lack of memories, 1.Close all applications opened.
opened too many applications si- 2. Re-start Windows.
multaneously or etc.
4001 Cannot find the Pass-Thru device. Cannot find the Pass-thru device, Re-install SSMΙΙΙ (PC application).
which is registered the registry.
4004 Received Invalid ECU messages. If a format of the message re- 1. Make sure if the ignition switch
ceived from ECM is invalid. is in “ON” position.
2. Re-try after the data link con-
nector is connected.
3. Confirm the connection of the
USB cable.
4007 NO response from the ECU. 1. If there is no response from 1. Make sure if the ignition switch
Check the cause of NO response. ECM. is in “ON” position.
2. Displayed if the connector caus- 2. Re-try after the data link con-
es a connection failure. It might be nector is connected.
a harness failure as well. 3. Check the harness of the vehi-
cle.
4. Replace ECM if the above 1, 2
& 3 methods do not work.
4009 Received invalid ECU identifica- If the ECM identification (SSM ID) 1. Make sure if the ignition switch
tion (SSMID). received from ECM is invalid. is in “ON” position.
2. Re-try after the data link con-
nector is connected.
3. Confirm the connection of USB.
4011 Cannot reprogram while the en- If an engine revolution is detected Shut-down the engine.
gine is running. by the reprogramming condition
Stop the engine to retry. check.
4013 Connect the test mode connector If you detect the test mode con- Make sure if the test mode con-
and click OK to retry. nector not connected by the repro- nector is connected.
gramming condition check.
4014 The read memory switch is NOt If you detect the read memory Make sure if the read memory
connected. connector not connected by the connector is connected.
Connect the read memory switch reprogramming condition check.
to retry.
4015 The ignition switch turns off. If an ignition OFF is detected by Make sure if the ignition switch is
Retry from the beginning. the reprogramming condition in “ON” position.
check.
4016 The shift position is not P. If you detect the shift range is not Make sure if the shift range is in
Select the P position to retry. the “P” range by the reprogram- “P” position.
ming condition check.

303
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4018 Battery voltage is out of specified If you detect the battery voltage is 1. Replace the battery with a new
range. out of the range of standardized one or charge the battery.
Reprogramming cannot be done. range by the reprogramming con- It is prohibited to rewrite during
dition check. (Standardized range battery charging.
of the battery voltage: 10V to 14V) 2. As for the case of “Off the Car”
reprogramming, adjust generated
voltage of the inverter within the
range of the standard voltage.
4019 ECU flash ROM is not rewritable. If you detect the flash ROM in Re-try from the first step after igni-
Reprogramming is aborted. ECM is not rewritable by the repro- tion OFF.
gramming condition check.
4021 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error on the check sum after 1. Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
Reprogramming is aborted. the control software is transferred rect.
is detected. 2. Re-try after the data link con-
(Failed to transfer the control soft- nector is reconnected.
ware.) 3. Confirm the connection of the
USB cable.
4. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4022 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error on the check sum after 1. Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
Reprogramming is aborted. the application software is trans- rect.
ferred is detected. 2. Re-try after the data link con-
(Failed to transfer the application nector is reconnected.
software.) 3. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
4. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4023 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error occurs while the control 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. software is transferred. nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4024 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error occurs while the appli- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cation software is transferred. nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4025 The ECU does not have valid If a ROM ID after the reprogram- Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
identification of after rewriting. ming did not match with an expect- rect.
Rewriting may not be complete. ed one.
4028 Latest logic has already been in- If you try to re-execute reprogram- Reprogramming is not necessary.
stalled. ming on ECM, which has already
been reprogrammed.
(If the ECM has already been up-
dated.)

304
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4029 This ECU is not suitable for repro- If you perform reprogramming on 1. Make sure if the PAK file is cor-
gramming. ECM, which is not registered in the rect.
PAK file. 2. Confirm the connection of the
(If ECM is not the one applicable.) USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4030 CanNOt erase the Flash ROM on If failed to erase the flash ROM on 1. Re-try after the data link con-
the ECU. ECM. nector is reconnected.
Reprogramming is aborted. 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4031 Error occurred in communication. If failed to restart (reset) ECM. 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4032 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Start Communi- nector is reconnected.
cation). 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4033 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Access Timing nector is reconnected.
Parameter). 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4034 The verification has failed. If an error occurs during the secu- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. rity verification before the repro- nector is reconnected.
gramming. 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4035 Error occurred in communication. If a communication error occurs 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. while the condition check for re- nector is reconnected.
programming. 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.

305
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4036 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Request Down- nector is reconnected.
load). 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4037 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Start Diagnostic nector is reconnected.
Session). 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4040 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Transfer Data). nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4041 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Check SUM). nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4042 Cannot clear the memory. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Perform the following steps.
cating with the ECM (Memory 1) The ignition key is OFF for 3
Clear). seconds, then ignition key is
It may occur the error if the ignition ON for 3 seconds.
key is operated too quickly. 2) Perform memory clear by us-
(Wait 3 seconds after the ignition ing SSMΙΙΙ.
key is off.) 3) The ignition key is OFF for 3
seconds.
If reprogramming starts, it is
successful.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connector.
4043 Cannot erase the Flash ROM on If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
the ECU. cating with ECM (Erase Flash). nector is reconnected.
Reprogramming is aborted. 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4045 Cannot reprogram when the vehi- If speed of the vehicle is detected The vehicle stops. (vehicle speed
cle is running. by the reprogramming condition is zero).
Stop the vehicle to retry. check.

306
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4046 Error occurred in the Pass-Thru If an error is detected from the 1. Re-try after the data link con-
device. pass-thru device's error. nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
4046:7 Cannot open communication port. If SDI is not connected. 1. Make sure if the ignition switch
is in 'ON' position.
2. Confirm if the power of SDI is
ON.
3. Re-try after the data link con-
nector is reconnected.
4.Make sure the connection of the
USB cable.
4047 Programming voltage is below If the voltage (Vpp) for writing is 1. Check the harness of the vehi-
specified low limit. below the standard. cle.
Reprogramming is aborted. It might be a harness failure. 2. Replace ECM.
4048 Programming voltage is above If the voltage (Vpp) for writing is 1. Check the harness of the vehi-
specified high limit. higher than the standard. cle.
Reprogramming is aborted. 2. Replace ECM.
4049 Programming voltage is out of If the voltage (Vpp) for writing 1. Check the harness of the vehi-
specified range. does not meet the standard. cle.
Reprogramming is aborted. It might be a harness failure. 2. Replace ECM.
4053 Cannot set reprogramming volt- If failed to apply the voltage (Vpp) 1. Re-try after the data link con-
age. for writing. nector is reconnected.
Reprogramming is aborted. 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
4054 Cannot find the supported device. If the pass-thru device registered Re-install SSMΙΙΙ. (PC application)
Reprogramming is aborted. in the registry can not be found.
4055 Entry of boot mode has failed. Migration to the ECM reprogram- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
ming mode is failed. nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4056 Error occurred in communication. Communication error 1. Re-try after the data link con-
nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
4057 Latest logic has already been in- If the sub-logic has already been Reprogramming is not necessary.
stalled. updated when the main logic and
the sub-logic are rewritten simulta-
neously.
4058 Latest logic has already been in- If the main logic has already been Reprogramming is not necessary.
stalled. updated when the main logic and
the sub-logic are rewritten simulta-
neously.

307
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4059 No response from the ECU. If no response from the sub-logic 1. Re-try after the data link con-
when the main logic and the sub- nector is reconnected.
logic are rewritten simultaneously. 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4060 No response from the ECU. If no response from the main logic 1. Re-try after the data link con-
when the main logic and the sub- nector is reconnected.
logic are rewritten simultaneously. 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4061 This ECU is not suitable for repro- If the sub-ECM is not an applica- Reprogramming is not necessary
gramming. ble one when the main logic and
the sub-logic are rewritten simulta-
neously.
4062 Rewrite is not done. If there is no applicable ECM for Reprogramming is not necessary
reprogramming.
4063 The delivery mode connector is If the test mode connector is not Make sure the connection of the
not connected. connected test mode connector.
Connect the delivery mode con-
nector to retry.
4064 Auto Mode is not valid for this ve- If the auto mode is selected to the Perform reprogramming after se-
hicle. manual selection data. lecting the manual mode.
Use Manual Mode.
4065 Selected PART NO/ROM ID are The error occurs if a vehicle is not Perform reprogramming by re-se-
not for this vehicle. the one with selected parts lecting the applicable one for writ-
Select the Part NO/ROM ID again. number and the ROM ID, which ing in the manual mode.
are specified when the manual se-
lection was rewritten.
4066 Session mode failure. Turn off the Error on the session mode due to 1. Re-try after the data link con-
ignition switch and retry. it is the default session. nector is reconnected.
* If it is the default session after the 2. Confirm the connection of the
session was changed to the ex- USB connection.
tended session. 3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4067 Session mode failure. Turn off the Error on the session mode due to 1. Re-try after the data link con-
ignition switch and retry. it is the programming session. nector is reconnected.
* If it is the programming session 2. Confirm the connection of the
while the initial communication. USB connection.
* If it is the programming session 3. Re-try from the first step after
after the session was changed to the ignition OFF.
the extended session.

308
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4068 Session mode failure. Turn off the Error on the session mode due to 1. Re-try after the data link con-
ignition switch and retry. it is the extended session. nector is reconnected.
* If it is the extended session while 2. Confirm the connection of the
the initial communication. USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4100 Version code of software for re- If the version of the control soft- Make sure if the PAK file is correct.
write control is NG. ware in ECM is not correct.
4101 Error on rewrite data in flash ROM. If an error occurs during ECM re- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
writing. nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4102 Communication speed (bps) can If the baud rate which does not 1. Re-try after the data link con-
not be set. meet ECM standard is specified nector is reconnected.
by ECM. 2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4103 Rewrite time exceeds the limit. If exceeded the limit of the number Replace ECM.
of ECM reprogramming.
4104 The range of the Rewriting Volt- If the voltage (Vpp) input to the 1. Re-try by reconnecting the ca-
age is not satisfied. ECM for writing does not meet the ble connector or replace the cable
Check the contact of OBD Con- standard. (judged by ECM). with a new one due to it might be a
nector. It might be a harness failure. contact failure of the connector.
After try to rewrite again. 2. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4105 Software for rewrite control is NG. If the control software on ECM is Make sure if the PAK file is correct.
not correct.
4106 Rewritten software for engine con- If the engine control software on Make sure if the PAK file is correct.
trol in ECM is NG. ECM is not correct.
4107 Error occurred in communication. Communication error with ECM Re-try from the first step after the
ignition OFF.
4108 Programming voltage is below Communication error Re-try from the first step after the
specified low limit. ignition OFF.
Reprogramming is aborted.
4150 “Is IG. SW on?”, The error for rewriting request on 1. Keep the following steps.
“engine is stalling.” ECM. 1) Stop the engine.
Procedure is trying again. ECM refuses its rewrite. 2) The Ignition key is in “ON”
If the engine is running or the igni- position.
tion is OFF. 2. If the above “1.” do not work, re-
place ECM with a new one.

309
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4152 No response from ECM to rewrite No response from ECM on the er- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
signal. ror with rewriting request. nector is reconnected.
This error is displayed once only 2. Make sure the harness of the
after the communication can be vehicle.
done.
It might be a disconnection error
such as a contact failure during
the rewriting.
Also, it may be a harness failure.
4153 No response from ECM. The error not responded from 1. Re-try after the data link con-
ECM. nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4155 Rewrite voltage is NG. Voltage (Vpp) for writings input to 1. Re-try by reconnecting the ca-
Is connector connection OK? the ECM is reported as an error. It ble connector or replace the cable
After confirmation, click “OK” then is judged by ECM. with a new one due to it might be a
return to forward Vpp signal. Displayed if the voltage for writ- contact failure of the cable.
ings is not normal. 2. If the above action does not
It might be a harness failure. work, replace the ECM with a new
one.
4157 Received error code signal of flash Communication error on ECM. Replace the ECM with a new one.
ROM. ECM judged that an error on the (ECM failure).
rewriting.
If a rewriting error occurs in ECM.
4401 Error occurred while rewriting. Confirmation on retry after the re- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Click “YES” to reprogram again. writing error. nector is reconnected.
2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Confirm if the PAK file is correct.
4. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4402 Error in rewritten data verifying. Confirmation on retry after the ver- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Click “YES” to reprogram again. ifying error. nector is reconnected.
2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Confirm if the PAK file is correct.
4. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4403 Turn off the ignition switch and re- If the message, “Off the car Repro- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
try. gramming?”, appeared and you nector is reconnected.
If the error repeats, possibly CAN clicked “No”, although it was not 2. Confirm the connection of the
failure. reprogrammed off the car. (If you USB connection.
do the reprogramming on the car, 3. Re-try from the first step after
normally the message, “Off the car the ignition OFF.
Reprogramming?”, does not ap-
pear.)

310
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4404 Failed to change the session If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
mode. cating with ECM (Diagnostic Ses- nector is reconnected.
Reprogramming is aborted. sion Control 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4405 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Control DTC nector is reconnected.
Setting). 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4406 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Communication nector is reconnected.
Control). 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4407 The verification has failed. If an error occurs on security veri- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. fication before the reprogram- nector is reconnected.
ming. 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4408 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Request Down- nector is reconnected.
load). 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4409 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error occurs while transfer the 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. program. nector is reconnected.
2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.

311
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4411 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Request Trans- nector is reconnected.
fer Exit). 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4412 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error is detected on the check 1. Confirm if the PAK file is correct.
Reprogramming is aborted. SUM after the program was trans- 2. Re-try after the data link con-
ferred or no response to the re- nector is reconnected.
quirement. 3. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
4. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4413 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Request Down- nector is reconnected.
load). 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4414 Cannot erase the Flash ROM on If the ECM flash ROM cannot be 1. Re-try after the data link con-
the ECM. deleted . nector is reconnected.
Reprogramming is aborted. 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4415 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error occurs while transfer the 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. program nector is reconnected.
2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4416 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Request Trans- nector is reconnected.
fer Exit). 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.

312
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4417 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error is detected on the check 1. Confirm if the PAK file is correct.
Reprogramming is aborted. SUM after the program was trans- 2. Re-try after the data link con-
ferred or no response to the re- nector is reconnected.
quirement. 3. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
4. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4418 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Request Up- nector is reconnected.
load). 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4419 Error occurred in communication. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Confirm if the PAK file is correct.
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Read out ROM) 2. Re-try after the data link con-
or while the verification. nector is reconnected.
3. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
4. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4420 Error occurred while rewriting. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Reprogramming is aborted. cating with ECM (Request Trans- nector is reconnected.
fer Exit). (Read out ROM) 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4421 Cannot clear the memory. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Perform the following steps.
cating with ECM (Memory clear). 1) The ignition key is OFF for 3
seconds, then ignition key is
ON for 3 seconds.
2) Memory clear by using
SSMΙΙΙ.
3) The ignition key is OFF for 3
seconds.

2. Make sure the connection of

USB connector.

313
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
4422 Cannot clear the memory. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Perform the following steps.
cating with the integrated unit or 1) The ignition key is OFF for 3
ABS (memory clear). seconds, then ignition key is
ON for 3 seconds.
2) Memory clear by using
SSMΙΙΙ.
3) The ignition key is OFF for 3
seconds.

2. Make sure the connection of

USB connector.
4423 Cannot clear the memory. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
cating with the integrated unit nector is reconnected.
(Read DTC) or if the acquired DTC 2. Confirm the connection of the
are more than one. USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4425 Cannot clear the memory. If an error occurs while communi- 1. Re-try after the data link con-
cating with ABS (Start Diagnostic nector is reconnected.
Session). 2. Confirm the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Re-try from the first step after
the ignition OFF.
4. Make sure the harness of the
vehicle.
4501 Reprogramming has failed. The error is detected on the check 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Click “YES” to reprogram again. SUM. nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Confirm if the PAK file is correct.
4. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.
4517 Error in rewritten data verifying. The error is detected during the 1. Re-try after the data link con-
Click “YES” to reprogram again. verification. nector is reconnected.
2. Make sure the connection of the
USB connection.
3. Confirm if the PAK file is correct.
4. Re-try from the first step after ig-
nition OFF.

314
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Remote<NSM>
Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
3000 Cannot open the serial port. If failed to open the RS-232C com- 1. Confirm if the COM port number
munication port using for writing to for the PC cable is the same
the cartridge. number as the one selected at the
option.
2. Confirm the connection of the
PC cable.
3. Confirm if NSM power is ON.
4. Close all the applications, which
are opened.
(Especially applications, which are
using the COM port.)
3001 Cannot write to serial port. If failed to transmit to the RS-232C 1. Make sure if the COM port
communication port using for writ- number for the PC cable connec-
ing to the cartridge. tion is as the same number as the
one specified at the option.
2. Confirm the connection of the
PC cable.
3. Make sure if the NSM power is
ON.
4. Close all of the other applica-
tions opened.
(Especially for an application,
which is using the COM port.)
3002 Cannot read from serial port. If you failed to receive from the 1. Make sure if the COM port
RS-232C communication port us- number for the PC cable connec-
ing for writing to the cartridge. tion is as the same number as the
one specified at the option.
2. Confirm the connection of the
PC cable.
3. Make sure if the NSM power is
ON.
4. Close all of the other applica-
tions opened.
(Especially for an application,
which is using the COM port.)
3012 User cancelled. If the rewriting process of the car- Perform the down-load (Remote)
tridge is cancelled by clicking “NO” again if necessary.
key during the process.
3022 Error occurred while erasing the If failed to erase the cartridge flash 1. Make sure the PC cable con-
cartridge. ROM. nection.
2. Re-install SSMΙΙΙ. (PC applica-
tion)
3. Replace the cartridge.

315
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
3023 Error occurred while writing the If failed to write to the cartridge 1. Make sure the PC cable con-
cartridge. flash ROM. nection.
2. Re-install SSMΙΙΙ. (PC applica-
tion)
3. Replace the cartridge.
3024 Error occurred while reading the If failed to read the data on the car- 1. Make sure the PC cable con-
cartridge data. tridge. nection.
2. Re-install SSMΙΙΙ. (PC applica-
tion)
3. Replace the cartridge.
3025 Timeout occurred during commu- If a time-out occurs during the 1. Make sure the PC cable con-
nication. communication of the cartridge re- nection.
writing. 2. Close all of the other applica-
tions opened.
3. Re-start Windows.
4. Re-install SSMΙΙΙ. (PC applica-
tion)
3031 Cancelled rewriting the cartridge. If the rewriting process on the car- Perform the down-load (Remote)
The cartridge is invalid. tridge is cancelled. again.
3032 Error occurred while rewriting the If the rewriting process on the car- Perform the down-load (Remote)
cartridge. tridge is stopped by an error. again.
The cartridge is invalid.
3054 Rewriting the cartridge has failed. If an error occurs on the check 1. Make sure the PC cable con-
The cartridge is invalid. SUM after rewriting the cartridge. nection.
2. Replace the cartridge.

ECM Reprogramming Error Code List (NSM LCD Display)

Remote<NSM>

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
- Command Error Occurred! If an undefined command is used 1. Make sure the RS232C cable
between the PC and NSM. connection.
2. Follow the steps with the error
message on the PC.
- Formatting Error Occurred! If the command parameter used 1. Make sure the RS232C cable
between the PC and NSM has an connection.
error. 2. Follow the steps with the error
message on the PC.
- Error occurred during writing If failed to rewrite the flash memo- Make sure whether it is writable if
ry in the cartridge. the cartridge is write-protect.
- Error Occurred Deleting! If failed to delete the flash memory Make sure whether it is writable if
in the cartridge. the cartridge is write-protect.

316
 ECM Reprogramming Error Code List

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective action
Code
- Read error occurred If failed to read the data in the car- Make sure the RS232C cable con-
tridge. nection.
- Communication Error Occurred! If a serial communication error or 1. Make sure the RS232C cable
command time-out has occurred. connection.
2. Follow the steps with the error
message on the PC.
- Error occurred If an error none of the above has Follow the steps with the error
occurred on the PC. message on the PC.

317
 SSMΙΙΙ revision history

SSMΙΙΙ revision history

PC CF
Release Application Application Main revision history Remarks
version version
Jan. 2005 Ver.1.1.7.10 Ver.1.0.16 Trigger function is added.
Analog measurement function is add-
ed.
Remote box function is added.
Data cut-and-save function is added.
Display function of cursor numerical
value information between two points
is added.
Setting all clear function is added.
Initialization function of sampling item
sequence is added.
Function to move graph cursor with
mouse is added.
Marking button is modified. M key only → Numerical keys, al-
phabetical keys or symbol keys
Icon for data list tool bar is added.
Function of [<<] button and [>>] but- Skips 10 data → Skips 1 page
ton when displaying saved data is
modified.
Overwriting saved data after making
changes becomes possible (e.g.
marking is added, sampling items is
changed, range is added, comment is
added).
File extension of saved data is linked
to PC application.
SDI power OFF function is added. [MENU] key + [Down] key
Initialization function is added for lan- Turning the power ON with C key
guage setting in SDI stand alone. pressed will return the language
setting to English.
PAK file search software is improved.
FlashWrite is improved.
PAK is added.

318
 SSMΙΙΙ revision history

PC CF
Release Application Application Main revision history Remarks
version version
Feb. Ver.1.1.7.13 Ver.1.0.16 Improvement for forced termination
2005 with OBD not to occur is made.
SDI auto update becomes possible.
Misspelled words for PAK file search
software is corrected.
Ver.1.1.7.16 Ver.1.0.16 Diagnosis function of 06MY B9
TRIBECA is added.
First decimal place is added for psi-
unit display.
Error in 06MY trouble code is correct-
ed.
Release date (month, year) is added
for version information.
Apr. 2005 Ver.1.2.10.9 Ver.1.0.36 Roughness monitor function is added.
Ver.1.2.10.10
Keyless ID registration function is
added.
Keyless ECM customize function is
added.
Diagnosis of 98MY to 00MY model
are added for PC application.
Diagnosis of 06MY LEGACY/IMPRE-
ZA/FORESTER are added for PC ap-
plication.
Trigger line for trigger function is mod-
ified.
Line width, line color and range infor-
mation of graph data can be saved.
Data display function is added for SDI
stand alone diagnosis.
Body integrated ECM customize func-
tion is added for SDI stand alone diag-
nosis.
Immobilizer registration function is
added for SDI stand alone diagnosis.

319
 SSMΙΙΙ revision history

PC CF
Release Application Application Main revision history Remarks
version version
Jul. 2005 Ver.1.3.11.12 Ver.1.1.50 ECM Analog simultaneous measure-
Ver.1.3.11.13 ment function is added.
Function for converting sampled data
to CSV is added.
Function to save screen data as BMP
file is added.
All extensions of sampled data can be
displayed.
Average speed of each cylinder can
be displayed in Roughness Monitor.
Immobilizer for 06 MY European
specifications is supported for PC ap-
plication.
Diagnosis function of JUSTY is added
for PC application.
Add function to recover automatically Update is performed again when
when SDI firmware update is failed. selecting system.
Function to display a note on the SDI
screen during SDI firmware update is
added.
Stand alone function is added for 06
MY vehicles (except immobilizer reg-
istration for 06 MY European specifi-
cations).
HELP file can be displayed in multi-
language.
Oct. 2005 Ver.1.4.13.11 Ver. 1.2.1 Marking delete function is added.
Ver.1.4.13.12
Function to display a list of custom-
ized settings for body integrated mod-
ule is added.
Function to save stand alone meas-
urement data is added.
Diagnosis of 98MY to 00MY models is
supported for stand alone.
Immobilizer of 06MY is supported for
stand alone.
Driving recorder of previous models
(98MY or later) is supported. [Engine,
AT]
ECM Analog Simultaneous Measure-
ment (SDR) is added.

320
 SSMΙΙΙ revision history

PC CF
Release Application Application Main revision history Remarks
version version
Jan. 2006 Ver. 1.5.17.3 Ver. 1.2.3 Added toolbar initializing function
Ver. 1.5.17.4
Improved the function which caused For 06MY LEGACY excluding
an error that Air-bag Warning Lump North America
turns on while sampling data by AT
system
Apr. 2006 Ver. 1.6.19.3 Ver. 1.2.7 Supports diagnosis by CAN commu-
Ver. 1.6.19.4 nication
Supports reprogramming by CAN
communication
Diagnosis support on 07MY vehicles
(PC application, stand-alone)
Improvement of the self-shutdown
function which caused the error that
activated the function during the
stand-alone sampling.
Improvement of the function which
caused the error that the DTC of en-
gine does not display on some of 98-
99MY vehicles.
Improvement of the high-grade rough-
ness monitor function which caused
the error after switching the authority
from the administrator to the user
when sampling. (from Ver. 1.5.17.5)
Improvement of the high-grade rough-
ness monitor function which occurred
the error when displaying maximum
and minimum engine speed. (from
Ver. 1.5.17.5)
Improvement of the high-grade rough-
ness monitor function which occurred
the error caused by the noise.
Changed the system compliance ver-
ification window of the immobilizer
registration function.
Added the Notes section to Details on
SearchFlashWrite.
Changed part of the screen display on
the BIU mode and keyless unit mode.

321
 SSMΙΙΙ revision history

PC CF
Release Application Application Main revision history Remarks
version version
Jul. 2006 Ver1.7.19.13 Ver1.2.12 Improvement of the system operation For fuel pump control mode
Ver1.7.19.14 check mode which occurred the com-
munication error. (from Ver. 1.6.19.9)
Improvement of the part of DTC differ- For before 06MY LEGACY
ent from service manuals on BIU.
(from Ver. 1.6.19.9)
Supports link with service manuals
(Excluding North America)
Oct. 2006 Ver1.8.23.8 Ver1.2.15 Saved data multiple display function is
Ver1.8.23.9 added.
Improvement of communication on For 98MY and 99MY models
engine system OBD mode occurred
an error. (from Ver. 1.7.19.15)
Improvement of analog sampling com- For Windows 2000
munication occurred an error. (from
Ver. 1.7.19.15)
Countermeasure for the noise of an
engine speed.
(Occasionally, the rotation number
data instantly goes up and down 60
rpm while sampling an engine speed.)
Solved the air-bag warning lump light- For 06MY and 07MY LEGACY
ning. (It occurred while connecting a
select monitor)
Jan. 2007 Ver1.9.26.13 Ver1.2.19 Diagnosis support on 08MY vehicles
Ver1.9.26.14 (PC application, stand-alone)
Added the Trigger of input data func-
tion for the driving recorder (SDR).
Added the Analogue data trigger func-
tion for ECM analog simultaneous
measurement.
Improvement on communication
speed of the old communication in the
PC application selection mode.
Improvement of displaying all data af-
ter selecting items for sampling, which
occurred an error on the data while
stand-alone sampling.
Improvement of showing stand-alone
sampling data, which occurred an error.

322
 SSMΙΙΙ revision history

PC CF
Release Application Application Main revision history Remarks
version version
Apr. 2007 Ver1.10.27.18 Ver.1.2.22 Diagnosis support on 08MY vehicles
Ver1.10.27.19 (PC application, stand-alone)
Addition of a driving recorder function
for VDC and ABS.
Improvement of a code error on airbag
system displayed illegal codes when
all DTCs were displayed.
Improvement of the system caused an
error when it is calibrated by the pres-
sure type occupant detection system.
(from Ver 1.9.26.16)
Jul. 2007 Ver1.11.28.12 Ver.1.2.25 Supports diagnosis of 08MY JUSTY
Ver1.11.28.13 (Other than North America)
Added Each System DTC Check
function (CF application)
Added Impact Sensor Sensitivity Ad-
justment function (CF application)
Added Wireless LAN Communication
function (Other than North America)
Improvement of the driving recorder
function caused an abnormal analog
sampling value.
Improvement of the display for con- From Ver. 1.10.27.20
firming a vehicle type when register-
ing an immobilizer.
Oct. 2007 Ver1.12.29.3 Ver.1.2.27 Addition of "AT learning mode" and
Ver1.12.29.4 "AT air bleeding mode".
Addition of "Compulsory learning Excluding North America
mode" and "Injector code registration
mode" for Diesel engine.
Jan. 2008 Ver.1.13.30.3 Ver.1.2.29 Changed the message displayed in
Ver.1.13.30.4 the AT learning mode
Improved the error that occurred
when the ignition switch was turned
off at the end of reprogramming
Improved the color display variation to
16 kinds in Graph 2
Added the TPMS function (stand-
alone)

323
 List of Part Numbers

List of Part Numbers

No. Part No. Name Remarks
1-1 1B022XU0 SSMΙΙΙ KIT Without carrying case
1-2 1B023XG0 SSMΙΙΙ KIT With carrying case
2 1B061XZ0 SSMΙΙΙ KIT CARRYING CASE SSMΙΙΙ KIT content
3 1B040XZ0 SDI (SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC INTERFACE) SSMΙΙΙ KIT content
4 1B050XZ0 DIAGNOSTIC CABLE SSMΙΙΙ KIT content
5 1B070XZ0 USB CABLE SSMΙΙΙ KIT content
6 1B082XZ0 CF CARD SSMΙΙΙ KIT content
7 1B110XZ0 REMOTE BOX Optional part
8 1B120XZ0 PULSE/ANALOG KIT Optional part

NOTE:
Part No. of SSMΙΙΙ KIT differs depending on destination etc. For applicable Part No., contact the dealership
in which you purchased SSMΙΙΙ.

324